The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutResolution - 2001-R0162 - Contract Bid For Municipal Court Renovations - Saunders Construction Co. - 04/26/2001Resolution No. 2001-RO162 April 26, 2001 Item No. 39 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a Contract per Bid #074- 01/RS for City of Lubbock Municipal Court renovations, by and between the City of Lubbock and Saunders Construction Company of Lubbock, Texas, and related documents. Said Contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this 26th day of April I , A01. ALEX "TY"_COgKE, MAYOR PRO TEM ATTEST: Rebecca Garza, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Victor Kilma , Purchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: William de Haas Contract Manager/Attorney gs/ccdocs/Contract-Saunders Construction Cores April 11, 2001 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR CITY OF LUBBOMMUNICIPAL COURT- RENOVATIONS' BID #074-01/RS BOND CHECK BEST RATING LICENSED P MAR DATE -60- By CIT-LUBB- Y'OF OCK Lubbock, Texas t'4 ITB #074-01/RS, Addendum #1 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13T" STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ADDENDUM #1 ITB #074-01/RS City of Lubbock Municipal Court Renovations MAILED TO VENDOR: February 28, 2001 CLOSE DATE: March 28, 2001 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find enclosed the revised City of Lubbock Bid Form which includes two alternates. 2. On the Drawings, Sheet A1.1 in General Notes, the Bench Seating will be Alternate #1. 3. In the Specifications, Section 16711, Sound Recording/Hearing Assistance System, Item 1.3, (b), list this equipment as an alternate which is Alternate #2. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY F LUBBOCK Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. r" N BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT DATE: PROJECT NUMBER: #074-01/RS - CITY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS Bid of (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of a CITY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. MATERIALS: ($ ) SERVICES: ($ ) s+ TOTAL BID: ($ ) OPTION #1: BENCH SEATING MATERIALS: ($ SERVICES: ($ TOTAL BID OPTION #1; (ADD) ($ ) OPTION #2: SOUND RECORDING/HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM MATERIALS: _ _ ($ SERVICES: ($ ) TOTAL BID OPTION #2: (ADD) ($ ) (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 120 (ONE HUNDRED TWENTY) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $0 (ZERO) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders. OR 1 Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on r which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of Dollars r� ($ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: Secretary Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date MNVBE Firm: 0 7 2 Date: Authorized Signature (Printed or Typed Name) Company Address City, County State _ Zip Code Telephone: = Fax: City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT „ ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 162513 T11 STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ITB #074-01/RS, Addendum #2 ADDENDUM #2 ITB #074-01/RS City of Lubbock Municipal Court Renovations MAILED TO VENDOR: March 22, 2001 OLD CLOSE DATE: March 28, 2001 @ 2:00 P. M. NEW CLOSE DATE: April 12, 2001 @ 3:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any .� item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. The closing date has been changed from March 28, 2001 at 2:00 P. M. to the new closing date of April 12, 2001 at 3:00 P. M. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CI OF LU BOCK Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. ?” 074-01 Rsadd2 r" City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 162513 TH STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ITB #074-01/RS, Addendum #3 ADDENDUM #3 ITB #074-01/RS City of Lubbock Municipal Court Renovations MAILED TO VENDOR: April 6, 2001 CLOSE DATE: April 12, 2001 @ 3:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find enclosed the three page addendum issued by Parkhill, Smith and Cooper dated 4/4/01. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us 074-01 Rsadd3 THANK YOU, Cl F LUB OCK 5 ffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. .1" Of - MEN M. I ADDENDUM NO.3 TO: All Prospective Bidders; Plan Holders PROJECT: Municipal Court Renovation DATE: April 4, 2001 PSC Job No: 03.8793.00 Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Plans and Project Manual. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached to the Contract Documents, and modifies the original Bidding Documents dated January 25, 2001 as noted below: This Addendum consists of two (2) page(s), plus one (1) attachment Part 1 Specifications A. Section 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS I Change paragraph 2.2, C, 1, deleting "walnut" from the sentence. B. Section 08700 HARDWARE 1. Change the following in the DOOR SCHEDULE a. Door 103 frame size from "5 7/8" to 7 5/8" 2. Change the following in HW -9 a. "Schlage Lock AL50PD" to "Schlage Lockset AL50PD" 3. Change the following in HW -2 a. "Schlage Cylinder B462P - One per pair" to "Schlage Deadbolt Lock B462P - One per pair" 4. Change the following in HW -10 a. "LCN Closers 4023T x 3038H" to "LCN Closers 4023T x 3038" 5. Add the following to paragraph 3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW -11 Opening No. 205, 212 Each door to have: 1 1/2 pr Hager Butts BB1279 4 1/2 x 4 1/2,.626 (3 pr at 212) I ea LCN Closer 4023T x 3038 1 ea Hager Stops 236W 1 ea Hager Gasketing 7275 (Perimeter) 1 ea Schlage Latchset AL10S I ea Astragal (0212 only) 6. All new locks are to have removable cores. Adjust schedule as necessary for removable cores. PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers a Architects a Planners 4222 851h Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 473-2200 FAX (806) 473-3500 Lubbock EI Paso Midland Amarillo - C. Section 09250 GYPSUM 1 Add the following to Section SYSTEMS "2. All 1.7,B: gypsum board products shall contain no asbestos. Provide certificate fror D. Section manufacturer COLOstatIng that no asbestos was used in th RAND FINISH l • Add the following to Section 2.5 SCHEDULE a manufacturing of his Product.,, a. W7 ' FRP (color as selected b y architect) 2• Change the following in the FINISH SCHEDULE a Wall Finish in room 201 Courtroom, north wall b. Wall Finish in room 201 Courtroom, south from " c Watt Finish Wl/W4�� to "Wl/W6" :n roo 207 wnNIE , �n8 MER�la�rom "Wl/W Wall :r 4" to Wl/W6" _N d Wall Finish in room 209 TOILET 1 walls should change from 3 • Chane ,all walls change from "W l /W3 it o W3 to 8 the following in the FINISH walls REMARKS a• Remark 8 char to W1/W7" changes from W3 wainscot to 44" AFF. " TO "W7 wainscot E. Section 10800 TOILET to 44 AFF.,, 1 • DELETE ACCESSORIES paragraph 3.4 SCHEDULE and replace with Attachment A. F. Section 15600 INSULATION 1. Delete paragraph 3.3, B.4. insulated. Due to the nature This insulation specification calls for the ducts to be external tore of the room and past problems with excessive sound, externally ducts shall be lined with acoustical duct liner. y Part 2 Drawings Refer to 15400-2, paragraph 2.2. se A. Sheet E3 1 • Add the following to note 2: "New equivalent to Square D panel M3 shall be a surface mounted load center, door, and type QO load center with equipment ground bar, indoor cover type QO breakers. The load center shall not exceed 16" in width. Part 3 Clarifications with h. " A. Section 08700 HARDWARE 1. The door bottoms are to have vinyl inserts B. Section 08700 HARDWARE 1 • All locksets, lever e a leve sets, or privacy sets shall have r operator and be AD All new locks shall be keyed in . Coordinate existing systemC``� and TAS ree quirements. rdmate with Owner for system C • The alarm for the float in the sum the barrel and be labeled " pis to be an audible alarm located at the control box next to corridor next to the High Level Alarm", and be sufficiently loud to be hear ' the sum mechanical room with the door shut. It is the in that if the 1 p reaches a "high level" d m the D• Regarding the work required to e performed onsoundsAHU-5- level within sheet M2: The fan shall be thoroughly cleaned and balanced. as described in circle note 1 on that the bearings for the unit are u good conditions and will The contractor should assume not require replacement under this PARKHILL, SMITH &COOPER, INC. Engineers ■Architects ■ Planners 4222 85" Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 473-2200 . Lubbock FAX (806) 473-3500 EI Paso Midland Amarillo r*s contract. After the fan is cleaned, it shall be balanced in the field by adding weight as required to the wheel to assure smooth operation. Perform the other work listed in the note. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 3 PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 4222 851h Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 473-2200 FAX (806) 473-3500 Lubbock EI Paso Midland Amarillo r Addenda 3 April 4, 2001 Attachment A r Section 10800 PON 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Women 207 1 Grab Bar,,Form a, 36" long 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 42" loos I Combination Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle 1 Sanitaryiv�ipi<uia,ur:.rt Dispenser 3 Sanitary Napkin. and Tampon Disposer 3 Toilet Tissue Dispenser I Soap Dispenser 1 Mirror, 48"x48", top edge at 75" AFF __. B. Men 206 1 Grab Bar, form a, 36" long 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 42" long 1 Combination Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle 1 Toilet Tissue Dispensers .. 1 Soap Dispenser 1 Mirror, 48"x48", top edge at 75" AFF C. Toilet 209 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 36" long Grab Bar, Form a, 42" long Combination Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle 1 Toilet Tissue Dispensers I Soap Dispenser ' 1 Mirror, 18"x48", mounted above sink, w/ bottom edge at 39" AFF r CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID mo TITLE: CITY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS BID NUMBER: 074-01/RS PROJECT NUMBER: 90040.8302.20000 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT INDEX 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS 4. PAYMENT BOND 5. PERFORMANCE BOND 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 7. CONTRACT 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS .+ 10. SPECIFICATIONS A11 40 w M^+A NOTICE TO BIDDERS W w; NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID #074-01/RS Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 ., o'clock D.m. on the 28th day of March. 2001, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project with a budget amount of $420,000.00: "CITY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. Bids are due at 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 28th day of March 2001, and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the bids on the 12th day of April, 2001, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre-bid conference on the 20th day of March, 2001 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Purchasing Conference Room L04, Lubbock, Texas. Bidders may view the plans and specifications without charge at Lubbock City Hall, 1625 13`h Street, Lubbock, Texas, Purchasing Department, Room L-04. Plans and specifications may be obtained by the bidder fora $100.00 ^^ non-refundable charge per set. Plans and specifications may be obtained through Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc., 4222 85th Street, Lubbock, Texas 79423, (806) 473-2200. Plans and specifications will be shipped at the bidder's expense. If bidder requires overnight or second day expedited method parcel shipment, the bidder will incur shipping charges and must furnish the name of the service to be used and the bidder's account number. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, *- Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in - consideration for an award. /04 The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre-bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 775- 2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. Cl OF LUBBOCK VICTOR KILMAN PURCHASING MANAGER GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS a�* POW w ; GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1 BID DELIVERY. TIME & DATE 1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish CITY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed bids will be received no later than 2:00 p.m. CST, the 28th day of March, 2001 at the office listed below. Any bid received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Each bid and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner: "ITB #074-01/RS, CITY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS" and the bid opening date and time. Bidders must also include their company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to: Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room L-04 Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing Department. Mailing of a bid does not ensure that the bid will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If bidder does not hand deliver bid, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS. 1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an addendum. 2 PRE-BID MEETING 2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non -mandatory pre-bid meeting will be held at 10:00 a.m.. March 20th. 2001 in Purchasing Conference Room L04 Lubbock Texas All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they represent. ,., 2.2 It is the bidder's responsibility to attend the pre-bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre-bid meeting to bidders who do not attend the pre-bid meeting. 3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by written bid addenda. 3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing Department. At the request of the bidder, or in the event the Purchasing Department deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing Department. Such addendum issued by the Purchasing Department will be sent to all bidders receiving the original Invitation to Bid (ITB) and will become part of the bid package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original bid. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department no later than five (5) days before the bid closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department in writing or in this ITB should be used in preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in k preparing responses. 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to bidders. 4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Invitation to Bid. 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Purchasing Manager and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the bidder fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If bidder does not notify Purchasing Manager before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 5 BID PREPARATION COSTS 5.1 Issuance of this ITB does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a bid. 5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder. 6 TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. 6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under Section 552.110 of the Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be made available to the requester. 6.3 Marking your entire bid CON FIDENTIALIPROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open Records Act. 7 LICENSES, PERMITS, TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the bidder is or may be required to pay. 8 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 8.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 8.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this bid. 9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS --, 2 9.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. 9.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 10 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 11 BIDDER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 11.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the Purchasing Manager if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. 11.2 NO BIDDER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS INVITATION TO BID (ITB) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN FIVE (5) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE ,. BID CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO: RON SHUFFIELD, SENIOR BUYER City of Lubbock 1625 13`h Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: (806) 775-2164 Email: RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us 12 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 12.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within ONE HUNDRED TWENTY (120) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. 12.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the ^^ progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. 13 PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 14 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute ' an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 15 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP *+ The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until '..+ 3 incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods .- set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 16 GUARANTEES 16.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 16.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the �., procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 16.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub- contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 16.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 17 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 18 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any �., and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by k. the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 19 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 19.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 19.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 20 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES «-* 4 I@ It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or r� other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by ' Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 21 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of �., acceptance of the project. 22 EXPLOSIVES 22.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use ... utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. 22.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. 22.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. ... 23 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and ,., telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 24 INSURANCE 24.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the ,,. City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted before contract execution. 24.2 The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on H this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. r•� 25 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 25.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 25.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 25.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 26 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 27 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 28 PREPARATION FOR BID 28.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. 28.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If ; the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. 28.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: 28.3.1 Bidder's name 28.3.2 Bid for (description of the project). 28.4 Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 28.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. 29 BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the �.., following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. Q) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 30 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. (b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. 31 BID AWARD 31.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole discretion. Unless otherwise specified herein, the City shall award the bid based on the total bid for Total Bid Amount. .., 7 31.2 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications beforethebidpricek;oonoidored. Response to specifications isprimary indetermining the best low bid. Failure bucomply with the specifications may noou|t in disqualification of the bid. 31.3 |ncase oftie bids, preference ^will ba^ given holocal bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to determine possible Anti -Trust violations. 31.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder vvmu|d be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident bidders' home state. 31.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the State ofTexas and under the laws ofthe State ofTexas. |nconnection with the performance ofwork, the Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all other applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the same may boapplicable. 31.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OFANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TOLEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY YO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS ORSERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BYTHE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS INVITATION TO BID. No Text BID SUBMITTAL BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT DATE: PROJECT NUMBER: #074-01/RS - CITY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS • Bid of !'i �y ��dliL//� ��. (hereinafter called Bidder) r To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of a CITY OF'LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. �1 MATERIALS: SERVICES: - ($ �G� i -P - • 93WI MWT!l1lh'rr-:• OPTION #1: BENCH SEATING MATERIALS: ($ SERVICES: - ($ '/Z �� ` 00 t TOTAL BID OPTION #1: (ADD) ($ 13, `��p ° 0 D OPTION #2: SOUND RECORDINGIHEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM MATERIALS: ($ "rf ��00 I SERVICES: TOTAL BID OPTION #2: (ADD) ($ %`P® (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 120 (ONE HUNDRED TWENTY) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $0 (ZERO) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders. go - Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all - necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of Dollars ($ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be Date: changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. Autho zed ignature n.11 d (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) (Printed or/Typed Name) ATT ST: t fd P 1—� srGn'i,Ci T11► Co P C DU^� Secr t ry Ad res , Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Ci� _ , � S County1 ' (I Addenda No. 1 Date a"�� t� State Zip Code -Y Addenda No. Date, -Telephone: Addenda No. Date s=2 Fax: - Addenda No. Date M1WBE Firm: 1, Woman I I Black American I I Native American Hispanic American I I Asian Pacific American I I Other (Specify) 7W 2 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS r 3 Minority Owned Yes No 2. ❑ ❑ 3. ❑ 0 4. ❑ ❑ 5. ❑ ❑ 6. ❑ ❑ 7. 0 ❑ 8. ❑ ❑ 9. ❑ 0 10. ❑ ❑ r 3 CITY OF LUBBOCK CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT of the presence of asbestos containing building materials (ACBM) The purpose of this document is to advise the contractor/bidder of the presence and location of ACBM in the building(s) indicated below. The City of Lubbock makes this notification in our continuing effort to comply with all environmental, health, and safety regulations associated with asbestos. Municipal Square (Municipal Court, Room 214), 915 Avenue J, in Lubbock, contains asbestos containing building materials (ACBM). The description of the known materials and their locations is listed below. Type / Location: —9"X 9" floor tile & mastic beige / Room # 214 Type / Location: Type / Location: The above should not be considered a complete and/or exhaustive list of ACBM in this structure. Materials can be encased behind walls and not readily visible or accessible. Your signature below indicates your acknowledgement and agreement of the following: 1) You have been notified of the presence and location of known ACBM, 2) You will avoid the disturbance of known ACBM unless trained, licensed, and authorized to do so, and 3) You will advise a City representative in the event of any accidental disturbance of the ACBM listed above. Please return the original, signed version with your bid submittal. Contractor Contractor ed�L Contractor Sign e: _ Date: 1 Attention Purchasing dept: Please forward the signed document to the Facilities Management department, Attn: Asbestos Coordinator CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Bidder And Attached to Bid Submittal ,+ the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been aviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within fifteen (15) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, furnish a v lid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. ( ignature)Contrac�(rint) .ONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: I: CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: r� - Name of Agent/Broker: � t -v' - (Print or Type ) -4.obbLc-L -7qq / (4D 1l1 e-rrSkGra - �"A,ddress of Agent/Broker: 3 jU-_}-y� I° City/State/Zip: �� -� q q) 4gent/Broker Telephone Number: .*Date: NOTE TO CONTRACTOR II If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and Faward the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2165 m• BID #074-01/RS - CITY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT DATE: r PROJECT NUMBER: #074.01/RS - CITY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS Bid of '1C (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of a CITY OF'LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. MATERIALS: ($ ) SERVICES: ($ ) TOTAL BID: ($ OPTION #1: BENCH SEATING „ MATERIALS: ($ ) SERVICES: ($ } ^�* TOTAL BID OPTION #1: (ADD) ($ ) OPTION #2: SOUND RECORDING/HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM MATERIALS: ($ SERVICES: ($ TOTAL BID OPTION #2: (ADD) ($ ) (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govem.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 120 (ONE HUNDRED TWENTY) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $0 (ZERO) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Ezj MIM Un UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY 118 Second Avenue SE PO Box 73909 Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52407-3909 319-399-5700 (A Stock Company) BID BOND Know ALL BY THESE PPESENTS, that SAUNDERS CONSTRUCTION, INC. as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and the UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of IOWA, as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, inthesumof FIVE PERCENT OF THE GREATEST AMOUNT BID--------------------- Dollars (S---------5 0--------), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS Now, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or contract documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another parry to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 12TH day of APRIL CONT 00010798 (Witness) A.D., 2001 INC. (Seal) KAY SAUNDERS (Tde) VICE—PRESIDENT UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY (Seal) By 2 (Witness) DEEDEE BRINKER (Attorney-in-fact) EDTIREA' ciiiiASPALTY COMPANY. 'PID 10W ME::�::O'FPICE. .,,.CEDAR`RA 'copy,of _0 ml�- r A �r City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING ..� 162513 TH STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 hftp://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us r" ITB #074-01/RS. Addendum #1 ADDENDUM #1 ITB #074-01/RS City of Lubbock Municipal Court Renovations MAILED TO VENDOR: February 28, 2001 CLOSE DATE: March 28, 2001 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find enclosed the revised City of Lubbock Bid Form which includes two alternates. 2. On the Drawings, Sheet A1.1 in General Notes, the Bench Seating will be Alternate #1. 3. In the Specifications, Section 16711, Sound Recording/Hearing Assistance System, Item 1.3, (b), list this equipment as an alternate which is Alternate #2. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, Z41,P Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. 0" BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT DATE: PROJECT NUMBER: #074-01/RS - CITY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS Bid of (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of a CITY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. MATERIALS: ($ ) SERVICES: ($ ) TOTAL BID: ($ ) OPTION #1: BENCH SEATING MATERIALS: ($ ) SERVICES: ($ ) TOTAL BID OPTION #1: (ADD) ($ ) OPTION #2: SOUND RECORDING/HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM MATERIALS: ($ ) SERVICES: ($ ) TOTAL BID OPTION #2: (ADD) ($ ) (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 120 (ONE HUNDRED TWENTY) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $0 (ZERO) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders. 0" Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of Dollars ($ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: Secretary Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date MfWBE Firm: Woman I I Black Hispanic American I I Asian Date: Authorized Signature (Printed or Typed Name) Company Address City, State Telephone: Fax: - ierican Native A cific American _ _ Other 2 County Zip Code Apr -12-01 08:25am From -CITY 4F LUBBOCK-PURCHASING 8067762164 T-126 P.01/02 F-873 �^ ITS #074-011RS, Addenaum #2. City of Lubbock ADDENDUM #2 12URCHASING DEPARTMENT ITB #074-011RS Ft04M L04. MUNICIPAL -BUILDING 1$25 1STRCCT FCity of LubbocK Municip 3x„ a]CoUrt LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 Renovations PFI: (806)775-2157 Fx,775-2164 hitpJlpumoo6)hasing.ci.lubbock.bc.us MAILED TO VENbOR: March 22, 2001 OLD CLOSE DATE: March 28, 2001 @ 2:00 PM. NEIN CLOSE DATE. April 12, 2001 @ 3:00 P. M. The following !terns take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain In effect. 1. The closing date has been changed from March 28, 2001 at 2:00 P. M. to the new closing date of April 12, 2001 at 3.00 P. M. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.Q. Box 2000 Lubbock. Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806)775 -218A - or Email to: Rshuffiield@Mail.cl.lubbock.ix.us THANK YOU, j Of= tU >�4CK F Eton S ufiield Senior Buyer pLEASE RI*TURN ONE copY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. 074-01 Rsadd2 s++ 77 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 162513 TH STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ITB #074-01/RS, Addendum #3 ADDENDUM #3 ITB #074-01/RS City of Lubbock Municipal Court Renovations MAILED TO VENDOR: April 6, 2001 CLOSE DATE: April 12, 2001 @ 3:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find enclosed the three page addendum issued by Parkhill, Smith and Cooper dated 4/4/01. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us 074-01Rsadd3 THANK YOU, Cl OALUB CK Ron Sh Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. am ..tt.......tUNN .................. ■ tttttttttlttttttt . am ...........11th. .................. t.....tt.t..t..tt. mom 1.0 tl ph 11 11t1■ tl I.tf\ 1 11 I■ 11 ■t/1 � 1 i/ Hl■ .ttttt11t1thhtt■ 1t/tt.h.11t111tt. ADDENDUM N0.3 TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan Holders PROJECT: Municipal Court Renovation DATE: April 4, 2001 PSC Job No: 03.8793.00 Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Plans and Project Manual. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached to the Contract Documents, and modifies the original Bidding Documents dated January 25, 2001 as noted below: This Addendum consists of two (2) page(s), plus one (1) attachment Part 1 Specifications A. Section 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1 Change paragraph 2.2, C, 1, deleting "walnut from the sentence. B. Section 08700 HARDWARE a "" 1. Change the following in the DOOR SCHEDULE a. Door 103 frame size from "5 7/8" to 7 5/8" 2. Change the following in HW -9 "" a. "Schlage Lock AL50PD" to "Schlage Lockset AL50PD" 3. Change the following in HW -2 a. "Schlage Cylinder B462P - One per pair" to "Schlage Deadbolt Lock B462P - One per am pair" 4. Change the following in HW -10 a. "LCN Closers 4023T x 3038H" to "LCN Closers 4023T x 3038" 5. Add the following to paragraph 3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW -1l Opening No. 205, 212 +"* Each door to have: 1 1/2 pr Hager Butts BB1279 4 1/2 x 4 1/2, 626 (3 pr at 212) 1 ea LCN Closer 4023T x 3038 1 ea Hager Stops 236W 1 ea Hager Gasketing 7275 (Perimeter) 1 ea Schlage Latchset AL10S .. 1 ea Astragal (@212 only) 6. All new locks are to have removable cores. Adjust schedule as necessary. for removable cores. 1./11 PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 4222 851h Street a Lubbock, Texas 79423 ^" (806) 473-2200 ■ FAX (806) 4.73-3500 Lubbock EI Paso Midland Anidrillo C. Section 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 1. Add the following to Section 1.7,B: "27 All gypsum board products shall contain no asbestos. Provide certificate from manufacturer stating that no asbestos was used in the manufacturing of this product. " D. Section 09915 COLOR AND FINISH SCHEDULE 1. Add the following to Section 2.5 a. W7 - FRP (color as selected by architect) 2. Change the following in the FINISH SCHEDULE a. Wall Finish in room 201 Courtroom, north wall from "Wl/W4" to "Wl/W6" b. Wall Finish in room 201 Courtroom, south wall from "W1/W4" to "W1/W6" c. Wall Finish in room 207 WOMEN, 208 MEN, all walls should change from "W3" to „W7„ d. Wall Finish in room 209 TOILET, all walls change from "W1/W3" to "W1/W7" 3. Change the following in the FINISH SCHEDUL REMARKS a. Remark 8 changes from "W3 wainscot to 44" AFF." To "W7 wainscot to 44" AFF." E. Section 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES 1. DELETE paragraph 3.4 SCHEDULE and replace with Attachment A. F. Section 15600 INSULATION 1. Delete paragraph 3.3, B.4. This insulation specification calls for the ducts to be externally insulated. Due to the nature of the room and past problems with excessive sound, these ducts shall be lined with acoustical duct liner. Refer to 15400-2, paragraph 2.2. Part 2 Drawings A. Sheet E3 1. Add the following to note 2: "New panel M3 shall be a surface mounted load center, equivalent to Square D type QO load center with equipment ground bar, indoor cover with door, and type QO breakers. The load center shall not exceed 16" in width." Part 3 Clarifications A. Section 08700 HARDWARE 1. The door bottoms are to have vinyl inserts B. Section 08700 HARDWARE 1. All locksets, lever sets, or privacy sets shall have a lever operator and be ADA and TAS compliant. 2. All new locks shall be keyed into existing system. Coordinate with Owner for system requirements. C. The alarm for the float in the sump is to be an audible alarm located at the control box next to the barrel and be labeled "High Level Alarm", and be sufficiently loud to be heard in the corridor next to the mechanical room with the door shut. It is the intent that if the level within the sump reaches a "high level" the alarm sounds.. D. Regarding the work required to be performed on AHU-5-90, as described in circle note 1 on sheet M2: The fan shall be thoroughly cleaned and balanced. The contractor should assume that the bearings for the unit are in good conditions and will not require replacement under this PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 4222 85'h Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423 r+ (806) 473-2200 FAX (806) 473-3500 Lubbock EI Paso Midland Ainahllo contract. After the fan is cleaned, it shall be balanced in the field by adding weight as required to the wheel to assure smooth operation. Perform the other work listed in the note. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 3 +w PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 422285 1h Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423 e■* (806) 473-2200 FAX (806) 473-3500 Lubbock EI Paso Midland Ai a-rillo CITY OF LUBBOCK CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT e+ of the presence of asbestos containing building materials (ACBM) The purpose of this document is to advise the contractoribidder of the presence and location of ACBM in the building(s) indicated below. The City of Lubbock makes this notification in our continuing effort to comply with all environmental, health, and safety regulations associated with asbestos. Municipal Square (Municipal Court, Room 214), 915 Avenue J, in Lubbock, contains asbestos containing building materials (ACBM). The description of the known materials and their locations is listed below. Type / Location: 9" X 9" floor tile & mastic, beige / Room # 214 Type / Location: Type / Location: The above should not be considered a complete and/or exhaustive list of ACBM in this structure. Materials can be encased behind walls and not readily visible or accessible. Your signature below indicates your acknowledgement and agreement of the following: 1) You have been notified of the presence and location of known ACBM, 2) You will avoid the disturbance of known ACBM unless trained, licensed, and authorized to do so, and 3) You will advise a City representative in the event of any accidental disturbance of the ACBM listed above. Please return the original, signed version with your bid submittal. Contractor Name: Contractor Representative: Contractor Date: 5--q - Attention Purchasing dept: Please forward the signed document to the Facilities Management department, Attn: Asbestos Coordinator 0 No Text r BOND CHECK BEST RATING LICENSED TEXAS h DATE BY e( � x., PAYMENT BOND PAYMENT BOND I BOND NO. 54-118215 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE ^: (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $25,000) a. rz KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that SAUNDERS CONSTRUCTION,(hereinaher called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY (hereinafter called the Sure, yN V V We' 0 firr o r l C' f b nafter called the VqW Obligee), in the amount of SIXTY�NE AND NA-------_y� N 8MMney of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 2 6THday of APRIL 20 01,to BID #074-01/RS MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 1ST day of MAY 2001. UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY Surety *By: (Title) DEEDEE BRINKER ATTORNEY—IN—FACT SAUNDERS CONSTRUCTION, INC. (Company Name) By; KAY SAUNDERS (Prin ed Nam (Sig atuie) VICE—PRESIDENT (Title) The undersi ned suret company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby -+ designatesDEEDEEq BRIM 4gent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY Surety *By: (Title) DEEDEE BRINKER ATTORNEY—IN—FACT Approved as to Form 4 City of Lubbock By: /G - City Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. e* rte+ 2 PERFORMANCE BOND BOND CHECK BEST RATING LICE N TEXAS 00� BOND NO. 54-118215 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE �! (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) SAUNDERS CONSTRUCTIQN, INC. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (hereina er calleQo the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY (nereinatter called the Surl"Eff H M6k6 BeNWggfir q� ��Ieb aftercalled the Obligee), in the amount of - - NP. � �0 oars as=ioney of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 26 Tcmy of AP -RTI, 12001to BID #074-01/RS MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument thislST day of MAY 20 01. — UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY SAUNDERS CONSTRUCTION, INC. Surety _ (Company Name) By. �� By KAY SAUNDERS (Title) DEEDEE BRINKER (P inted Name) ATTORNEY—IN—FACT r--Xo I I C xr" Si nat re) VTCF-PRF.S TnFNT (Title) 1 The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designatesDEEDEE BRINKER an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY Surety By: &1.A_jL_ (Title) DEEDEE BRINKER � Approved as to form: ATTORNEY—IN—FACT w City of Lubbo k l City Attorney Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. r^ F 2 e wiv CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE n TO: CITY OF LUBBOCK P.O. BOX 2000 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DATE: 5/8/01 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 TYPE OF PROJECT: MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT SAUNDERS CONSTRUCTION, INC. (Name and Address of Insured) is, at the date of this certificate, insured by this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described, for the typed of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by this company, the further hereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policy noted hereon. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER EFFECTIVE EFFECTIVE LIMITS DATE DATE GENERAL LIABILITY Xx Commercial General Liability GL000052749 4/25/2001 4/25/2002 General Aggregate $ 2,000 Claims Made Products-Comp/Op AGG $ ( Occurrence ( Personal & Adv. Injury $ 888 9 000 Owner's & Contractors Protectiv, Each Occurrence $ i ,U06—Is $ _Snf!—_000 OCCURRENCE -8,�� Fire Damage (Any one Fire) IUU,000 $ 1,000,000 AGGREGATE Med Exp (Any one Person) 5,000 AUTOMOAB1LITY H Any AutoAuto TX000013566 4/25/2001 4/25/2002 Combined Single Limit $ 1 , 000 , 000 - All Owned Autos - Bodily Injury (Per Person) S Scheduled Autos Bodily Injury (Per Accident) $ Hired Autos XX Property Damage S Non -Owned Autos GARAGE LIABILITY = Any Auto Auto Only - Each Accident S - Other than Auto Only: Each Accident $ Aggregate $ = BUILDER'S RISK = 100% of the Total Contract Price $ INSTALLATION FLOATER $ EXCESS LIABILITY Umbrella Form Each Occurrence $ Aggregate $ _ Other Than Umbrella Form $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY The Proprietor/ 0 Included BWWO107819 4/25/2001 6/4/2001 Statutory Limits Partners/Executive : Excluded Each Accident $ 500 , 000 Offi c a re* Saunders Include Disease Policy Limit $500 Cluo Disease -Each Employee $ Kay Saunders Excluded OTHER ..1 17 ... ...,v..i 1 1. _a uuuiUIv1I"I IHaul UU VIl U.L., V.I—F QIIU MU LU WII.II WdIvtr' u P" Subrogation on G.L., O.C.P., Auto, and Workers Comp. The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorsement provide that they may not be changed or canceled by the insurer in less than the legal time required after the insured has received written notice of such change or .� cancellation, or in case there is no legal requirement, In less than five days in advance of cancellation. FIVE COPIES OF THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE Oklahoma Surety North American Specialty/CIA y ame 910nsurerl MUST BE SENT TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK Mi d-Contient Casua ty Title: CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the, project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 -point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: 2 REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see ?" reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule, (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of ' coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and �*• (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. "'""" 3 CONTRACT CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 26th day of April, 2001 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Saunders Construction. Inc. of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #074-01/RS - CITY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COURT RENOVATIONS - $321,361.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have �^ been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. r ATTEST: Secretary TO C ve /AP,PROVED AS TO FORM: City Attorney E ATTEST: Corporate Secretary CONTRACTOR: unjE6LPO-focA-i6n. Thc B PRINTED NAME: S TITLEN � C�- COMPLETE ADDRESS: Saunders Construction, Inc. 4405 Clovis Road Lubbock, Texas 79416 r,u GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT r* p-+ GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership .lir corporation, to Wit. SAI INDERS CONSTRUCTION. INC. who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative GARY SMITH, FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, 'engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless t i otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require mir,--r miscellaneous Mork and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever_ necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) 2 calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or ' men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. r." 3 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and — completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. _ The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any — such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to — furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by — Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or, Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 4 e 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS ** The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." 5 No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra — work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making _ written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the — specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding — of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given — by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. w 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver.. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City of Lubbock as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. A. General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $500.000.00 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job A" 7 and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 0% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. — E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $0 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the - governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and V �! (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. P^ u 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially *+ affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance oPA" 9 Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the _ governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. — (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; _. (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental — entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the — current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; -- 10 0 (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage;" and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and 11 (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; — (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on — the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i) -(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS — OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, in addition to any statutory retainage rights it may have, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except " that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. 12 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES �* The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of . beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $0 ZERO) PER DAY, not as a �.- penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages �. the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that ""°" 13 when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees, 14 i against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. k' 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor ` up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT P" 15 The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final: completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's — Representative. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's _ Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the 16 written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be .�* delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract ,.„ documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, P" however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the ^ 17 date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies — available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be — liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus 18 1"' materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, ,�.. disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. i 19 t. r 4 POM CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS r RE: RESOLUTION NO. 6262, ITEM NO. 39, APRIL 8, 1999 EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Acoustical Ceiling Installer Air Conditioner Installer Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Asbestos Worker Asbestos Supervisor Bricklayer Bricklayer -Helper Carpenter Carpenter -Helper Cement Finisher Drywall Hanger Electrician Electrician -Helper Equipment Operator -Heavy Equipment Operator -Light Floor Installer Glazier Insulator-Piping/Boiler Insulator -Helper Iron Worker Laborer -General Mortar Mixer Painter Plumber Plumber -Helper Roofer Roofer -Helper Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker -Helper Welder -Certified 1 Hourly Rate 11.50 12.50 6.25 9.00 12.50 12.50 7.00 11.00 7.00 8.00 11.00 13.75 7.00 9.50 8.50 9.50 10.50 11.50 7.00 11.00 6.00 6.00 9.50 12.50 7.00 9.00 7.00 10.00 7.00 11.00 EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Rate Asphalt Heaterman 9.00 Asphalt Shoveler 6.00 Concrete Finisher 8.00 Concrete Finisher -Helper 7.00 Electrician 12.00 Flagger 6.00 Form Setter 7.00 Form Setter -Helper 6.25 Laborer -General 6.00 Laborer -Utility 6.75 Mechanic 8.00 Mechanic -Helper 7.00 Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine 7.75 Bulldozer 8.00 Concrete Paving Machine 7.75 Front End Loader 7.25 Heavy Equipment Operator 8.00 Light Equipment Operator 7.25 Motor Grader Operator 9.50 Roller 6.75 Scraper 7.25 Tractor 7.25 Truck Driver -Light 6.50 Truck Driver -Heavy 7.00 2 0 P" EXHIBIT C Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the fair Labor Standards Act. 3 SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE SQUARE RENOVATION PHASE CAPITAL PROJECT # NOVEMBER 1999 F,R�� ARC P.Nootiti% � 9 It ■x�:��~iris 14746 Q� _ Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. ATF of waliggggo Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners DIVISIONS 1 THROUGH 14 4_ .c... �..... (., na1�......• FANNiNO. FANNING 8 ASSOCIATES � CONSULTiNC ENGINEERS 2555 74th STREET LUBBOCK. TEXAS 79423 (806) 745-2533 _q r� 11 DIVISIONS 15 AND 16 CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE SQUARE RENOVATION PHASE 1 CAPITAL PROJECT # NOVEMBER 1999 L/ir �►► 'b. . 14746 P� Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. Z :OF: .. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners (IAC r DIVISIONS 1 THROUGH 14 FANNING. FANNING 6 ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 2555 74th STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79423 ` (BO6) 745-2533 DIVISIONS 15 AND 16 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01010 SECTION 01019 SECTION 01039 SECTION 01090 SECTION 01300 SECTION 01410 SECTION 01500 SECTION 01600 SECTION 01650 SECTION 01700 DIVISION 2 SECTION 02072 SECTION 02300 DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUMMARYOF WORK...........................................................................2 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS..............................................................3 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS...........................................................4 REFERENCE STANDARDS......................................................................7 SUBMITTALS.......................................................................................3 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES.........................................................3 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS .....................4 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT.................................................................3 STARTING OF SYSTEMS.......................................................................2 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.........................................................................3 SITE WORK MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING..................................................3 EARTHWORK.......................................................................................7 CONCRETE CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE.................................................................12 DIVISION 4 MASONRY SECTION04200 UNIT MASONRY...................................................................................8 DIVISION 5 METAL SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS.....................................................................................3 SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK.........................................................................................3 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS.........................................................................3 SECTION 05805 EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES............................................................3 DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS SECTION 06114 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING...........................................................3 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY..............................................................................3 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK...........................................................................5 SECTION 06610 GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED PLASTIC......................................................2 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION.........................................................................3 SECTION 07536 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING...............................................................7 SECTION 07600 SHEET METAL......................................................................................5 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS....................................................................................6 03879300 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 1 01101 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES.................................................................4 SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS........................................................................4 SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS........................................5 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE.......................................................................................10 SECTION 08800 GLAZING.............................................................................................5 DIVISION 9 FINISHES SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS...................................................................7 SECTION 09300 TILE.....................................................................................................5 SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS.........................................................................4 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE...........................................................4 SECTION 09680 CARPETING..........................................................................................3 SECTION09900 PAINTING..........................................................................................10 SECTION 09915 COLOR AND FINISH SCHEDULE.............................................................3 DIVISION 10 SPECIALITIES SECTION 10050 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES..............................................................2 SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS....................................................................3 SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS...........................................................3 SECTION 10260 WALL GUARDS, HANDRAILS AND CORNER GUARDS ..............................2 SECTION 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES..........................................................................7 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS SECTION 12700 COURTROOM WOOD BENCH SEATING...................................................2 DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS SECTION 14240 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS.......................................................................7 DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL SECTION 15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL .................13 SECTION 15300 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES...................................................................4 SECTION 15310 PLUMBING SYSTEMS............................................................................3 SECTION 15330 CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS.............................................2 SECTION 15390 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION............................................................3 SECTION 15400 AIR DISTRIBUTION................................................................................4 SECTION 15500 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS....................................................................3 SECTION15600 INSULATION........................................................................................3 SECTION15700 EQUIPMENT.........................................................................................5 SECTION 15800 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS ............2 SECTION 15900 TEMPERATURE REGULATION.................................................................5 03879300 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 2 01/01 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL SECTION 16050 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS SECTION 16110 CONDUCTORS.....................................................................................2 SECTION 16211 WIRING DEVICES..................................................................................2 SECTION 16301 GROUNDING SECTION 16410 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION...................................................................3 SECTION16510 LIGHTING.............................................................................................2 SECTION 16611 MOTORS EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING...................................... 2 ,.1 SECTION 16711 SOUND RECORDING / HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM ...........................6 SECTION 16810 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM..................................................7 R-, rte+ P!*A pw 03879300 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 3 01/01 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project; Work covered by Contract Documents. B. Work by Owner. C. Owner furnished products. D. Contractor use of site and premises. E. Future work. F. Work Sequence. G. Owner occupancy. 1.3 PROJECT; WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Without force or effect, work of the Project consists of the renovation of a second floor space for new courtroom, jury room and public toilets, along with the addition of a two -stop hydraulic passenger elevator. 1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Limit use of site and premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy. 2. Work by Others and Work by Owner. 3. Use of site and premises by public. B. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Notify Owner. 1.5 WORK SEQUENCE A. During the construction period, coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner and Architect: Normal hours of operation are 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Monday through Friday. However, there is staff in the facility 24 hours/day, 7 days/week. A 24 hour notice to Owner must be given prior to working before or after normal hours of operation. 1.6 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The Owner will occupy the premises during entire period of construction for the conduct of normal operations. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used 03879300 01/01 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-1 PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879300 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-2 01101 SECTION 01019 d CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Schedule of Values. B. Application for Payment. C. Change Procedures. D. Measurement and payment - unit prices. E. Alternates. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Schedule of Values. B. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product substitutions. 1.6 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as authorized by AIA A201, 1987 Edition, Paragraph 7.4 by issuing Architect's Supplemental Instructions on Architect's Standard Supplemental Instruction form. 03879300 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 01019-1 01/01 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the major specification Section. Identify site mobilization, general conditions, testing, bonds and insurance as separate line items. D. Include in each line item, the amount of Allowances specified in this Section. For unit price Allowances, identify quantities taken from Contract Documents multiplied by the unit cost to achieve the total for the item. E. Include within each line item, a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit [three] copies of each application on AIA Form G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet. B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. C. Payment Period: As defined in Owner -Contractor agreement. D. Include one copy of waiver of liens from each subcontractor. 1.6 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as authorized by AIA A201, 1987 Edition, Paragraph 7.4 by issuing Architect's Supplemental Instructions on Architect's Standard Supplemental Instruction form. 03879300 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 01019-1 01/01 B. The Architect may issue a Construction Change Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications and a change in Contract Time for executing the change. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within 7 days. C. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting request for change to the Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600. D. Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Architect. E. Unit Price Change Order: For pre -determined unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not pre -determined, execute Work under a Construction Change Directive. Changes in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order. F. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a directive, on AIA Form G713 Construction Change Directive signed by the Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute the change. G. Time and Material Change Order 1 . Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. 2. Architect will determine the change allowable in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. 3. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. 4. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work. H. Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order. I. Execution of Change Orders: Owner will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. J. Change Order: Furnish an itemized breakdown, in form acceptable to Architect of all costs and supporting information including but not limited to quantities, material prices, tier subcontracted work is performed at, labor rates and employer payments and rental rates. The itemized breakdown detail shall be the same for any subcontractor work. Provide complete supporting information for profit and overhead or markups used when so requested. Consider the following items a part of overhead or Contractor's and sub -contractor's mark-up and do not include as a separate cost item: Labor for Superintendents, Assistant Superintendents, home office personnel, timekeepers and maintenance mechanics at any level of contracting; individual pieces of equipment, hand tools or instruments having a new value of $500.00 or less, whether or not consumed by use; on site and main offices; modification to record contract documents nor guarantee period costs. 1.7 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT - UNIT PRICES A. Authority: Measurement methods are delineated in the individual specification sections. B. Take measurements and compute quantities. The Architect will verify measurements and quantities. C. Unit Quantities: quantities and measurements indicated in the Bid Form are for contract purposes only. Actual quantities provided will determine payment. D. Payment Includes: Full compensation for required labor, Products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit. 03879300 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 01019-2 01/01 E. Defect Assessment: Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements. If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the u Work, the Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. 1.8 ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner -Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used a PART 3 EXECUTION r Not Used END OF SECTION CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 01019-3 OR SECTION 01039 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. B. Field engineering. C. Preconstruction meeting. D. Preinstallation meetings. E. Cutting and patching. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of the Project Manual to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Large Apparatus: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. F. Items which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details G. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owners occupancy. H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. v 03879300 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039-1 «� 01/01 1.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Employ a Land Surveyor registered in the State of Texas and acceptable to Architect. B. Locate and protect survey control and reference points. C. Control datum for survey is that shown on Drawings. D. Verify set -backs and easements, confirm drawing dimensions and elevations. E. Provide field engineering services. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing recognized engineering survey practices. F. Submit a copy of registered site drawing and certificate signed by the Land Surveyor that the elevations and locations of the Work are in conformance with the Contract Documents. 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice to Proceed. B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect, Contractor and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1 . Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress schedule. 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract and the Architect. 5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures. 6. Scheduling. a. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. b. Owner's requirements and partial occupancy. C. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. d. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. e. Survey and building layout. f. Security and housekeeping procedures. g. Schedules. h. Procedures for testing. i. Procedures for maintaining record documents. j. Requirements for start-up of equipment. k. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 7. Scheduling activities of geotechnical Engineer. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants with two copies to Architect and those affected by decisions made. 1.6 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. When required in individual specification Sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at work site prior to commencing work of the Section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting. 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes, and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants, with three copies to Architect. 03879300 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039-2 01/01 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Motors: Specific motor type is specified in individual specification sections. B. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box. C. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. C. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct location. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply any manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to: 1 . Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. D. Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work, and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. r 03879300 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039-3 01/01 J. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during the Work to the Architect for decision or remedy. END OF SECTION 03879300 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039-4 01/01 SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance. B. Schedule of references. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents. C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. The contractual relationship duties and responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Architect shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES AA Aluminum Association 900 19th St., NW Washington, DC 20006 (202) 862-5100 www.aluminum.org AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Sq., Suite 104 Schaumburg, IL 60173-4268 (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AABC Associated Air Balance Council 1518KSt.,NW Washington, DC 20005 (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Chemists P.O. Box 12215 1 Davis Drive Research Triangle Park, NC 27709-2215 03879300 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-1 01/01 AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association Association 03879300 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-2 01/01 American Wood Council 1111 Nineteenth St. NW, Suite 800 Washington, DC 20036 ACI ACI International P.O. Box 9094 Farmington Hills, MI 48333-9094 ADC Air Diffusion Council 104 So. Michigan Ave., No. 1500 Chicago, IL 60603 AGA American Gas Association P.O. Box 79230. Baltimore, MD 21279-0230 AGC Associated General Contractors of America 1957 E Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 Al Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building College Park, MD 20740 AIA American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue Eighth Floor Chicago, IL 60611 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 333 W. Hampden Avenue Englewood, CO 80110 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 30 West University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 APA American Plywood Association Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 03879300 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-2 01/01 ARI Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 4301 North Fairfax Dr., Suite 425 Arlington, VA 22203 www.ari.org ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle, N.E. Atlanta, GA 30329 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers 15233 Ventura Blvd., Suite 811 Sherman Oaks, CA 91403 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 2310 South Walter Reed Drive Arlington, VA 22206 AWPA American Wood -Preservers' Association 3246 Fall Creek Highway, Suite 1900 Grandbury, TX 76049-7979 AWS American Welding Society 550 LeJeune Road, N.W. Miami, FL 33135 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 BHMA Builders' Hardware Manufacturer Association 60 East 42nd Street, Room 511 New York, NY 10165 CDA Copper Development Association 57th Floor, Chrysler Building 405 Lexington Avenue New York, NY 10174 CFR Code of Federal Regulations North Capitol Street between G & H Streets, NW Washington, DC 20402 CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission 1 1 11 Eighteenth Street, NW Washington, DC 20207 03879300 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-3 01/01 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 03879300 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-4 01/01 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60195 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 7711 Old Springhouse Road McLean, VA 22102 EJCDC Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee American Consulting Engineers Council 1015 15th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 25 North Broadway Tarrytown, NY 10591 EPA Environmental Protection Agency 401 M Street, SW Washington, DC 20460 FCC Federal Communications Commission 1919 M Street, NW Washington, DC 20554 FM Factory Mutual System 1 151 Boston -Providence Turnpike P.O. Box 688 Norwood, MA 02062 GA Gypsum Association 810 First St. NE, Suite 510 Washington, DC 20002 GANA Glass Association of North America 2945 SW Wanamaker Drive, Suite A Topeka, KS (785) 271-0208 HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association 1825 Michael Faraday Drive P.O. Box 2789 HPW H.P. White Laboratory 3114 Scarboro Road Street, MD 21154 Reston, VA 22090-2789 ICBO International Conference of Building Officials 5360 S. Workman Mill Road Whittier, CA 90601 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 03879300 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-4 01/01 IES Illumination Engineering Society of North America 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 IMIAC International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council International Masonry Institute 815 15th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association 221 North LaSalle Street Chicago, IL 60601 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 221 North LaSalle Street Chicago, IL 60601 NBS National Bureau of Standards (U.S. Department of Commerce) Gaithersburg, MD 20234 NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association P.O. Box 781 Herndon, VA 22070 NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau 8224 Old Courthouse Road Vienna, VA 22180 NEC National Electrical Code (by NFPA) NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 7315 Wisconsin Avenue Bethesda, MD 20814 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 2101 'L' Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20037 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Battery March Park Quincy, MA 02269 NFoPA National Forest Products Association 1619 Massachusetts Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association P.O. Box 34518 Memphis, TN 38135 NPCA National Paint and Coating Association 1500 Rhode Island Avenue N.W. Washington, D.C. 20005 03879300 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01/01 01090-5 NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association 8600 Bryn Mawr Avenue Chicago, IL 60631 NSF National Sanitation Foundation — 3475 Plymouth Road P.O. Box 1468 Ann Arbor, MI 47106 NWWDA National Wood Window & Door Manufacturers Association 205 W.Touhy Avenue Park Ridge, IL 60068 OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor) Government Printing Office Washington, D.C. 20402 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077 PS Product Standard U. S. Department of Commerce Washington, DC 20203 -. RILEM International Union of Testing and Research Laboratories for Materials and Structures RILEM Secretariat General ENS -Pavillon des Jardins, 61 avenue du President Wilson F-94235 Cachan Cedex, France RIS Redwood Inspection Service One Lombard Street San Francisco, CA 94111 — RMA Rubber Manufacturer's Association 1400 K Street, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20005 SDI Steel Deck Institute P.O. Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 S.D.I. Steel Door Institute _. 712 Lakewood Center North 14600 Detroit Avenue Cleveland, OH 44107 SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council Route 1 1, Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045 — 03879300 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-6 01/01 — i SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 401 North Michigan Avenue Chicago, IL 60611 (312) 644-6610 SJI Steel Joist Institute 1205 48th Avenue North, Suite A Myrtle Beach, SC 29577 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association 8224 Old Court House Road Vienna, VA 22180 SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau 4709 Scenic Highway Pensacola, FL 32504-9094 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213 TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. Box 326 Princeton, NJ 08540 UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 6980 S.W. Varns Road Box 23145 Portland, OR 97223 WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute 8361 A Greensboro Drive McLean, VA 22102 WWPA Western Wood Products Association 1500 Yeon Building Portland, OR 97204 PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879300 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01/01 01090-7 FWQ PART1 GENERAL SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures. !�^ B. Construction progress schedules. C. Proposed products list. D. Shop drawings. E. Product data. F. Samples. G. Manufacturers' instructions. H. Manufacturers' certificates. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS ,— A. Section 01019 - Contract Considerations: Schedule of Values. B. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Test Reports. C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract warranty, manufacturer's certificates and closeout submittals. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with Contractor's standard transmittal letter including Contractor's name, address and phone number. B. Sequentially number the transmittal forms using the Section number or Contractors other sequential numbering system. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, as appropriate. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to architect's at business address. Coordinate submission of related items. F. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the contractor. G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. H. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal. I. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. J. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. K. Submit all submittals using an 8 %z x 11 inch format. For submittals larger than 8 '/z x 11 inches, prefold to an 8 %2 x 11 format. Submittals not pre -folded will be rejected. L. At Architect's option, submittals will not be individually marked, but will be reviewed using Architect's standard submittal review form. 03879300 SUBMITTALS 01300-1 01/01 M. Copies Required 1. Structural and Architectural Submittals: Number of copies Contractor requires plus two copies which will be retained by Architect. 2. Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Submittals: Number of copies contractor requires plus two copies which will be retained by Architect. 1.5 RESUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Revise initial submittal as required and resubmit to meet requirements as specified and as noted on submittal reviews. B. Mark as RESUBMITTAL. _ C. Re -use original transmittal number and supplement with sequential alphabetical or numeric suffix for each re -submittal. 1.6 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each _ product. B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Drawing Size: Minimum 8 '/z x 11 inches and maximum 30 x 42 inches. 1. For drawings larger than 11 x 17 inches, submit in the form of one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. 2. For drawings 11 x 17 inches and smaller, submit opaque reproductions. B. Draw details to a minimum size of 1 % inches equal to 1 foot. C. Draw site plans to same scale indicated on contract drawings. D. Draw all other plans to a minimum size of 1/8 inch equal to 1 foot. E. At Architect's option, depending on extent of review comments, either all opaque copies will be marked or only the reproducible will be marked and returned to the Contractor to make copies required. 1.8 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by the Architect. B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project. C. Include recommendations for application and use, and reference to compliance with specified standards of trade associations and testing agencies. D. Include notation of special coordination requirements for interfacing with adjacent work. E. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.9 SAMPLES A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors or in custom colors, textures, and patterns, as specified and as scheduled for Architect's selection. C. Where variations in color, pattern or texture are inherent in the material or product, submit multiple samples to indicate the approximate range or variations. 03879300 SUBMITTALS 01300-2 01/01 We D. Include full Project information and identification of manufacturer, model number, type, style and color on each sample. E. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification Sections; [one] [two] of which will be retained by Architect. F. Reviewed samples may remain as part of the Work are indicated in individual specification Sections. 1.10 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. C. Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. 1.11 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to Architect. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used 03879300 01/01 END OF SECTION SUBMITTALS 01300-3 SECTION 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selection and payment. B. Contractor submittals. C. Laboratory responsibilities. ., D. Laboratory reports. E. Limits on testing laboratory authority. F. Contractor responsibilities. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00220 - Geotechnical Data: Soil Investigation Data. B. Section 01019 - Contract Considerations: Allowance for payment of testing services. C. Section 01300 - Submittals: Manufacturer's certificates. D. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems and Section 15990: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. E. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents. F. Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and tests required, and standards for testing. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. B. ANSUASTM E329 - Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction. 1.5 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform specified inspection and testing. B. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM E329 and ANSI/ASTM D3740R. B. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State of Texas. C. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. D. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards (NBS) standards or accepted values of natural physical t constants. a r 03879300 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410-1 01/01 1.7 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS _ A. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 1.8 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES A. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. B. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. C. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards. D. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or Products. F. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Architect. G. Attend preconstruction conferences and progress meetings. 1.9 LABORATORY REPORTS A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit three copies of laboratory report to Architect, and to Contractor. B. Include: 1. Date issued, 2. Project title and number, 3. Name of inspector, 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection, 5. Identification of product and Specifications Section, 6. Location in the Project, 7. Type of inspection or test, B. Date of test, 9. Results of tests and 10. Conformance with Contract Documents. C. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of test results. 1 .10 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.11 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Deliver to laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. C. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test samples. D. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. 03879300 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410-2 01/01 E. Employ services of a separate qualified testing laboratory, arrange with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 1.12 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. Section 02223 - Backfilling: Requirements for sampling and testing backfilled materials. B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry System: Obtain four sample facebrick units and test for conformance to ASTM C67. C. At the time of final inspection and tests of the power and lighting system, all connections at panels, switches, circuit breakers, etc., and all splices shall be complete. D. Each power, lighting and control circuit shall be tested and proven free of breaks, short circuits or grounds. On all conductors rated at 600 volts, Megger shall be used to test circuits. E. As indicated in individual Specification Sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879300 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01/01 01410-3 SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, and water control. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning. 1.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Connect to existing power service. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. B. Provide temporary electric feeder from existing building electrical service at location as directed. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. C. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. D. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes as required. Provide flexible power cords as required. E. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location in conformance with National Electric Code. F. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. G. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools for every 2000 sq ft of active work area and at specific locations as required. 2. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting. 1.5 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watts/sq ft. B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas after dark for r-� security purposes. D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. ' E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. r 03879300 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND 01500-1 +" 01/01 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1 .6 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Utilize Owner's existing heat plant, extend and supplement with temporary heat devices as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. C. Enclose building prior to activating temporary heat in accordance with Article 1 .14 - Exterior Enclosure, in this Section. D. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. E. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.7 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Provide temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. 1.8 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.9 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE — A. Connect to and pay for existing water source for construction operations. B. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water. ,r^4 C. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. 1.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Existing facilities may be used during construction operations. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. B. At end of construction, return facilities to same or better condition than originally found. 1.11 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights- of-way and for public access to existing building. C. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life. D. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. 1.12 FENCING A. Construction: At Contractor's option, commercial grade chain link fence or solid wood fence, painted. B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 03879300 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND 01500-2 01/01 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.16 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. if traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. ' F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas 1.17 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and existing facilities and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1.18 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and dispose off-site at intervals as required to maintain clean site. 03879300 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND 01/01 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-3 1.13 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. ,.. 1.14 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary insulated weather -tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating �. and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 1.15 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas , and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Construction: Framing and [reinforced polyethylene] [plywood] [gypsum board] sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces; insulate to 8-11 with maximum Flame Spread rating of 75 in accordnace with ASTM E84. 1.16 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. if traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. ' F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas 1.17 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and existing facilities and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1.18 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and dispose off-site at intervals as required to maintain clean site. 03879300 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND 01/01 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-3 1.19 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, and materials as soon as permanent facilities can be utilized. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879300 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND 01500-4 01/01 TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Product Delivery, Storage and Handling. C. Product options. D. Substitutions. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00100 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures. " B. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Product quality monitoring. 1.4 PRODUCTS A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work and does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. D. Materials required to match existing work and not otherwise specified, shall be equal to the existing work in quality, color and finish. Workmanship and installation shall be comparable to adjacent existing work. The Architect shall be the sole authority in determination of acceptable work. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING r A. Delivery 1 . Deliver materials, products and equipment to the project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. i d - 2. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. .A 3. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 4. Arrange deliveries in accord with the construction schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation to avoid unnecessary delays in the construction process. B. Storage 1. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 2. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures. 3. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. 03879300 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-1 01/01 4. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Products. 5. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. 6. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 7. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 8. Materials, products and equipment may be stored off site in a bonded and insured warehouse approved by the Architect and Owner. Pay all costs incurred for off-site storage facilities. Products properly stored in off-site storage facilities maybe included in progress pay requests with written approval of the Architect. C. Handling 1. Handle materials, products and equipment in a manner prescribed by manufacturer or specified to protect from damage during storage and installation. 1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for Substitutions during the bidding period to requirements specified in this Section. B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request constitutes a representation that the Bidder: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re -approval by authorities. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit four copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. 03879300 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-2 01/01 c PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION 03879300 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-3 01101 t; SECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials. C. Division 15 - Testing Adjusting and Balancing. 1.4 STARTING SYSTEMS r-. A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative and Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01410 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at equipment location. I 03879300 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650-1 �= 01/01 E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879300 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650-2 01/01 i SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Adjusting. D. Project record documents. E. Operation and maintenance data. F. Warranties. G. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Progress cleaning. B. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems: System start-up, testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.5 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. D. Replace filters of operating equipment. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. H. Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes. I. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if air conditioning units were operated during construction. 1.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 03879300 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-1 s + 01101 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1 . Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1 . Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 6. Changes made by addenda and modification. F. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit one copy 15 days prior to final inspection, 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, bound in three D ring binders with durable plastic covers. B. This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. C. Submit two final volumes revised within ten days after final inspection. �* D. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. E. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. F. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, type on 24 pound white paper. G. Part 1 : Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. H. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 1. Significant design criteria. 2. List of equipment. 3. Parts list for each component. 4. Operating instructions necessary for Owner to make full and efficient use of equipment including recommended maintenance and seasonal change -over procedures for HVAC systems. 5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 6. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 03879300 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-2 01101 I. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: 1. Shop drawings and product data. 2. Air and water balance reports. 3. Certificates. 4. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. 1.9 WARRANTIES A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble with metal prong binder in durable plastic presentation cover. D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.10 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections. B. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION 03879300 01/01 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-3 SECTION 02072 :;. MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction of temporary barriers. B. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures. C. Removal of designated construction. D. Disposal of materials. Refer to items as indicated on drawings. E. Identification of utilities. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Owner's continued occupancy. B. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Re -installation of removed and stored products. C. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Temporary enclosures, dust control barricades, security at Owner occupied areas, and cleanup during construction. D. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, subsurface obstructions, and subsurface construction. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical disconnection and re -connection. low B. Obtain required permits from authorities. C. Do not close or obstruct egress width to any building or site exit. D. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 5 days prior written notice to Owner. E. Conform to procedures applicable when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Section 01300 -Submittals: Work schedule. B. Schedule Work to coincide with new construction. A* C. Perform noisy work: 1. Between the hours of 5 p.m. and 7 a.m. 03879300 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072-1 01/01 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect/Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION — A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers. B. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. _ C. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit continued Owner occupancy. D. Where demolition occurs immediately adjacent to occupied portions of the building, construct dust -proof partitions of minimum 4 -inch studs, 5/8 -inch drywall (joints taped) on occupied side, 1/2 -inch fire -retardant plywood on demolition side. Fill partition cavity with sound -deadening insulation. E. Protect existing materials and equipment which are not to be demolished. F. Provide protective covers over existing carpet, vinyl composition, sheet vinyl, ceramic tile, wood, flooring, and stairs including floor finish in elevator. G. Provide elevator manufacturer's standard protective padding on elevator walls. H. Provide temporary protective corner protection at all outside corners along route for removal of refuse. I. Do not store nor pile demolition materials nor equipment on any part of the structure in a manner that would cause permanent damage. J. Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring. K. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. L. Mark location and termination of utilities. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover. M. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress. N. Set refuse containers at location approved by Owner. O. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other methods to limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. P. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. 3.2 DEMOLITION A. Disconnect remove, cap, and identify designated utilities within demolition areas. B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members. C. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. D. Maintain fire protection services during demolition operations. E. Remove temporary Work. 03879300 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072-2 01/01 F. Demolish plaster in small sections. Cut plaster at junctures with construction to remain using power -driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power -driven impact tools. 1. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 2. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. G. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Architect in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Architect, rearrange demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. H. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. 3.3 DISPOSAL A. Coordinate route for movement of refuse within the existing building with the Architect and Owner to create the least amount of interference with Owner's continuing occupancy and operations. B. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn or bury materials on site. C. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. D. Remove materials as Work progresses. 3.4 SALVAGED MATERIALS A. Salvaged Items: 1. Carefully remove, clean, and deliver to Owner at location as directed by the Owner, the items indicated in the schedule at the end of this Section. 2. Carefully remove, clean, store and protect for re -use the items indicated in the schedule at the end of this Section. 3.5 CLEANUP A. Repair damaged pavement and landscaping under refuse containers and return to original condition. B. Repair existing finishes to remain, which are damaged during demolition, to match adjacent finishes. C. Vacuum and shampoo all soiled carpet along the refuse removal route. Repair or replace carpet along the refuse removal route which has been damaged. Make repairs to satisfaction of Owner. D. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from site. E. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean. F. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. G. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by demolition work. END OF SECTION 03879300 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072-3 01/01 i i SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs -on -grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines. 4. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for buried utility structures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Testing Laboratory Services" for material testing procedure and payment. 2. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, removing topsoil, and protecting trees to remain. 3. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for granular course over vapor retarder. 4. Division 15 and 16 Sections for excavating and backfilling buried mechanical and electrical utilities and buried utility structures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. B. Excavation: Removal of material encountered_ above subgrade elevations and the reuse or disposal of materials removed. 1. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as re- medial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. C. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. D. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or layer placed between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk. E. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. F. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Laboratory analysis of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. One optimum moisture — maximum density curve for each soil material. 03879300 01/01 EARTHWORK 02300-1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirement of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock -definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: Excavated or imported soil materials; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. Imported soil materials shall have a maximum liquid limit of 35, plasticity index shall be between 7 and 12, and a maximum of 45 percent by weight passing a #200 seive. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols. D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. E. Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1- 1/2- inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. F. Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. G. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1 - inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali -resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows: 03879300 EARTHWORK 02300-2 01/01 fA k PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. C. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES Aft" A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.2 inches. Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility r Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades. t- 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. a 1. Clearance: As indicated. 03879300 EARTHWORK 02300-3 �. 01/01 C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple -duct conduit units, hand -excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill 3. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 3.8 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Con- tract provisions for changes in the Work. C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect. 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.11 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Inspecting and testing and approval of underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris from excavation. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 03879300 EARTHWORK 02300-4 01/01 ""� 3.13 FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills. B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material followed by a minimum of 6 inch topsoil. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill, use satisfactory soil material. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill, use satisfactory soil material. 3.14 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice , 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.15 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for ;., material compacted by hand -operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 1557: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 A.. percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade x and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent. 03879300 EARTHWORK 02300-5 01/01 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. B. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. C. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. D. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed. E. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. ,. F. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.13 FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills. B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material followed by a minimum of 6 inch topsoil. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill, use satisfactory soil material. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill, use satisfactory soil material. 3.14 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice , 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.15 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for ;., material compacted by hand -operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 1557: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 A.. percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade x and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent. 03879300 EARTHWORK 02300-5 01/01 3.16 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. - 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1.2 inches. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1.2 inches. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inches C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10 -foot straightedge. 3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared subgrade and as follows: 1. Place base course material over subbase. 2. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 3. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross -slope grades. 4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches or less, place - materials in a single layer. 5. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted. B. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: The Contractor will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality -control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Field in-place density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method according to ASTM D 2922, provided that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556. With each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages according to ASTM D 3017. 2. When field in-place density tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks if both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect. -" 3. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. — 03879300 EARTHWORK 02300-6 01/01 4. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests. 5. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests. D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.19 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. D. Scarify to depth of 4 inches existing lawn and turf asks which have been compacted, rutted and disturbed from construction activities. 1. Reshape areas to conform to existing grading and remove all construction debris and other foreign materials uncovered during scarifying. 3.20 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02300 03879300 EARTHWORK 01/01 02300-7 No Text SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE r PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs -on -grade. 2. Division 2 Section "Concrete Paving, Curb and Gutter, and Sidewalks" for concrete pavement and walks. C. Cast -in-place concrete includes the following: 1. Foundations and footings. 2. Slabs -on -grade. r 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACT 315, `'Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. D. Design and engineering of formwork are Contractor's responsibility. E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each material item complies with requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. The Contractor will be responsible for coordinating and scheduling required testing. B. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice." .n, 03879300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1 01/01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM -FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. D. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent with a maximum of 350g/L Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form -release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form -facing materials. E. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, removable or snap -off metal or glass -fiber -reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. 1. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60, deformed bars. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber -reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to Archi- tect. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C. B. Normal -Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 1. For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or course aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling. C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with Al. other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. — 03879300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 01/01 i 2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT r: A. Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated or monofilament polyproplyene fibers engineered and designed for secondary reinforcement of concrete slabs, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, not less than % inch long. 2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Provide vapor retarder that is resistant to deterioration when tested according to ASTM 154, as follows: 1. Polyethylene sheet not less than 8 mils thick. B. Fine -Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a No. 4 sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve; meeting deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates. 2.8 CURING MATERIALS A. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film, waterproof paper, burlap - polyethylene sheet. B. Clear, Solvent -Borne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0.55 kg/sq. m when applied at 200 sq. ft/gal. C. Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: Liquid -type membrane -forming curing compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0.55 kg/sq. m when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. A -H 3 Way Sealer, Anti -Hydro Co., Inc. b. Spartan -Cote, The Burke Co. C. Conspec #1, Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co. d. Sealco 309, Cormix Construction Chemicals. e. Day -Chem Cure and Seal, Dayton Superior Corp. f. Eucocure, Euclid Chemical Co. g. Horn Clear Seal, A.C. Horn, Inc. ... h. L&M Cure R, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. i. Masterkure, Master Builders, Inc. j. CS -309, W.R. Meadows, Inc. k. Seal N Kure, Metalcrete Industries. L Kure -N -Seal, Sonneborn-Chemrex. . m. Stontop CS2, Stonhard, Inc. D. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Polyvinyl Acetate (Interior Only): �..;, 1) Superior Concrete Bonder, Dayton Superior Corp. 2) Euco Weld, Euclid Chemical Co. 3) Weld -Crete, Larsen Products Corp. 4) Everweld, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 5) Herculox, Metalcrete Industries. 6) Ready Bond, Symons Corp. b. Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene: ^" 1) Acrylic Bondcrete, The Burke Co. 2) Strongbond, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. 3) Day -Chem Ad Bond, Dayton Superior Corp. .., 4) SBR Latex, Euclid Chemical Co. 5) Daraweld C, W.R. Grace & Co. 03879300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3 01/01 2.9 RELATED MATERIALS A. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two -component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1 . Proportion normal -weight concrete according to ACI 301. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. 1. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing. C. Design mixes to provide normal -weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi. 2. Water: cement ratio 0.58 maximum (non-airentrained), 0.46 maximum (air - entrained). D. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps, slabs and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches. 2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 5 inches. 3. Other concrete: Not more than 5 inches. E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 20 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 03879300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 01/01 6) Hornweld, A.C. Horn, Inc. 7) Everbond, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 8) Acryl-Set, Master Builders Inc. 9) Intralok, W.R. Meadows, Inc. 10) Acrylpave, Metalcrete Industries. 11) Sonocrete, Sonneborn-Chemrex. 12) Stonlock LB2, Stonhard, Inc. 13) Strong Bond, Symons Corp. E. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two -component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Burke Epoxy M.V., The Burke Co. b. Spec -Bond 100, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. G. Resi-Bond (J-58), Dayton Superior. -- d. Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620, Euclid Chemical Co. e. Epoxtite Binder 2390, A.C. Horn, Inc. f. Epabond, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. g. Concresive Standard Liquid, Master Builders, Inca h. Rezi-Weld 1000, W.R. Meadows, Inc. i. Metco Hi -Mod Epoxy, Metalcrete Industries. j. Sikadur 32 Hi -Mod, Sika Corp. k. Stonset LV5, Stonhard, Inc. I. R-600 Series, Symons Corp. 2.9 RELATED MATERIALS A. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two -component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1 . Proportion normal -weight concrete according to ACI 301. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. 1. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing. C. Design mixes to provide normal -weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi. 2. Water: cement ratio 0.58 maximum (non-airentrained), 0.46 maximum (air - entrained). D. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps, slabs and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches. 2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 5 inches. 3. Other concrete: Not more than 5 inches. E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 20 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 03879300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 01/01 F. Use air -entraining in admixture exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percent, within the following limits: 1. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer chemicals, or hydraulic pressure: a. Air Content: 4.5 percent (mod. exposure) 5.5 percent (severe exposure) for 1 -1/2 -inch- nominal maximum aggregate size. b. Air Content: 4.5 percent (mod. exposure) 6 percent (severe exposure) for 1- inch- nominal maximum aggregate size. C. Air Content: 5 percent (mod. exposure) 6 percent (severe exposure) for 3/4- inch- nominal maximum aggregate size. 2. Other concrete not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure, or to receive a hardener: 2 to 4 percent air. r"'IF G. Use admixtures for water reduction and set accelerating or retarding in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. H. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 Ib/cu. yd.. 1. Use water -reducing admixture or high -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticized in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperature below 50 degrees F. 2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.12 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation if joint materials, vapor retarder, and other related materials ,^^ with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. 3.2 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as ~+ follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch. 2. Class C, 1/2 inch. ,., D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. 03879300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-5 ,. 01101 E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 1. Do not use rust -stained steel form -facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. - I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with approved, nonresidual, low-voc, form -release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 1. Do not allow access form -coating material to accumulate in forms or come into con- tact with in place concrete surfaces against and which fresh concrete will be placed. 3.3 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required. 3.4 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form -removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following: C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form -facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form -release agent. D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.5 SHORES AND RESHORES A. Comply with ACI 318, ACI 301, and recommendations in ACI 347R for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. 03879300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6 01/01 3.6 rl A. ^+ B. 3.7 A. B. ,r~+ C. D. 3.8 VAPOR RETARDERS Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor -retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. Fine -Graded Granular Material: Cover vapor retarder with fine -graded granular material, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch or minus 3/4 inch. STEEL REINFORCEMENT General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction (control) Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1 . Extend joint -filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. Notify other trades to permit installations if their work. B. General: Comply with ACI 304 "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as specified. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. D. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309. 03879300 01/01 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. _ E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. - 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. G. Hot -Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305 and as follows, when hot -weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water -soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 4. Use water -reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Architect. 3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified. B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch in height. 1 . Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. 03879300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8 01/01 _» W C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth -formed finished concrete: 1 Soo th-Rubbed Finish• Not later than one day after form removal moisten concrete m surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed_ Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.113 for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid -applied or sheet waterproofing, built- up or membrane roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo. C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film -finish coating system D. Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry the is to be installed by either thickset or thin -set method. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 03879300 . 01/01 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-9 3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after _ placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following methods: D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. C. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 -inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walk, and curbs. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain con- tinuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. —T C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding 03879300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-10 01/01 0 0 color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1 . Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive -strength tests for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 03879300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 01/01 03300-11 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal -weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31 /C 31 M; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. a. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory -cured test specimens except when field -cured specimens are required. 6. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu yd plus additional sets for each 50 cu yd more than the first 25 cu yd each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. C. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory - cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive -strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete Y testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7 -and 28 -day tests. F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. G. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength test for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. END OF SECTION 03300 03879300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-12 01/01 SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry units (CMU). B. Ground -faced concrete masonry units. C. Mortar. D. Grout for masonry. E. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. F. Parged masonry surfaces. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Testing laboratory services. ., B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels and fabricated steel items. C. Section 07160 - Bituminous Dampproofing: Dampproofing parged masonry surfaces. D. Section 07200 - Building Insulation: Insulation for cavity spaces. E. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal: Cap flashings over masonry work and placement of reglets and flashing receivers for flashings. F. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control and expansion joints. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. B. ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures. C. ASTM A82 - Cold -Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. E. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. F. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. G. ASTM A580 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Steel Wire. H. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. c^^ _ I. ASTM A641 - Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. J. ASTM B370 - Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. K. ASTM C5 - Quicklime for Structural Purposes. L. ASTM C34 - Structural Clay Load -Bearing Wall Tile. M. ASTM C55 - Concrete Building Brick. N. ASTM C56 - Structural Clay Non -Load Bearing Tile. O. ASTM C62 - Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). P. ASTM C73 - Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand -Lime Brick). Q. ASTM C90 - Load -Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. R. ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement. !* S. ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete. T. ASTM C126 - Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid Masonry Units. 03879300 UNIT MASONRY 04200-1 ,. 01/01 U. ASTM C129 - Non -Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. V. ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. W. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. X. ASTM C199 - Test Method for Pier Test for Refractory Mortar. Y. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. Z. ASTM C212 - Structural Clay Facing Tile. AA. ASTM C216 - Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). BB. ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. CC. ASTM C315 - Clay Flue Linings. DD. ASTM C387 - Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials, for Mortar and Concrete. EE. ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout. FF. ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry. GG. ASTM C516 - Vermiculite Loose Fill Insulation. HH. ASTM C530 - Structural Clay Non -Load Bearing Screen Tile. II. ASTM C549 - Perlite Loose Fill Insulation. JJ. ASTM C578 - Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation KK. ASTM C595 - Blended Hydraulic Cement. LL. ASTM C652 - Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). MM. ASTM C744 - Pre -faced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units. NN. ASTM C780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. 00. ASTM C1019 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. PP. ASTM C1072 - Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength. QQ. ASTM C1 142 - Ready -Mixed Mortar for Unit Masonry. RR. ASTM E447 - Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms. SS. ASTM E518 - Test Method for Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry. TT. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. UU. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Hot Weather Masonry Construction. VV. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate bars sizes, spacings, locations, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting schedules, supporting and spacing devices for reinforcement, and accessories. B. Product Data 1. Provide data for pre -faced masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement. 2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, positioning of reinforcement, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 3. Include design mix complying with the Property specification of ASTM C270, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. 4. Design Data: Indicate required mortar strength, masonry unit assembly strength in all planes, and supportive test data. C. Samples 1 . Samples: Submit four samples of ground faced units to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range. 2. Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range. D. Reports 1. Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortar to property requirements of ASTM C270 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C780. 2. Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C1019. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 03879300 UNIT MASONRY 04200-2 01/01 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for UL Assembly No. as indicated. 1.9 MOCKUP A. Provide mockup of masonry under provisions of Section 01410. B. Construct a masonry wall into a panel sized 4 feet long by 6 feet high, which includes mortar and accessories. C. Locate where directed. D. Mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1 .10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Accept ground faced units on site. Inspect for damage. C. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Hot Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. 1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Concrete and Ground Faced Concrete Masonry Units 1. Featherlite Block Co. 2. Jewel Concrete Products, Inc. s B. Portland Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime 1. Essroc Materials, Inc. 2. Glen -Gert' Corporation. 3. Lafarge Corporation. 03879300 UNIT MASONRY �•*. 01/01 04200-3 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C90, Type I - Moisture Controlled; normal weight, with integral waterrepellent admixture. B. Ground -faced Block Units 1. Conformance: ASTM C140, Grade S, Type I - Moisture Controlled; normal weight, presealed at factory. 2. Size and Shape: Nominal size of 8 x 8 x 16 inches. 3. Color: As selected from full range of manufacturer's colors. 4. Scoring: Single vertical. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 Class 1 after fabrication. B. Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03300 and as indicated on drawings. C. Reinforcing Steel Positioners: 9 gage steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 Class 1 after fabrication. D. Mortar Guards: Any standard manufactured system of any of the listed acceptable accessory manufacturer's. 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, white color. B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Quicklime: ASTM C5, non -hydraulic type. 03879300 UNIT MASONRY 04200-4 01/01 4. Lehigh Portland Cement Co. 5. Riverton Corporation (The). C. Mortar Pigments 1. Davis Colors. 2. Lafarge Corporation. 3. Solomon Grind -Chem Services, Inc. D. Joint Reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors 1. Dur -O -Wal, Inc. 2. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 4. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America. 5. National Wire Products Industries. 6. Southern Construction Products. E. Admixtures 1 . Integral CMU Water Repellent -- a. W.R. Grace & Co. b. Master Builders, Inc. C. Addiment, Inc. 2. Cold -Weather Admixture a. Euclid Chemical Co. b. W.R. Grace & Co. 3. Water -Repellent Admixture a. W.R. Grace & Co. b. Master Builders, Inc. C. Addiment, Inc. F. Insulation Inserts 1. W.R. Grace & Co. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C90, Type I - Moisture Controlled; normal weight, with integral waterrepellent admixture. B. Ground -faced Block Units 1. Conformance: ASTM C140, Grade S, Type I - Moisture Controlled; normal weight, presealed at factory. 2. Size and Shape: Nominal size of 8 x 8 x 16 inches. 3. Color: As selected from full range of manufacturer's colors. 4. Scoring: Single vertical. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 Class 1 after fabrication. B. Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03300 and as indicated on drawings. C. Reinforcing Steel Positioners: 9 gage steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 Class 1 after fabrication. D. Mortar Guards: Any standard manufactured system of any of the listed acceptable accessory manufacturer's. 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, white color. B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Quicklime: ASTM C5, non -hydraulic type. 03879300 UNIT MASONRY 04200-4 01/01 �a E. Grout Course Aggregate: ASTM C404. F. Water: Clean and potable. G. Bonding Agent: Latex type. H. Mortar Color: Color as selected. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. Plasticizer: B. Water Repellent: Liquid p q type; Dry -Block Mortar Admixture. C. Accelerator: Acceiguard 80 or Morset. "^ 2.6 FLASHINGS A. Copper/Kraft Paper Flashings: 3 oz/sq ft sheet copper bonded to fiber reinforced asphalt treated �. Kraft paper. B. Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07900. C. Preformed Control Joints: Neoprene material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, cement fused joints. D. Joint Filler: Closed cell rubber; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; maximum lengths. E. Cleaning Solution: Non -acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. x- 2.7 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar For Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: Portland cement and lime, ASTM C270, Type N using the Property specification. 2.8 GROUT MIXES A. Bond Beams: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine grout. -2.9 GROUT MIXING A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly. C. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. 2.10 MIX TESTS A. Test mortar and grout in accordance with Section 01410. .�« B. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C270. C. Testing of Grout Mix: In accordance with ASTM C1019 for compressive strength and slump. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. D. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted. b. 03879300 UNIT MASONRY 04200-5 01/01 3.2 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. C. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mortar Mixing 1 . Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for immediate use. 2. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. 3. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. 4. Provide waterrepellent admixture in mortar for all exterior exposed masonry. 5. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. 6. If water is lost by evaporation, re -temper only within two hours of mixing. 7. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or two -and -one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F. B. Coursing 1. General a. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. b. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. 2. Concrete Masonry Units: a. Bond: Running. b. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. C. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3. Ground -faced Units: a. Bond: Running. b. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. C. Mortar Joints: Concave. C. Placing and Bonding 1. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 2. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. 3. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. 4. Interlock intersections and external corners. 5. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. 6. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 7. Cut mortar joints flush where cement parging is required. D. Reinforcement and Anchorage - Single Wythe Masonry 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc. 2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. 3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. 4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 5. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches oc. 3.4 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Set edge of flashing flush with exterior face masonry. B. Turn flashing up minimum 8 inches and bed into mortar joint of masonry. 03879300 UNIT MASONRY 04200-6 01/01 W Gia C. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. D. Turn flashing, fold, and seal at sills, corners, bends, and interruptions. E. Install flashing continuous at locations indicated on drawings but not less than the following: 1. Minimum 1 course above finish grade and 1 course below grade level finish floor. 2. On top of lintels. 3. Under sills of windows and all other thru-wall penetrations indicated to have a masonry sill. 3.5 LINTELS A. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings. B. Openings Up To 42 inches Wide: Place two, No. 4 reinforcing bars 1 inch from bottom web. C. Openings From 42 inches Up To 78 inches Wide: Place two, No. 5 reinforcing bars 1 inch from bottom web. D. Openings Over 78 inches: Reinforce openings as detailed. E. Do not splice reinforcing bars. F. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. G. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. H. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports. I. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening. J. Install mortar and grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. K. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. L. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches two CMU courses without consolidating grout by rodding. M. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. N. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces. 3.6 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Reinforce bond beam with 2, No. 4 bars, 1 inch from bottom web. B. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. C. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. D. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of opening. 3.7 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance D. Form expansion joint as detailed. 3.8 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames, anchor bolts, plates, and other items to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb and level. C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration. 03879300 UNIT MASONRY 04200-7 01/01 3.9 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non -cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1 /8 inch in 3 ft and 1 /4 inch in 10 ft; 1 /2 inch in 30 ft. E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. G. Variation From Joint Width: Plus or minus 1/8 inch and minus 0 inches. H. Maximum Variation from Plane of Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1132 inch. 3.10 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or _ strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01410. B. Inspect all masonry work. C. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01410. D. Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C780. E. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C1019. F. Test mortar and masonry units to ASTM C1072; test in conjunction with masonry unit sections specified. 3.12 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. F. Do not scratch or deface units. 3.13 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. C. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners. Provide protection without damaging completed work. 3.14 SCHEDULES A. Partitions exposed to outside elements: Single wythe load bearing, burnished (ground) face, single score concrete block masonry (CMU). B. Partitions non -exposed to outside elements: Single wythe load bearing concrete block units. END OF SECTION 03879300 UNIT MASONRY 04200-8 01/01 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Open -web K -series steel joists. 2. Joist accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry. 2. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel bearing plates. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a joist manufacturer who utilizes a qualified Professional Engineer to prepare design calculations, shop drawings, and other structural data for steel joists. B. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated: 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this article according to conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, mark, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. 1. Indicate locations and details of anchorage devices and bearing plates to be embedded in other construction. 2. Comprehensive engineering analysis signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation. D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing joists similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Manufacturer must be certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with SJI standard specifications and load tables. 03879300 STEEL JOISTS 05210-1 01/01 2. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally _ authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of joists that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. B. SJI Specifications: Comply with SJI's "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (hereafter, "Specifications"), applicable to types of joists indicated. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel"; and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for chord and web members. B. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36. C. Carbon -Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), carbon -steel, hex -head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon -steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain, uncoated. D. High -Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon -steel nuts, and hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain, uncoated. E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.2 PRIMERS A. Primer: Manufacturer's standard shop primer. 2.3 OPEN -WEB K -SERIES STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K -Series," in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle top- and bottom -chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord; of joist type indicated. 1. Joist Type: K -series steel joists. B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. C. Top -Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top -chord extensions where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications." D. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications." E. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48). 03879300 STEEL JOISTS 05210-2 01/01 661 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1 . Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 3.3 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime -painted joists and accessories, bearing plates and abutting structural steel. 1. Apply a compatible primer of the same type as the shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05210 03879300 STEEL JOISTS 01/01 05210-3 SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof deck. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Divisions 5 "Steel Joists." 0 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other r., construction. C. Product Certificates: Signed by steel deck manufacturers certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed steel deck similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding .-, Code --Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a "^ waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: +^ B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Deck: a. Consolidated Systems, Inc. b. Epic Metals Corp. 03879300 STEEL DECK 05310- 1 ,.�, 01101 C. Marlyn Steel Products, Inc. d. United Steel Deck, Inc. e. Verco Manufacturing Co. f. Wheeling Corrugating Co.; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp. g. American Buildings Co. h. ASC Pacific Inc. i. Bowman Metal Deck Armco, Inc. j. Vulcraft Division of Nucon Corp. k. Walker Division of Butler Manufacturing Co. 2.2 ROOF DECK A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top -flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 23, and the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446, Grade A, 660 zinc coated according to ASTM A 525. 2. Deck Profile: Wide rib. 3. Profile Depth: 1 %z inch. 4. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: 22. 5. Span Condition: 36/3. 6. Side Laps: Overlapped, three sidelap fasteners per span either welded or #10 tek screw. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Manufacturer standard corrosion -resistant, low-velocity, power - actuated or pneumatically driven carbon -steel fasteners; or self -drilling, self -threading screws. C. Side -Lap Fasteners: Manufacturer standard corrosion -resistant, hexagonal washer head; self -drilling, carbon -steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. D. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359 -inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. E. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch thick, with factory -punched hole of 3/8 -inch minimum diameter. F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD -P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. G. Steel Sheet Accessories: ASTM A 446, G60 coating class, galvanized according to ASTM A 525. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of steel deck. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 28, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this — Section. 03879300 STEEL DECK 05310-2 01/01 �- Q B. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. C. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side -lap interlocks. D. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. E. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to decking. F. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work. G. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. H. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 ROOF DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten roof deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter, but not less than 1- 1/2 inches long, and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds an average of 12 inches apart with a minimum of 2 welds per unit at each support. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location. B. Side -Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 36 inches, and as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten with self -drilling No. 10 diameter or larger carbon -steel screws. 2. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2 inch long welds. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum or butted at Contractor's option. D. Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, cover plates, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field welds will be subject to inspection. B. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05310 03879300 STEEL DECK 05310-3 01/01 61 0 PART 1 GENERAL SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS �.* 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, prime painted. B. Steel ladder. .- 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Placement of anchors in concrete. B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Placement of anchors in masonry. C. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking for support of accessories. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Field preparation and paint finish. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Ladders 1. Conform to OSHA/ANSI Al 4.3 for fixed wall ladders. 1.5 REFERENCES A. ANSI Al 4.3 - Ladders, Fixed, Safety Requirements. B. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. C. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless. .., D. ASTM Al 23 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. E. ASTM Al 53 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. F. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars. G. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. H. ASTM A386 - Zinc -Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. 1. ASTM A500 - Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. �* J. ASTM A501 - Hot -Formed Welded and, Seamless, Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. K. ASTM A569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent) Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality. L. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. M. ASTM A786 - Rolled Steel Floor Plates. N. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols. 0. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. P. FS -S-325 - Shield, Expansion; Nail Expansion; and Nail, Drive Screw (Devices, Anchoring, Masonry). Q. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. N 03879300 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1 an 01/01 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1 . Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. 2. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 4. Indicate adjacent construction and required anchorages to be provided by other sections. 5. Submit manufacturer's standard printed descriptive product literature for manufactured items. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General 1. Steel Sections: ASTM A36. 2. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. 3. Steel Plates: ASTM A283. 4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40. 5. Fasteners: FS -S-325, type as required by condition indicated. 6. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307 galvanized to ASTM Al 53 for galvanized components. 7. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 8. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide. B. Steel Ladder 1 . Side Rails: ASTM A36 steel, 3/8 inch thick x 2 inch wide. 2. Rungs: ASTM A36 steel, 3/4 inch diameter smooth bar. 3. Clip Angles: ASTM A36 steel, sizes as indicated. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site. 2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. 3. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. 4. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. 5. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. 6. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. B. Ladders 1. Fabricate in accordance with ANSI Al 4.3. 03879300 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2 01/01 2. Drill rails for rungs, spaced at 12 inches on center, plug weld rungs to rail and grind "^ smooth. 3. Rail Spacing: 20 inches clear inside. 4. Mounting Brackets: As indicated. 2.3 FINISHES A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Prime paint items Specified or Scheduled to be field painted as Specified in Section 09900 with two coats. '^ D. Galvanized items Specified or Scheduled to be galvanized with 1.25 oz/sq ft zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A386. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, to appropriate sections. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. D. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. E. Anchor handrail brackets to concrete with expansion bolts and to face brick and CMU with resin filled screen anchors. 77 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. General 1. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 2. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. The Schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not specifically scheduled. 1. Elevator Pit Ladder: At locations indicated, prime paint finish. END OF SECTION 03879300 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-3 01/01 0 SECTION 05805 EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Expansion joint assemblies for floor and wall surfaces. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Embedding floor or joint assembles. B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Supporting Construction C. Section 07536 - Modified Bitumen Roofing: Roof expansion joints. D. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Supporting Construction. E. Section 09900 - Painting: Asphaltic backing paint. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AA - Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. B. AA - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. C. ASTM 8221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. D. ASTM C509 - Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material. E. ASTM C864 - Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks and Spacers. F. ASTM C11 15 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber Gaskets and Accessories. G. ASTM D2000 - Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. H. ASTM D4637 - Standard Specification for EPPM Sheet used in Single -Ply Roof membrane. 1. ASTM D5476 - Standard Classification System for Thermoplastic Polyurethane materials. J. ULI - Fire Resistance Directory K. ULI - Building Materials Directory 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide listed and labeled fire rated expansion assemblies where indicated on drawings or where required by applicable code to maintain fire resistance integrity of joints in fire rated floor, wall, and roof assemblies. B. Fire Performance Characteristics - Provide expansion joint cover assemblies identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance has bben determined per ANSI/UL 263, NFPA 251, U.B.C. 43-1 or ASTM E-1 19 and E-814 including hose stream test at full -rated period by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1. Fire Rating - Not less than the rating of adjacent construction 1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Joint Covers: Permit unrestrained movement of joint without disengagement of cover. 03879300 EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES 05805-1 ,,, 01/01 B. Allowable Load on Floor Joint Cover Plate: 100 psf uniform load and 300 pounds concentrated load with 1/16 inch deflection from normal position, with maximum 12,000 psi stress at full open position. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint and splice locations, miters, layout of the work, affected adjacent construction, anchorage locations, required recesses and substrate. C. Product Data: Provide joint assembly profiles, profile dimensions, anchorage devices, description of materials and finishes, and listing of reference standards complied with. Describe special movement conditions. D. Certificates: Submit certificates, copies of independent test reports or research reports showing compliance with fire resistance rating or other specified performance requirement. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate rough -in sizes; provide templates for cast -in or placed frames or anchors; required tolerances for item placement. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Exercise proper care in the handling of all work so as not to injure the finished surface, and take proper precautions to protect the work from damage after it is in place. B. Deliver materials to the job site ready for use and fabricated in as large sections and assemblies as practical. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Architectural Art Manufacturing, Inc.; Wichita, KS. B. Balco Metalines; Wichita, KS. C. Conspec Systems, Inc.; Muncy, PA. D. MM Systems Corp.; Tucker, GA. E. Pawling Corp,; Wassaic, NY. F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 2.2 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, 6063 alloy, T5 temper. B. Resilient Filler 1. Type: Silicone, Neoprene, Santoprene or other elastomeric type complying with specified requirements. 2. Conformance a. Silicone: ASTM D2000 M46E, 709, M, UV stabilized, non -flame propagating. b. Polyurethane: ASTM D5476. C. Closed Cell Neoprene: ASTM C509, Option I. d. Dense Neoprene or Santoprene: ASTM C864, UV Stabilized, non -flame propagating. 3. Hardness: Share A durometer, minimum of 40 maximum of 50. 4. Color: Black. 5. Exposed Surface Texture: Smooth. 03879300 EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES 05805-2 01/01 A. Floor Joints: Mill finish aluminum. B. Wall Joints: Clear anodized aluminum complying with AA M32C12A31. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that joint preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable. a� 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide anchoring devices for installation and embedding. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Align work plumb and level, flush with adjacent surfaces for recessed items. C. Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment. 3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor joint surfaces. C. Provide removable strippable coating or reinforced cloth tape to protect finish surface. 3.5 SCHEDULES A. Fire Rated Floor Joints 1. Type A: Balco, 2H series, same rating as adjacent construction. B. Roof Bellows 1. Type A: Balco, model BRB-CSN (R -W). C. Wall Joints 1. Type A: Balco, model EXBL-20. 03879300 01/01 END OF SECTION EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES 05805-3 C. Fire Membrane: Manufacturer's standard membrane forming ULI listed assembly. D. Water Barrier: Flexible E.P.D.M., 45 mils thick, conforming to ASTM D4673. E. Threaded Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard cadmium plated steel, galvanized steel or stainless steel. F. Backing Paint: Asphaltic type specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Joint Covers: Aluminum cover plate, aluminum frame construction, retainers with resilient filler strip, designed to permit plus or minus 50 percent joint movement with full recovery, recess mounted. B. Back paint components in contact with cementitious materials. C. Galvanize embedded ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices. D. Shop assemble components and package with anchors and fittings. E. Provide joint components in single length without site splicing. 2.4 FINISHES A. Floor Joints: Mill finish aluminum. B. Wall Joints: Clear anodized aluminum complying with AA M32C12A31. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that joint preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable. a� 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide anchoring devices for installation and embedding. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Align work plumb and level, flush with adjacent surfaces for recessed items. C. Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment. 3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor joint surfaces. C. Provide removable strippable coating or reinforced cloth tape to protect finish surface. 3.5 SCHEDULES A. Fire Rated Floor Joints 1. Type A: Balco, 2H series, same rating as adjacent construction. B. Roof Bellows 1. Type A: Balco, model BRB-CSN (R -W). C. Wall Joints 1. Type A: Balco, model EXBL-20. 03879300 01/01 END OF SECTION EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES 05805-3 60 SECTION 06114 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete openings to receive wood blocking. B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry openings to receive wood blocking. C. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Prefabricated steel structural supports. D. Section 05311 - Steel Roof Deck: Roof decking to receive wood curbs. E. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Placement of steel fabrications embedded into masonry. F. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Nailers under coping. G. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Door openings to receive wood blocking. H. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Opening to receive wood blocking. I. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows: Window openings to receive wood blocking. J. Section 08920 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall System: Openings to receive wood blocking. K. Section 15710 - Fans: Prefabricated curbs furnished with rooftop mechanical equipment. L. Section 15736 - Indirect Evaporative Cooler: Prefabricated curbs furnished with rooftop mechanical equipment. M. Section 15742 - Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner: Prefabricated curbs furnished with rooftop mechanical equipment. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards. B. ANSI A208.1 - Mat -Formed Wood Particleboard. C. APA/EWA (APA/The Engineered Wood Association) Certification. D. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) of Iron and Steel Hardware. E. ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. F. ASTM F568 Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Fasteners. G. AWPA C1 (American Wood Preservers Association) - All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. H. AWPA C9 Plywood, Pressure Treatment. I. AWPA C20 (American Wood Preservers Association) - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. 03879300 .�. 01/01 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114-1 and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED �., A. Nailers. B. Roof curbs. C. Blocking in wall and roof openings. D. Wood furring and grounds. E. Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets, wood trim, toilet partitions, and all other wall mounted equipment and accessories requiring support or other sections referencing this section. ^" F. Telephone and electrical panel back boards. G. Preservative treatment of wood. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete openings to receive wood blocking. B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry openings to receive wood blocking. C. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Prefabricated steel structural supports. D. Section 05311 - Steel Roof Deck: Roof decking to receive wood curbs. E. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Placement of steel fabrications embedded into masonry. F. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Nailers under coping. G. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Door openings to receive wood blocking. H. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Opening to receive wood blocking. I. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows: Window openings to receive wood blocking. J. Section 08920 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall System: Openings to receive wood blocking. K. Section 15710 - Fans: Prefabricated curbs furnished with rooftop mechanical equipment. L. Section 15736 - Indirect Evaporative Cooler: Prefabricated curbs furnished with rooftop mechanical equipment. M. Section 15742 - Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner: Prefabricated curbs furnished with rooftop mechanical equipment. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards. B. ANSI A208.1 - Mat -Formed Wood Particleboard. C. APA/EWA (APA/The Engineered Wood Association) Certification. D. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) of Iron and Steel Hardware. E. ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. F. ASTM F568 Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Fasteners. G. AWPA C1 (American Wood Preservers Association) - All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. H. AWPA C9 Plywood, Pressure Treatment. I. AWPA C20 (American Wood Preservers Association) - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. 03879300 .�. 01/01 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114-1 J. AWPA C27 Plywood, Fire -Retardant Pressure Treatment. K. FS FF -N -105B Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes: Wire, Cut and Wrought. L. SPIB (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules. M. WCLIB (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules. N. NLGA (National Lumber Rules Authority) 0. WWPA (Western Wood Products, Association). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Wood Structural Panel Grading Agency: Certified by APA/EWA -The Engineered Wood Association. 3. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA. B. Factory grade stamp each piece of lumber and each wood structural panel. In lieu of grade stamping, submit manufacturer's certificate certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit following in accordance with Section 01300: 1 . Product Data a. Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products conform to specified requirements. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect all wood materials from warping or other distortion by stacking in vertical position, braced to resist movement. C. Keep all wood materials covered and dry. Provide air circulation within and around stacks. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General 1. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Nailers and Miscellaneous Framing: Yellow Pine species, No. 2 and better grade, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treat. C. Plywood: APA, Grade C -D; Exposure Durability 1; unsanded. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1 . Fasteners: ASTM F568 and FS FF -N-1 05B, Hot dipped or Electro galvanized steel. 2. Decking Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing cadmium plated or zinc coated. 03879300 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114-2 01/01 -"- V 3. Anchors: a. At Metal Studs: Flat or oval head sheet metal screws as required by project conditions. b. At Face Brick: Self tapping masonry anchors equal to Hilti Kwik -Con. C. At Mortar Joints: Expansion type anchors equal to Rawl wedge anchors. d. At Hollow Masonry: Resin injected screen anchors equal to Hilti HIT C20. e. At Grout Filled Masonry and Concrete: Expansion bolts or self tapping masonry anchors as required by project conditions. f. At Drywall: Equal to Hilti Togglers. B. Structural Framing Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. 2.3 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Shop pressure treat and deliver to site ready for installation, wood materials requiring pressure impregnated preservatives. B. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C1 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. C. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashings and other exterior locations. D. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure site -sawn ends are similarly treated. E. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashings and all other exterior locations. B. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Treat site -sawn ends. D. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Place horizontal members, crown side up. C. Space framing and furring 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. D. Curbs 1. Curb all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. 2. Form corners by lapping side members alternatively. 3. Construct curb members of single pieces. 4. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings, roofing vapor retardant, and parapet construction. E. Install telephone and electrical panel back boards with plywood sheathing material where required. Size the back board by 12 inches beyond size of electrical panel. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Roof Blocking: S/P/F species, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treatment. ' B. Telephone and Electrical Panel Boards: 3/4 inch thick, square edges, site brush applied preservative treated. END OF SECTION 03879300 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114-3 '"' 01/01 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Provisions including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items, other than shop prefabricated casework. B. All wood paneling. C. All standing and running wood trim. D. Attachment accessories. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01039 - Coordination. B. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbs: Grounds and support framing. C. Section 06410 - Architectural Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. B. AWI - Quality Standards. C. FS MMM -A-130 - Adhesive, Contact. D. HPMA (Hardwood Plywood Manufacturer's Association) HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. E. NHLA (National Hardwood Lumber Association). F. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. G. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. H. NEMA (National Electric Manufacturers Association) LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. I. FS MMMA-A-188 Adhesives. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, elevations of sheet paneling, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Custom quality. B. Coordinate installation of woodwork with other work to avoid damage. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect work from moisture damage. 03879300 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-1 01/01 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.9 COORDINATION .� A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with electrical rough -in and installation of associated and adjacent _ components. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOODWORK A. All Woodwork -- 1. Finishes: As indicated on drawings. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Lumber: Species and grade as indicated; lumber ready for installation shall comply with WM 4, "General Requirements for Wood Molding," Wood Molding and Millwork Producers (WMMP). 1 . Specie(s): Appalachian Plain Sawn Red Oak 2. Softwood: Comply with NIST PS 20 and grade in accordance with the grading rules of the grading and inspection agency applicable to the species. — 3. Hardwood: Grade in accordance with National Hardwood Lumber Association grading rules. 4. For transparent finish, use only solid pieces of lumber; WM 4 N -grade. 5. For opaque finish, pieces which are glued up may be used; WM 4 N- or P -grade. 6. Moisture content: Not greater than that required by applicable grading rules; provide kiln -dried lumber. 7. Provide lumber dressed on all exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, or otherwise defective lumber. 9. Size indicated are nominal, unless otherwise indicated. 10. Do not mark or color lumber, except where such marking will be concealed in finished work. B. Plywood: Types, grades, and cores as indicated. 1 . Veneer species: Appalachian Plain Sliced Red Oak 2. Hardwood veneer plywood: Comply with HPVA HP -1993. 3. Decorative softwood veneer plywood: Comply with HPVA HP -1993. 4. Plywood in concealed locations: Comply with NBS PS 1, Grade C minimum. C. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; tempered, with exposed faces smooth. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. High -Pressure Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3 1 . Grades and thickness as indicated. 2. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with requirements of the contract documents and made by one of the following: - a. Formica Corporation. b. International Paper/Nevamar Division. C. Ralph Wilson Plastics Company. B. Transparent Finish Materials for Field Finishing: As specified in Division 9. C. Wood Filler for Transparent Finish Woodwork: Match final finish color. D. Fasteners: Style, size, material, and finish as required for the purpose. 03879300 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-2 01/01 w 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate in sizes and shapes indicated and using details indicated. B. Complete fabrication and assembly in shop. 1. Ease edges of solid lumber members where indicated, using: a. 1/16 -inch radius for members 1 inch or less nominal thickness. b. 1/8 -inch radius for members more than 1 inch nominal thickness C. Where woodwork is indicated to be field finished, sand smooth, fill nail holes, clean thoroughly, and otherwise prepare for finishing. D. Standing and Running Trim: Miter exposed ends of members to match profile. 1. Rout out backs of flat members over 2 inches wide, unless ends are exposed. 2. Kerf backs of flat members over 4 inches wide, except where ends are exposed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify that blocking and backings have been installed at appropriate locations for anchorage. 3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Do not begin installation of interior woodwork until potentially damaging construction operations are complete in the installation area. B. Make joints neatly, with uniform appearance. C. Install woodwork in correct location, plumb and level, without rack or warp. 1. Where adjoining surfaces are flush, install with maximum 1/1 6 -inch offset. 2. Where adjoining surfaces are separated by a reveal, install with maximum 1/8 -inch offset. D. Cut woodwork precisely to fit. E. Secure woodwork to blocking or use anchors indicated. 1. Where anchorage method is not indicated, conceal all fasteners where possible. 2. Where exposed nailing is required or indicated, use finishing nails, countersink, and fill. F. Repair damaged and defective woodwork to eliminate visual and functional defects; where repair is not possible, replace woodwork. G. Standing and Running Trim: Use longest pieces available and as few joints as possible. 1. Stagger joints in built-up trim members. 2. Use diagonal (scarfed) joints in lengths of trim. 3. Cope or miter at inside corners and miter at outside corners; fit tightly. 4. Allowed variation in plumb and level: Not more than 1/8 inch in 8 feet. H. Panel Type Paneling: 1. Arrange for best appearance. 3.3 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09900. B. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. END OF SECTION 03879300 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-3 01/01 No Text 5i SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cabinet units. B. Countertops. C. Cabinet hardware. D. Prefinished exposed surfaces. E. Preparation for site finishing concealed surfaces. F. Preparation for installing utilities. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Grounds and support framing. B. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Related trim not specified in this section. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Seals at adjoining construction. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing of cabinet interior. E. Division 15 - Mechanical: Plumbing fixtures. F. Division 16 - Electrical: Power, signal, and data wiring. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. C. AWI - Quality Standards. D. BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware. E. BHMA A156.11 - Cabinet Locks. F. FS MMM -A-130 - Adhesive, Contact. G. HPMA HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. H. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. I. NHLA - Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress J. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. K. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 1.5 SUBMITTALS - A. Shop Drawing and Product Data 1 . Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. 2. For shop drawings submitted in phases, number phases in sequential order and provide master cross reference indicating room number in numerical sequence, millwork elevation and shop drawing sheet where detailed. 3. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. 03879300 01/01 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410-1 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform millwork construction in accordance with AWI as follows: 1 . All spaces: Custom quality. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. During and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hardware 1. Julius Blum, Inc.; Stanley NC. 2. Grass America, Inc.; Kernersville, NC. 3. Hafele America Co.; Archdale, NC. 4. H.B. Ives; New Haven, CT. 5. Hewi, Inc.; Lancaster, PA. 6. Knape & Vogtt Manufacturing Co.; Grand Rapids, MI. 7. Stanley Hardware; New Britain, CN. B. Computer Keyboard Drawers 1. MicroComputer Accessories, Inc.; Englewood CA. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS ,. A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI custom grade, average moisture content of 8 percent. B. Hardwood Lumber: NHLA; graded in accordance with AWI premium grade; average moisture - content of 8 percent. C. Softwood Plywood: PS -1; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer lumber or particleboard, type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cuts D. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer lumber or particleboard, type of glue recommended for application. E. Wood Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; AWI standard, composed of wood chips, medium density; of grade to suit application; sanded faces. F. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, 1/4 inch thick, smooth one side. G. Plastic Laminate 1. Conformance: NEMA LD 3. 2. Grade a. Horizontal Exposed Surfaces: GP -50, .005 inch thick. b. Vertical Exposed Surfaces: GP -28, .028 inch thick. C. Backing Sheet: BK20, 0.020 inch thick backing grade, undecorated plastic laminate. 03879300 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410-2 01/01 N 0. 3. Color, Pattern, and Surface Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. H. Adhesive: FS MMM -A-130 contact adhesive. Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. I. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. J. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; Cadmium finish. K. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. L. Grommets: Two piece plastic, with spring loaded access port equal to Hafele model no. 429.99, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. Provide 50 grommets to be installed in locations determined in the field. M. Shelf Standards 1. Cabinet Mounted: BHMA All 56.9, Type B04071 recessed mounted, cut for fitted rests spaced at 1 inch centers; chrome satin finish. 2. Wall Mounted: BHMA A156.9, Type B04102 surface mounted, slotted for brackets spaced at 1 inch centers; chrome satin finish. N. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, Type 804081, chrome satin finish. 0. Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, Type B0411 2, formed steel brackets, chrome satin finish. P. Closet Rods 1. Fixed Rod: Equal to K2V model no. 750-1 CHR, length to fit cabinet depth with #734 and #735 brackets. Q. Cabinet Drawer and Door Pulls: Extruded aluminum wire pull, US10 finish, equal to Stanley no. 4484. R. Locks 1. Conformance: BHMA A 156.11 2. Style a. Cabinet Drawers and Doors: Type E07261 at all locations. Provide locks with cams not requiring mortising or recessing into cabinet door or drawer front. 3. Finish: US10 Finish 4. Keying: Master key cabinet locks. Key all other locks in each room alike. Furnish six master keys direct to owner. Provide three keys per lock. S. Catches: Equal to KV #918 ALUM. (At Bifold doors at recessed marker boards) T. Slides 1. Standard Drawers: BHMA A1569,Type 805051, with positive stop levers. 2. File Drawers: BHMA A156.9, Type B05051 (100 Ib. load rated), full extension type with positive stop levers. U. Hinges: Semi -mortised, self closing, equal to Youngdale #5; brushed nickel finish. V. Pencil Drawer equal to Krueger #WCD. W. At cabinet drawers and doors at Judges benches, provide recessed finger pulls at all other cabinets, provide wire pulls. X. Elbow catch: Ives H02, US10 finish. Y. At all counter supports provide Rakks Counter brackets made of heavy gage welded aluminum, mill aluminum finish. As manufactured by Rangine Corporation. Phone: 1-800-826-6006 2.3 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Finishing: Site finish of casework scheduled to receive opaque and transparent finishes specified in Section 09900. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General 1. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. 03879300 01/01 CUSTOM CASEWORK 064110-3 2. Fit shelves, doors, drawer fronts and other exposed and semi -exposed edges with veneer matching face finish as scheduled. Use one piece for full length only. 3. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. 4. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. 5. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. 6. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. 7. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic wood laminate finished surfaces. 8. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal cut edges. B. Transparent Finish Casework 1. Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 400A, flush overlay style, using the following materials: a. Body Members: Medium density particleboard. - b. Stiles and Rails: Appalachian plain sawn red oak. C. Exposed Shelves: Appalachian rotary cut red oak. d. Semi -exposed Shelves: Medium density particleboard. e. Exposed Backs: Appalachian rotary cut red oak veneer on particle board core. f. Semi -exposed Backs: Tempered hardboard. g. Drawer Sides, Backs and Subfronts: Poplar or Elder. h. Drawer Bottoms: Tempered hardboard. i. Drawer Fronts: Appalachian rotary cut red oak veneer on particleboard core. j. Doors: Appalachian rotary cut red oak veneer on particle board core. k. Door, Drawer and Shelf Edging: Red oak veneer banding. C. Opaque Finish Casework 1. Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 400A, flush overlay style, using the following materials: a. Body Members: Medium density particleboard. b. Stiles and Rails: Paint grade Birch or Elder. C. Shelves: Medium density particleboard. d. Backs: Tempered hardboard. e. Drawer Sides, Backs and Subfronts: Poplar or Elder. f. Drawer Bottoms: Tempered hardboard. g. Drawer Fronts: Rotary cut paint grade birch veneer on particle board core. h. Doors: Rotary cut paint grade birch veneer on particle board core. i. Door, Drawer and Shelf Edging: Paint grade birch or elder veneer banding. D. Plastic Laminate Countertops 1. Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 400C with GP -50 high pressure decorative laminate exposed finish and BK -20 backing sheet on particle board core. Edge material to match top unless noted otherwise. 2. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. 3. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops. 4. Provide grommet at each knee space. Coordinate location with utilities. 2.5 FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Finish for items scheduled to receive transparent or opaque finishes, specified in Section 09900 - Painting 03879300 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410-4 01/01 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verifiy existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. C. Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install casework and associated trim in accordance with AWI Section 1700. B. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. C. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. D. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops. E. Seal slashes and returns to countertop and wall with type sealant specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealants. F. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. G. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. H. Anchorage Devices 1 . General: Use concealed anchorage devices at all locations except where otherwise approved by Architect. 2. Transparent or Opaque Finish Casework a. At exposed fixed locations, countersink and putty or countersink and conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. b. At exposed locations requiring removable panels, provide brass screws and countersunk finishing washers. I. Install grommets at all knee space containing electrical/data communication device outlets. J. Install drawer and door locks where indicated on drawings at each pair of doors, provide one elbow catch with each lock. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work in accordance with Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads. C. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean installed work in accordance with Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. END OF SECTION 03879300 CUSTOM CASEWORK 01101 06410-5 03879300 GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED PLASTIC 06610-1 01/01 SECTION 06610 GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED PLASTIC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS * A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. * 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass fiber reinforced (FRP) Panels. ell - 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 — Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, adjacent construction, materials, thicknesses, °^ fabrication details, required clearances, field jointing, tolerances, colors, finishes, methods of support, integration of plumbing and electrical components, and anchorages. C. Product Data: Submit data on specified component products. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color, texture, and finish. E. Submit maintenance data and recommended cleaning and stain removal methods and cleaners required. es 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS ,ate, A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS k A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 03879300 GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED PLASTIC 06610-1 01/01 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS FIBER AND RESIN FABRICATIONS A. Fabricators: 1. Marlite, Dover, Ohio. 2. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass reinforced plastic panel, equal to Marlite, P140 Ivory, 4' x 8' panels. B. Furnish all connectors, mouldings and trim pieces necessary for complete installation. ~ C. Adhesives: as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Color as indicated in Section 09915 - Color and Finish Schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate openings under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify substrate is ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach panels to drywall with anchors and adhesives in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. Layout panels so that no panel will be less than 24" wide. C. Installation shall meet USDA specifications, producing an installation that can be easily cleaned to a sanitary condition. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation from Indicated Position: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Offset from Alignment Adjacent Components: 1/8 inch. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean components of foreign material without damaging finished surface. END OF SECTION 03879300 GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED PLASTIC 06610-2 01/01 F SECTION 07210 K` BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Uniform General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Batt insulation in exterior wall construction. B. Batt insulation on top of lay -in acoustical. C. Acoustical insulation. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07536 - Modified Bitumen Roofing: Rigid insulation at roof system. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Vapor barrier and acoustical sealant. Supporting construction C. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings: Supporting construction. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C208 - Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. B. ASTM C240 - Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block. C. ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. D. ASTM C578 - Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. E. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation Board. F. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. G. ASTM C1289 - Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocya nu rate Thermal Insulation Board. H. ASTM D2842 - Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics. I. ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. J. ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. K. ASTM E96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. L. ASTM E 119-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. M. ASTM E 413-87 Determination of Sound Transmission Class. N. NFPA 255 - Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 0. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Insulation k Values 1 . k values indicated are based on 75 deg F (24 deg) C. 2. Where scheduled, provide insulations with conditioned k values complying with RIC/TIMA 281-1 Conditioning Procedure. 03879300 01/01 BUILDING INSULATION 07210-1 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Uniform Building Code - 1997 for combustibility and smoke development requirements for materials as follows: 1 . Flame Spread: 25 or less. -- 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. B. Identify insulation with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations. B. Manufacturer's Certificate 1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet or soiled. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flexible Insulation 1. Owens/Corning Corporation 2. CertainTeed 3. Manville Corp. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 B. Accessoires 2.2 MATERIALS A. Flexible Acoustical Insulation 1 . Conformance: ASTM C 665, Type I, glass or mineral fiber batt. 2. Thermal Resistance: R11 3. Size: To fit framing spacing 4. Facing: Unfaced. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation. B. Verify insulation is dry. C. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of irregularities, materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 03879300 BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2 01/01 A" 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install insulation without gaps or voids. 3. Place insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 4. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. B. Flexible Acoustical Insulation 1 . Place between and tight to framing members. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Thermal Insulation 1. Walls: Install in stud space from floor to bottom of roof deck above in all exterior walls B. Flexible Acoustical Insulation 1 . Walls: Install in stud space from floor to bottom of roof deck above in all walls where indicated on floor plan. 2. Ceilings: Install over top of ceiling where indicated on ceiling plan. Install four feet wide over top of partitions separating all rooms over partitions between all rooms and the corridor. 03879300 01/01 END OF SECTION BUILDING INSULATION 07210-3 SECTION 07536 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING .A. PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Modified bitumen membrane roofing with protective coating, insulation, base flashings, cant strips, and counter flashings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01019 - Contract Considerations: Alternates B. Section 05310 - Steel Deck: Roof deck substrate. C. Section 05312 - Steel Roof Deck: Roof deck substrate. D. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood nailers and curbs. E. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sheet metal flashings associated with roof system. F. Division 15 and 16 Sections: Roof mounted equipment and penetrations. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C177 - Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate. B. ASTM C208 - Insulating Board (Cellulosic Fiber), Structural and Decorative. C. ASTM C518 - Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter. D. ASTM C578 - Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. E. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation Board. F. ASTM C630 - Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. G. ASTM C728 - Perlite Thermal Insulation Board. H. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board. I. ASTM C1013 - Membrane Faced Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Roof Insulation. J. ASTM C1 178 - Glass Mat Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. K. ASTM C1289 - Faced Rigid Cellular PoIyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. L. ASTM D41 - Primer, Asphalt, Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing. M. ASTM D312 - Asphalt Used in Roofing. N. ASTM D1863 - Mineral Aggregates Used on Built-up Roofs. O. ASTM D2178 - Asphalt, Glass Felt, Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. P. ASTM D2824 - Aluminum -Pigmented Asphalt Roof Coatings Q. ASTM D3747 - Emulsified Asphalt Adhesive for Adhering Roof Insulation. R. ASTM D4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement - Asbestos Free. S. ASTM D4601 - Asphalt -Coated Glass -Fiber Base Sheet Used In Roofing. T. ASTM D4897 - Asphalt -Coated Glass -Fiber Venting Base Sheet Used in Roofing. U. FM - Roof Assembly Classifications. V. ULI - Fire Hazard Classifications. W. ULI - Roof Assembly Classification 03879300 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07536- 1 01/01 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Three ply modified bitumen membrane system with insulation installed to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather, without failure within the guaranteed time period. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate roof penetrations, crickets, layout of seams, direction of laps, base and counter flashing details. 2. Tapered insulation manufacturer's drawings indicating piece marks, filler pieces and slopes. C. Product Data: 1. Provide for anchoring devices, membrane materials, base flashing materials, insulation and bituminous materials. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required for seaming the membrane. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures and wind velocity during application, and bitumen temperature at kettle and at application point. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Single Source 1. Provide primary products, including but not limited to, base sheet, ply sheet, membrane, bitumen and membrane flashings from a single manufacturer. 2. Provide secondary products as recommended by manufacturer of primary products for use with roofing system specified. C. Insulation k Values 1. k values indicated are based on 75 deg F. 2. Where scheduled, provide insulations with conditioned k values complying with RIC/TIMA 281-1 Conditioning Procedure. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with three years documented experience and approved by membrane system manufacturer. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable UBC -1997 for roof assembly fire hazard requirements. B. UL Listing: Provide modified bituminous sheet roofing system and component materials that have been tested for application and slopes indicated and are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (ULI) for Class A external fire exposure. 1 . Provide roof -covering materials bearing ULI classification marking on bundle, package, or container indicating that materials have been produced under ULI's Classification and Follow-up Service. C. Wind Uplift: Provide a system with wind uplift resistance complying with FM Roof Assembly Classification, Class 1 Construction, 190 requirements in accordance with FM Construction Bulletin 1-28. D. 03879300 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07536-2 01/01 1 .10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ° A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels ., intact. C. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. D. Stand roll materials on end. 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather nor when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface. C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during same day. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with installing associated metal flashings as the work of this section proceeds. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard ten year NDL Ino dollar limit) warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Roofing Installer's Warranty: Submit on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including membrane roofing, sheet flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, and vapor retarders, if any, for a warranty period of 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Cover damage to building resulting from failure to prevent penetration of water. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Roofing Membrane 1 . Manville Roofing Systems; Denver, CO. 2. Firestone Building Products Co.; Carmel, IN. 3. GAF Building Materials Corp.; Wayne, NJ. 4. Siplast, Inc.; Irving, TX. B. Substututions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheathing Paper: Red -rosin type, minimum 3 Ib/100 sq. ft. B. Fiberglass Base Sheet: ASTM D4601, Type II asphalt coated fiberglass mat dusted with fine granular surfacing. C. Modified Bitumen Base Sheet: SBS modified asphalt impregnated and coated sheet, with glass fiber reinforced mat, dusted with fine granular surfacing and averaging or exceeding 60 Ib/100 sq. ft. minimum. D. Ply Sheet: ASTM D2178, Type IV, asphalt coated fiberglass mat. 03879300 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07.536 - 3 01/01 E. Insulation 1. Type A Insulation: ASTM C1289, Polyisocyanurate rigid board, Type II, both faces finished with asphaltic coated glass mat both faces, with the following characteristics: a. Board Density 2.0 Ib/cu ft. b. Board Size 48x96 inch. C. Board Thickness minimum 1 inch. d. Thermal Conductivity Conditioned k factor of 0.17 as determined by ASTM C518. e. Board Edges square 2. Tapered Insulation: Provide tapered insulation with a minimum slope of 1/4 inch per foot with a minimum thickness of %z inch. F. Membrane: Asphalt and polymer modifiers of styrene butadiene styrene (SBS) type, reinforced with non -woven polyester fabric; black ceramic granule surfaced; with characteristics complying with ASTM D5147 as follows: 1. Thickness: 160 mils 2. Average Weight: 0.9 Ib/sq ft 3. Sheet Width: 39.4 inches 4. Tensile Strength a. At 0 deg. F: 125 lbs/in (MD); 87 lbs/in (CD). 5. Elongation to Break a. At 0 deg. F: 45 percent (MD); 47 percent (CD). 6. Tear Strength: 127 Ibf (MD); 101 Ibf (CD). 7. Dimensional Stability: Less than 0.8 percent. 8. Low Temperature Flexibility: Less than 15 deg. F. G. Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D312, Type Ill. H. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41. I. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586 Type I. J. Insulation Adhesive: ASTM D3747, Type I. K. Membrane Coating: Fibrated aluminum type as recommended by membrane manufacturer. L. Flashings 1. Flexible Flashings: Manufacturer's standard SBS type conforming to the same requirements as the membrane. 2. Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 07600. 3. Prefabricated Expansion Joint Flashing. a. EPDM over closed cell foam with a bifurcated waterproof attachment to metal flanges with an integral vapor retarder and insulation system. b. Metal Flanges: 26 ga. Galvanized steel. C. Bellows Width: 4 inch. d. Metal Flanges: Minimum 4 inch wide, style as required by roofing conditions indicated. e. Transitions: Manufacturer's standard prefabricated type, same material as expansion joint. M. Accessories 1. Fiber Cant: Asphalt impregnated wood fiberboard or perlite, preformed to 45 degree angle. 2. Tapered Edge Strip. Asphalt impregnated wood fiberboard or perlite, 1 1/2 inches high x 18 inches wide x manufacturer's standard length. 3. Insulation Fasteners: Factory coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion resistance provisions of FM 4470, designed for fastening roofing insulation to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 4. Insulation Joint Tape: Asphalt treated glass fiber reinforced; 6 inches wide; self adhering. 5. Roofing Nails: Galvanized, hot dipped or non-ferrous type, size as required to suit application. 03879300 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07536-4 01/01 1 6. Base Sheet Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by system manufacturer; length required for thickness of material with metal washers. 7. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secured. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. Verify flutes of metal deck are clean and dry. 3.2 INSTALLATION A B. C. D. 03879300 01/01 Over Metal Decking 1 . Insulation a. Over metal decking, mechanically attach base layer of Type A or D (at Contractor's option with membrane manufacturer's approval) insulation, in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions and wind uplift requirements specified. 2. Install tapered insulation in accordance with approved tapered insulation shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. 3. Tape joints of Type D insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. 4. In full mopping of hot bitumen, install constant thickness top layer of either Type B or Type C (at Contractor's option with membrane manufacturer's approval) insulation with all joints staggered from joints in first layer of insulation by a minimum of 6 inches. 5. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. 6. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. 7. Apply no more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day. 8. Minimum Total Insulation Thickness: As required to achieve a minimum R value of 19. Membrane Application 1 . Over Type B or C insulation, install fiberglass base sheet and two ply sheets in full mopping of hot bitumen. 2. Over ply sheets, install membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Lap and seal edges and ends permanently waterproof. 4. Apply membrane smooth, free from air pockets, wrinkles, or tears. 5. Ensure full bond of membrane to substrate. 6. Extend membrane up cant strips and minimum of 8 inches onto vertical surfaces. 7. Mop and seal membrane around roof protrusions and penetrations. 8. Provide waterproof cut-off to membrane at end of day's operation. Remove cut-off before resuming roofing. Membrane Flashings and Accessories 1. Apply flexible sheet base flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements. 2. Secure to substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 3. Install prefabricated roofing expansion joints to isolate roof into areas as indicated. 4. Seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating or protruding through the membrane. Surfacing 1. Apply granular surfacing, matching membrane surfacing, as recommended by manufacturer to completely cover all lap joints in membrane. MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07536-5 E. Parapet Flashing 1. Masonry Parapets a. Prime masonry substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer. b. Torch apply APP parapet flashing from top of cap flashing up and over to top of parapet in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Extend down front face of parapet no further than can be covered by cap flashing. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01410. B. Correct identified defects or irregularities. 3.4 CLEANING A. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and comply with their documented instructions. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces. 3.6 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. WHEREAS <NAME> of <ADDRESS>, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: 1. Owner: 2. Address: B. Building Name/Type: 1. Address: 2. Area of Work: 3. Acceptance Date: 4. Warranty Period: 5. Expiration Date: C. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, D. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. E. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. lightning; b. peak gust wind speed exceeding <INSERT WIND SPEED> mph (m/sec); C. fire; d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and 03879300 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07536-6 01/01 %0" g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance 1. Authorized Signature: 2. Name: 3. Title: END OF SECTION 03879300 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07536-7 01101 personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. _ 2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense x< . thereof has been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. The Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents, resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void, unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or ., deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray -cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 6. The Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected J leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. F. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <DAY> day of < MONTH >, 19<YEAR >. 1. Authorized Signature: 2. Name: 3. Title: END OF SECTION 03879300 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07536-7 01101 No Text SECTION 07600 SHEET METAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coping, and parapet flashings. B. Fascias and scuppers. C. Flashing receiver and cap flashing over bituminous, base flashings. D. Counterflashings at roof mounted equipment and vent stacks. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Thru-wall flashing, placement of flashing receivers, and substrate construction. B. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Wood nailers and substrate construction. C. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood nailers and substrate construction. D. Section 07536 - Modified Bitumen Roofing: Roofing system. E. Section 07710 - Manufactured Roof Specialties: Preformed flashings, manufactured expansion joint covers. F. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. G. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Sill flashings associated with doors and storefronts. H. Section 09900 - Painting: Prime and finish painting. I. Division 15 Section: Flashing sleeves and collars for plumbing items protruding through roofing membrane. J. Division 16 Section: Flashing sleeves and collars for electrical items protruding through roofing membrane. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AA DAF - 45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. B. AAMA 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum. C. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. D. AAMA 611 - Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. E. ASTM Al 67 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. F. ASTM A653/A653M - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. G. ATM A755/A755M - Steel Sheet, Metallic coated by the Hot -Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil -Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. H. ASTM A792 - Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. I. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. J. ASTM B101 - Lead -Coated Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. K. ASTM 13209/13209M - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. L. ASTM 8370 - Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. 03879300 SHEET METAL 07600-1 01/01 M. ASTM B486 - Paste Solder. N. ASTM 8749 - Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. 0. ASTM C728 - Perlite Thermal Insulation Board P. ASTM D226 - Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. Q. ASTM D2178 - Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. R. ASTM D4397 - Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. S. ASTM D4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free. T. CDA (Copper Development Association) - Copper in Architecture - Handbook. U. CDA (Copper Development Association) - Contemporary Copper, A Handbook of Sheet Copper Fundamentals, Design, Details and Specifications. V. FS TT -C-494 - Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant. W. AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute) - Stainless Steel - Uses in Architecture. X. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing Manual. Y. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual - Fifth Edition with Addendum no. 1. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profiles, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Product Data: Submit data on manufactured components metal types, finishes, and characteristics. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA standard details and requirements. B. Conform to SMACNA Manual for sizing components for rainfall intensity determined by a� storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for size and method of rain water discharge. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with five years documented experience. 1.9 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01039. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. 03879300 SHEET METAL 07600-2 01/01 W 1.11 COORDINATION -A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate with the work of Section 03300 and 04200 for installing flashing, reglets, and receivers. C. Coordinate with the work of Section 06112 for installing nailers and sheathing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Preformed Metal and Accessories 1. Cheney Flashing Co.; 2. Keystone Flashing Co;. 3. Metal -Era Inc; Waukesha, WI. B. Prefinished Metal 1. MBCI - Grand Prairie, Texas 2. AEP/Span Metals Corp., Dallas, Texas 3. Alumax Corp., Mesquite, Texas C. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre -Finished Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209/6209M, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for specified finish; 0.032 inch thick; mill finish shop pre -coated with modified silicone. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers. -* B. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. C. Bedding Compound: Rubber -asphalt type. D. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type 1. E. Reglets: Surface mounted and Recessed type, galvanized steel; face and ends covered with plastic tape. F. Solder: ASTM B32; type suitable for application and material being soldered. M. Paste Solder: ASTM B486; type suitable for application and material being soldered. N. Touch-up Paint: To match factory finish. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Termination Bars: ASTM A666, stainless steel, 1/8 inch thick x 1 inch wide, with slotted holes spaced at 6 inches o.c. Form with top flange projected out to receive sealant. B. Termination Bar Cover: Manufacturer's standard prefinished aluminum, color as selected by Architect. C. Tapered Edge Strip: ASTM C728; minimum '/z inch thick, tapered to match coping flashing profile, same width as parapet. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fabricate sheet metal items in accordance, with SMACNA details indicated in paragraph SCHEDULE at the end of this section unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 03879300 SHEET METAL 07600-3 01/01 2. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. 3. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, interlockable with sheet. 4. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. 5. Fabricate with required connection pieces. ` 6. Hem exposed edges on underside %z inch; miter and seam corners. 7. Form material with flat lock seams. 8. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. 9. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. 10. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing. Return and brake edges. B. Fabricate all exposed sheet metal from pre -finished aluminum sheet. C. Fabricate all concealed sheet metal and sheet metal hidden from normal view from aluminum sheet. D. Coping Flashings 1. Fabricate cap flashing to profile indicated on drawings. 2. Fabricate cap flashings with integral slope tapering 1 inch from front to back unless otherwise required by slope of [tapered insulation filler] [wood nailer] or otherwise indicated on drawings. 3. Provide minimum 4 inch vertical leg on front side with continuous cleat. 4. Provide minimum 4 inch vertical leg on back side. 5. Fabricate inside and outside corners with continuously factory mechanically seamed and sealed joints. Provide finish to match remainder of cap flashing. 2.5 FINISH A. Field painting of expose metal: As specified in section 09900 - PAINTING. B. Pref inished Metal: Fluoropolymer coating produced with Kynar-500 resin complying with the following: 1 . Salt Spray Test a. Withstand salt spray test for a minimum of 1000 hours in accordance with ASTM B 117, including scribe requirement in test. b. Receive a rating of 10, no blistering, as determined by ASTM D 714 immediately upon removal of panel from test, and rating of 7, 1/16 -inch failure at scribe, as determined by ASTM D 1654. 2. Formability Test: No evidence of fracturing to naked eye when subjected to a 180 - degree bend over a 3/8 -inch diameter mandrel in accordance with ASTM D 522. 3. 2000 Hour Accelerated Weathering Requirements a. Test Conformance: ASTM G 23 using a Type D apparatus. b. No cracking, peeling, blistering, loss of adhesion of protective coating, or corrosion of base metal. C. Loss of Adhesion: Protective coating that can be readily removed from base metal with tape in accordance with ASTM D 3359, Test Method B. d. Chalking: Not greater than No. 8 rating in accordance with ASTM D 4214 test procedures. e. Color Change: Maximum 2 NBS units in accordance with ASTM D 4214 and ASTM D 2244 test procedures. 4. Humidity Test: No signs of blistering, cracking, creepage or corrosion when scored panel subjected to a humidity cabinet test in accordance with ASTM D 2247 for 1000 hours. 5. Impact Resistance: Withstand direct and reverse impact in accordance with ASTM D 2794 equal to 1.5 times metal thickness in mils, expressed in inch -pounds, with no loss of adhesion. 03879300 SHEET METAL 07600-4 01/01 6. Abrasion Resistance Test: Withstand a minimum of 80 liters of sand before appearance '^ of base metal when subjected to falling sand test in accordance with ASTM D 968. R 7. Pollution Resistance: No visual effects when immersion tested in a 10 percent hydrochloric acid solution for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM D 1308. 8. Color a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line. C. Exposed Fasteners: Factory finished to match color of item being fastened. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Conform to details on drawings and details included in the SMACNA manual. B. Apply bituminous protective backing on surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials. C. Fill back of cap flashing with plastic roofing cement. D. Backbed lap joints of flashings in horizontal position. E. Insert cap flashing into flashing receiver to form tight fit. Bend top of flashing receiver down over cap flashing without hammer marks, dents or other visual distractions. F. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. G. Termination Bars 1. Install in longest practical lengths. 2. Seal top of bar to supporting construction with sealant as specified in section 07900 - JOINT SEALERS. H. Coping Flashing 1 . Install with front edge engaged in continuous cleat. 2. Fasten back edge to parapet substrate with hex head washered fasteners. I. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. J. Fit flashings tight in place. K. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. E. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01410. B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 03879300 SHEET METAL 07600-5 ., 01/01 SECTION 07900 r -- JOINT SEALERS 7 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. B. Sealant and backing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07410 - Preformed Roof Panels: Sealants used in conjunction with paneling. B. Section 07536 - Modified Bitumen Roofing - Roofing system. C. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Sealants used in conjunction with metal flashings. D. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Gaskets used in conjunction with framing and glazing methods. E. Section 08800 - Glazing: Sealants used in conjunction with glazing methods. F. Section 08311 - Sliding Glass Doors: Gaskets used in conjunction with framing and glazing methods. G. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Sealants used in conjunction with sound rated partitions. H. Section 09300 - Tile: Sealants used in conjunction with tile. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AAMA 803.3 - Voluntary Specification for Narrow -Joint Seam Sealer. B. AAMA 808.3 - Voluntary Specification for Exterior Perimeter Sealing Compound C. ASTM C719 - Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement. D. ASTM C792 - Effects of Heat Aging on Weight Loss, Cracking, and Chalking of Elastomeric Sealants. E. ASTM C570 - Oil and Resin - Base Caulking Compound for Building Construction. F. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds. G. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. H. ASTM C1311 - Solvent Release Sealants. 1. ASTM C1193 - Use of Joint Sealants. J. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. K. ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed -Cell Foam). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and color availability. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. 03879300 �-. 01/01 JOINT SEALERS 07900-1 B. Samples 1. Submit four sample kits in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. C. Mockup 1. Construct field sample panel illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface. 2. Locate where directed. 3. Accepted sample may not remain as part of the Work. D. Certificates 1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements and are suitable for use indicated. 2. Joint sealant manufacturer's certification that sealants, primers, and cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section �.. with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience. C. Conform to ASTM C1 193 requirements for materials and installation. 1. Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 2. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. D. Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test sealant adhesion f to joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each type of elastomeric and non-elastomeric sealant joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be erected. 4. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand pull method described below: a. Install joint sealants in 5 -foot joint lengths using same materials and methods for joint preparation and joint sealant installation required for completed Work. Allow sealants to cure fully before testing. b. Make knife cuts horizontally from one side of joint to other followed by 2 vertical cuts approximately 2 inches long at side of joint and meeting horizontal cut at top of 2 -inch cuts. Place mark 1 inch from top of 2 -inch piece. C. Use fingers to grasp 2 -inch piece of sealant just above 1 -inch mark; pull firmly -- down at a 90 -degree angle or more while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds. 5. Report whether or not sealant in joint connected to pulled -out portion, failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. 6. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 03879300 JOINT SEALERS 07900-2 01/01 E. Field -Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution: 1 . Joints in field -constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants specified in this Section. F. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ". A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements 1. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. 2. Do not install sealants when joint substrates are wet. 3. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty. B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .� A. Elastomeric Sealants 1. General: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, urethane, polyurethane, or polysulfide polymer based elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920. 2. Types a. S-1: Type M, Grade P, Class 25. b. S-2: Type S, Grade P, Class 25. C. S-3: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. ^ d. S-4: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. B. Latex Sealants 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage 03879300 JOINT SEALERS 07900-3 �., 01/01 change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. 2. Types a. S-5; Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant (1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product accommodating joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent. (2) Conformance: ASTM C 834 b. S-6; Silicone Emulsion Sealant (1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product that accommodates joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. (2) Conformance: ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, ASTM C 920. (3) Special Properties: Fungus and mildew resistant. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. C. Type S-7; Acrylic Sealant -- 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3, with capability to withstand 15 percent maximum cyclic movement (7-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression) at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for " Project without failing cohesively when tested for adhesion and cohesion per ASTM C 719. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. -- 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. D. Type S-8; Butyl Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, nonstaining, paintable, solvent -release -curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids and tack -free time of 24 hours or less, complying with ASTM C 1311. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. E. Type S-9; Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard, solvent -release -curing, pigmented synthetic rubber sealant formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or smaller in width, complying with AAMA 803.3 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. F. Accessories 1 . Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 2. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. 3. Joint Backing: ANSI/ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. 4. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 5. Masking Tape: Non -staining, non -absorbing type as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 03879300 JOINT SEALERS 07900-4 01/01 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions and substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193. E. Install masking tape where required to protect adjacent finished surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/2 the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Remove and replace joint backing which has become wet, dirty, or exposed to weather for extended period of time. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. H. Tool joints concave in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by +, methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. C. Cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants and repair so that repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Joints 1. Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2. 2. Horizontal traffic joints exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2. 3. Horizontal non -traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, S-2, S-3 or S-4. 4. Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3 or S-4. 03879300 JOINT SEALERS 07900-5 01/01 5. Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall penetrations: Sealant types S-3 or S-4. 6. Threshold Bedding: Sealant type: S-8. 7. Joints in Masonry Flashing: Sealant Type S-9. 8. Joints in Sheet Metal Flashing: Sealant Type S-9. B. Interior Joints 1 . Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 , or S-2. 2. Horizontal non -traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, S- 2, S-3, or S-4. 3. Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3, S-4. 4. Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall penetrations: Sealant types S-3, S-4 or S-6. 5. Non-structural hollow metal doors and borrowed lites. Sealant types S-3, S-4 S-5, S-6 or S-7. 6. Non-structural perimeter seals around plumbing fixtures, joints between ceramic tile and joints between ceramic the and dissimilar materials: Sealant type S-6. 7. Non-structural perimeter seals at joints between countertops, backsplashes and walls: Sealant type S-7. END OF SECTION 03879300 JOINT SEALERS 07900-6 01/01 SECTION 08110 r STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. B. Drawings, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. C. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED '~ A. Standard non -rated and fire rated steel doors and frames. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Prepared openings. B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry mortar fill of metal frames. C. Section 08210 - Wood Doors. D. Section 08211 -Flush Wood Doors. E. Section 08700 - Hardware. F. Section 08800 - Glazing. G. Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall: Prepared openings. H. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of doors and frames; bituminous coating. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board - 36 CFR Part 1191, Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. ANSI/SDI-100 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & Frames. C. ANSI A224.1 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. D. ASTM A167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. E. ANSI/ASTM A366 - Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold -Rolled, Commercial Quality. F. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, General Requirements. G. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. H. FS RR -W -365A - Wire Fabric (Insect Screening). I. MIL -M -17194C(2) - Metal, Expanded, Steel. J. SDI -107 - Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement --Application). K. SDI -1 13 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Apparent Thermal Performance for Steel Door and Frame Assemblies. L. SDI -1 14 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Acoustical Performance for Steel Door and Frame Assemblies. M. SDI -1 16 - Standard Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Rate of Air Flow Through Closed Steel Door and Frame Assemblies. N. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 03879300 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-1 01/01 O. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. P. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements 1 . Conform to requirements of 36 CFR Part 1 191 and the Texas Accessibility Standards. 2. Conform to NFPA 80 and NFPA 252 for fire rated class indicated B. Manufacturer 1 . Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data ^� 1. Indicate each type door and frame elevation, reinforcements, hardware locations, metal types and guages, and finish. Use same numbering system as indicated on drawings. 2. Indicate frame configuration, anchor spacings and anchor types. 3. Indicate door core construction and head and sill closure method. 4. Indicate cut outs for glazing, glazing stop and glazing frame profiles and methods of attachment. 5. Manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Certificates 1. Manufacturer's Certificate certifying that Products and fabrications meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Provide frames with manufacturer's standard sill spreader bar for all welded units. B. Protect doors and frames with manufacturer's standard resilient packaging. C. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Doors 1. Interior: 18 gage stretcher level steel conforming to ASTM A366. 2. Exterior: 16 gage stretcher level steel conforming to ASTM A366. B. Frames �. 1. Interior: 16 gage steel conforming to ASTM A366. 2. Exterior: 14 gage steel conforming to ASTM A366. C. Protective Coatings 1 . Bituminous Coating: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 2. Primer: Manufacturer's standard oven dried, gray alkyd enamel primer, complying with requirements of ANSI/SDI A224.1. D. Accessories 1 . Jamb Anchors a. Masonry Construction: 'T' -strap type, corrugated and galvanized. b. Concrete Construction: Expansion shield. _ 03879300 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2 01/01 —« C. Steel Stud Construction: Z type, same gage and material as frame. d. Wood Stud Construction: Pre -drilled U type, same gage and material as frame. 2. Silencers: As specified in Section 08700 Hardware. 3. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel, square profile, mitered corners; prepared for countersunk •, style flat head sheet metal screws. 4. Door Glazing Frames: Rolled steel, beveled profile as indicated on drawings, mitered corners; prepared for countersunk style thru-bolts at fire rated doors and flat head sheet metal screws at non -fire rated doors. 5. Astragals: 18 gage stainless steel conforming to ASTM A167. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fabricate doors and frames to sizes and profiles indicated and in conformance with, except as otherwise specified, SDI -100, for non -rated assemblies and NFPA 80 and NFPA 252 for rated assemblies. 2. Fabricate frames and doors with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes for frames set in concrete and masonry. 3. Attach fire rated label to each frame and door unit. 4. Grind all welds smooth, fill all voids with body putty and seam filler and sand smooth. Welds and joints shall not be visible. B. Doors 1. Exterior doors: Grade 11, Model 2. 2. Interior doors: Grade 11, Model 2, STC 38 where scheduled. 3. Close top edge of doors with flush steel channel closure. Seal joints watertight. 4. Close bottom edge of doors with inverted steel channel closure. 5. Core Construction, Exterior Doors a. Type f: Vertical steel stiffeners formed from not less than 20 gage steel, spaced not more than 6" apart, and securely attached to face sheets by spot welds, not more than 6" on center. b. Fill spaces between stiffeners full height of door with a minimum 0.6 pound density insulation. C. U -value through door: Maximum 0.24. 6. Core Construction, Interior Doors a. Type f: Vertical steel stiffeners formed from not less than 20 gage steel, spaced not more than 6" apart, and securely attached to face sheets by spot welds, not more than 6" on center. 7. Core Construction, Fire Rated Interior Doors a. Conform to requirements of NFPA 252. C. Frames 1. Fabricate and assemble as complete welded unit. 2. Weld Z and U anchors to frame. 3. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. 4. Prepare frame for silencers. Provide for three single silencers on strike side of single doors and two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions. 5. Provide minimum 14 gage steel floor angle clips welded to each jamb. 6. Fabricate two-piece frames with heads and jambs of each piece mitered and welded. 7. Fabricate KD frames with double back bend, concealed corner reinforcement and manufacturer's standard compression clip. 8. Fabricate frames [scheduled] with sanitary stops, 6" above finished floor, cut at 45 deg. angle with welded closure. 9. Removeable Stops: Roll formed channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersunk style [tamper proof] screws. 03879300 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-3 �, 01/01 D. Astragals 1. Fabricate to shape as detailed. 2.3 FINISH A. Finish: As Specified in SECTION - 09900. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install frames in accordance with SDI -105 and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Coordinate with masonry and gypsum wallboard wall construction for anchor placement. 3. Coat inside of frame profile with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1116 inch where in direct contact with masonry and concrete. 4. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. 5. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor. 6. Install field applied hardware in accordance with SDI -107. 3.2 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1 /16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION 03879300 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 01/01 08110-4 I SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated and fire rated flush wood doors to receive transparent finish. B. Cut outs for glass panels. C. Metal door lite surround frames. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Wood door frame trim. B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Steel doors and frames. C. Section 08700 - Door Hardware. D. Section 08800 - Glazing. E. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing doors. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI/HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. C. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. ASTM E413 - Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class. E. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. F. NFPA 252 - Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. G. NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association. H. UL 1013 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. I. Warnock -Hersey - Certification Listings for fire doors. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, and identify cutouts for glazing. 2. Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics; factory machining criteria and factory finishing criteria. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions 1 . Indicate special installation instructions. D. Manufacturer's Certificates 1. Certify that doors meet or exceed specified requirements and requirements of NWWDA standards referenced. 2. Certify that doors meet or exceed adhesive bond test of NWWDA T.M.-6. 03879300 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -1 01/01 1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NWWDA Industry Standard I.S. 1-A for Flush Wood Doors. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to ASTM E152. B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING -. A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect doors with manufacturer's standard sealed resilient packaging. C. Handle doors with clean hands or while wearing clean gloves. D. Store doors in flat position, raised above floor, not in damp or wet areas or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. E. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term: 1. Exterior Doors: Life of Installation. 2. Interior Doors: Life of Installation. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Doors 1 . Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.; Algoma, Wl. 2. Eggers Industries, Inc.; Two Rivers, WI. 3. VT Industries, Inc.; Holstein, IA. 4. Weyerhaeuser; Marshfield, WI. B. Door Lite Surround Frames — 1. Air Louvers, Inc.; Pico Rivera, CA. 2. Anemostat Door Products; Carson, CA. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 03879300 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -2 01/01 FN 2.2 MATERIALS A. Lumber 1. Transparent Finish: NHLA first grade, Red Oak Walnut kiln dried to maximum 10 percent moisture content. B. Cores 1. Solid Core a. Non -Fire Rated: ANSI 208. 1, grade 1-LD2 particleboard, minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density. b. Fire Rated (1). 20 and 30 Minute Rated; ANSI 208.1, LD2 fire retardant treated particleboard, minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density. (2). 3/4 and 1 1/2 Hour Rated: Manufacturer's standard mineral core. C. Veneers 1. Transparent Finish: .050 inch thick, NWWDA Custom, A grade, Red Oak Walnut species wood, plain sliced. D. Glazing Stops 1 . Rolled steel shape as detailed, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws; designed to conform to UL requirements. E. Adhesives 1. Exterior Doors: Type 11 - water resistant. 2. Interior Doors: Type II - water resistant. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fabricate fire rated doors to meet fire ratings scheduled in accordance with ASTM E84 classifications for flame spread/smoke developed of 20/45. Attach fire rating label to door edge. 2. Fabricate doors to thickness scheduled. 3. Veneer Match A Between Individual Pieces of Veneer• Sli Match B. 03879300 01/01 p b. Assembly on Door Face: Running Match. C. On Pairs of Doors: Pair Match. 4. Hardware a. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with templates furnished by hardware supplier at locations indicated in NWWDA I.S.1.7-87 - Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors. b. Do not machine for surface hardware. C. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware. 5. Factory pre -fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings with prefit clearances specified in NWWDA I.S. 1-A. Flush Face Doors 1 . Solid Core: Fabricate in accordance with NWWDA I.S. 1 and 1-A for 7 ply construction except as otherwise specified, with finish as scheduled. 2. Bonding a. Wood Cores: Type A - bonded. b. Mineral Cores: Type A - bonded. 3. Blocking - Mineral a. Provide at lock edge top of door for closer bottom of door for kick plate. b. Top rail: Minimum 6 inch wide C. Bottom Rail: Minimum 10 inch wide. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -3 2.4 FINISH A. As specified in Section 09900 - Painting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify frame opening conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of -tolerance for size or alignment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Trim non -rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. D. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. Use threaded through bolts for half surface hinges. E. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders. F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08110 and hardware specified in Section 08700. G. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. — 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Telegraphing: 1 /10 inch measured with straight edge in any three inch span. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, corner to corner, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straightedge or taught string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.5 SCHEDULE END OF SECTION 03879300 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -4 01/01 SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Aluminum doors and frames. B. Door hardware. C. Integral air and vapor barrier. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Preparation of adjacent work to receive work of this Section. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrication: Metal fabricated attachment devices. C. Section 07900 - Sealants: System perimeter sealant and back-up materials. D. Section 08700 - Hardware: Standard requirements for hardware. C. Section 08800 - Glazing, gaskets and glazing accessories. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AADAF - 45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes B. AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. C. AAMA CW -10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site. D. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. E. AAMA 606.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. F. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. G. AAMA 608.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. H. AAMA 1503.1 - Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections. 1. AAMA SFM-1 - Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual. J. ANSI/ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. K. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. L. ANSI/ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. M. ANSI/ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. N. ANSI/ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. O. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. P. ANSI/ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Q. ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. R. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council S. 36 CFR 1 191 - Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. 03879300 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-1 01/01 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Aluminum entrances and storefront system includes tubular aluminum sections shop fabricated, factory pre -finished, vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with ASCE 7-95 and as measured in accordance with ASTM E330. B. Limit mullion deflection to flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials. C. System to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement within system, movement between system and peripheral construction, dynamic loading and release of loads, deflection of structural support framing. D. Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.06 cfm/min/sq. ft. of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E283. E. Vapor Seal: Limit vapor seal with interior atmospheric pressure of 1 inch sp, 72 degrees F., 40 percent RH: no failure. F. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a test pressure difference of 20 percent of design pressure, with a minimum differential of 2.86 Ibf/sq ft and _ a maximum of 12.0 Ibf/sq ft.. G. Thermal Transmittance of assembly (Excluding Entrances) : Maximum U value of (0.69] [0.45] Btu/sq. ft. per hour per deg F when measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. H. System to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F. over a 12 -hour period without causing detrimental effects to system components. I. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels or migrating moisture occurring within system to the exterior by a weep drainage network. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions; framed opening requirements and tolerances; affected related work and expansion and contraction joint location and details. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware and internal drainage details. C. Certificates: Manufacturers' Certificates certifying the Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General 1. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1 and AAMA-Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. B. Qualifications 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years experience. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Handle work of this Section in accordance with AAMA CW -10. C. Protect pre -finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 03879300 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-2 01/01 �. r-, 1. 10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for complete system for failure to meet specified requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Kawneer Co., Inc.; Niles, MI. B. Architectural Products; Terrell, TX. C. Indal LTD, Tubelite Division; Reed City, MI. D. Vistawall Architectural Products; E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ANSI/ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper. B. Sheet Aluminum: ANSI/ASTM 8209; 3003 alloy, H14 temper. C. Fasteners 1. Concealed: Stainless or galvanized steel. 2. Exposed: Stainless steel or aluminum. D. Shop and Touch -Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Frame: 2 x 4 1/2 inch nominal dimension; flush glazing stops; drainage holes; internal weep drainage system. B. Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick,6 inch nominal wide top rail, 3-3/4 inch nominal wide vertical stiles, 8 inch nominal wide bottom rail; bevelled glazing stops. C. Flashings: .040 inch thick aluminum; finish to match mullion sections where exposed. D. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. E. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08800 - Glazing. F. Bituminous Paint: As specified in Section 09900 - Painting G. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable. H. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, of neoprene compound. I. Hardware: Refer to schedule at end of this Section and Section 08700 for quality requirements. 1. Provide hardware components as indicated in paragraph HARDWARE SCHEDULE at end of this section. 2. Refer to Section - 08700 - HARDWARE for quailty requirements. 3. Schedule is based on products manufactured by Hager, LCN, Pemko, Rockwood, Triangle Brass and Von Durprin components of other manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with the standards specified in Section 08700 - HARDWARE. 4. Regardless of whether or not the HARDWARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section has every door and every component scheduled for each opening, provide all components required to make every opening functional based on hardware scheduled for similar openings and the referenced codes. 03879300 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-3 r-+ 01/01 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. 2.5 FINISHES A. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Clear anodized conforming AA Class 1, M10C22A31 and AAMA 607.1. B. Concealed Steel items: Primed with iron oxide paint. C. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with -- cementitious or dissimilar materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site opening conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. C. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. G. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. H. Install flashings. I. Set thresholds in bed of sealant and secure. J. Install hardware using templates provided. Refer to Section 08700 for installation requirements. K. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. L. Install backing materials and perimeter sealant to method required to achieve performance criteria and installation criteria, in accordance with Section 07900. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 feet non -cumulative or 1/16 inch per 10 feet, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 03879300 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-4 01/01 -- r-* 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provision of Section 01500. B. Protect finished Work from damage. 3.7 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HEADING NO. 1 Door No. Each Door to have: 1.5 pr. Hinges 1 Deadlatch 1 Cylinder 1 Closer 1 Pull 1 Stop 1 Threshold Door No. Each Door to have: 1.5 pr. Hinges 1 Exit Device 1 Closer 1 Threshold 1 Stop BB 1191 4.5 x 4.5 4722AN05-602-628 x 4568 Lever x US32D Specified in Section 08700 P4041 112 x US32D x Type 6 or 7 mounting 1200 ES Series, height as required 170A HEADING NO. 2 1361 191 4.5 x 4.5 CD 35L x 03 P4041 170A 1200 ES Series, height as required. END OF SECTION 03879300 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 01/01 084110-5 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. All finish hardware necessary for completion of project. 1.3 RELATED WORK z�^ A. Section 06410 - Custom Casework: Casework Hardware, B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames C. Section 08113 - Steel Frames ^^ D. Section 08210 - Wood Doors E. Section 08211 -Flush Wood Doors F. Section 08331 - Overhead Coiling Doors: Hardware for same except cylinders G. Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors: Hardware for same except cylinders H. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders I. Section 16721 - Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System: Electrical connection to activate door closers. e-� 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications 1. Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years experience. B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Fire Door Hardware a. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and 101 for doors shown, scheduled, or specified to be in a fire rated wall or to receive a UL -label. b. In case of conflict between hardware specified and NFPA requirements, provide type required by NFPA. C. Provide door hardware listed by UL or Warnock Hersey or other testing laboratory approved by code authority having jurisdiction. d. Provide hardware tested in accordance with NFPA 252. 1.5 REFERENCES A. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION (NEMA LB3-1995) - Performance Standards for High Pressure Decorative Laminate. "^ B. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) 1. ANSI Al 17 Building and Facilities - Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People. �,.,. 2. ANSI A156.1 Butts and Hinges. 3. ANSI Al 56.2 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. 4. ANSI Al 56.3 Exit Devices. 5. ANSI Al 56.4 Door Controls - Closers. 03879300 HARDWARE 08700-1 01/01 4. DHI-05 Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 5. DHI Al 15 Wood Door Preparation Standards G. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) 1. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows. 2. NFPA 101 Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. 3. NFPA 105 Installation of Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies. H. STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE 1 . SDI -107 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement and Application). I. Texas Civil Statutes, Article 9102, Architectural Barriers Act, Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) 1 . TAS 4.13.8 Door Thresholds 2. TAS 4.13.9 Door Hardware 3. TAS 4.13.10 Door Closers UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES, INC. 1. Building Materials Directory. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide product data on specified hardware. 2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and installation instructions. 3. Provide wiring diagrams, electrical characteristics, and product data on all electrically controlled devices. B. Hardware Schedule 1. Include for each item: Quantities; manufacturer's name and catalog numbers; sizes; detail information or catalog cuts; finishes; door and frame size and materials; location and hardware set identification using same opening numbers as indicated on the drawings; lock trim material thicknesses; lock trim material evaluation test results; 03879300 HARDWARE 08700-2 01/01 6. ANSI Al 56.5 Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products. 7. ANSI Al 56.6 Architectural Door Trim. S. ANSI Al 56.7 Template Hinge Dimensions. 9. ANSI Al 56.8 Door Controls - Overhead Holders. 10. ANSI Al 56.12 Interconnected Locks & Latches. 11. ANSI Al 56.13 Mortise Locks & Latches. 12. ANSI A156.15 Closer Holder Release Devices. 13. ANSI Al 56.16 Auxiliary Hardware. 14. ANSI A156.17 Self -Closing Hinges and Pivots. 15. ANSI Al 56.18 Materials and Finishes. 16. ANSI A156.21 Thresholds 17. ANSI Al 56.23 Electromagnetic Locks C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING & MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. ASTM F883 Padlocks. D. BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA) 1. BHMA Directory of Certified Locks & Latches. 2. BHMA Directory of Certified Door Closers. 3. BHMA Directory of Certified Exit Devices. E. CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR) 1. 36CFR Part 1191 - Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) F. DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE (DHI) 1 . DHI-02 Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. 2. DHI-03 Keying Systems and Nomenclature. 3. DHI-04 Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Door and Frames. 4. DHI-05 Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 5. DHI Al 15 Wood Door Preparation Standards G. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) 1. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows. 2. NFPA 101 Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. 3. NFPA 105 Installation of Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies. H. STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE 1 . SDI -107 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement and Application). I. Texas Civil Statutes, Article 9102, Architectural Barriers Act, Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) 1 . TAS 4.13.8 Door Thresholds 2. TAS 4.13.9 Door Hardware 3. TAS 4.13.10 Door Closers UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES, INC. 1. Building Materials Directory. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide product data on specified hardware. 2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and installation instructions. 3. Provide wiring diagrams, electrical characteristics, and product data on all electrically controlled devices. B. Hardware Schedule 1. Include for each item: Quantities; manufacturer's name and catalog numbers; sizes; detail information or catalog cuts; finishes; door and frame size and materials; location and hardware set identification using same opening numbers as indicated on the drawings; lock trim material thicknesses; lock trim material evaluation test results; 03879300 HARDWARE 08700-2 01/01 I corresponding ANSI/ BHMA standard type number or function number from 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING �-- A. Deliver, store and handle hardware to site in accordance with provisions of Section 01600, B. Individually package each article of hardware in manufacturer's standard commercial carton or container, and properly mark or label to be readily identifiable with approved hardware schedule. C. Tag or otherwise identify each change key with door for which its cylinder is intended. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate requirements for hardware to be mounted on metal doors or metal frames between hardware manufacturer and door or frame manufacturer to establish location, �.. reinforcement required, size of holes, and similar details. w 03879300 HARDWARE 08700-3 01/01 manufacturer's catalog if not covered by ANSI/ BHMA; and list of abbreviations. 2. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. 3. Indicate lock side of single cylinder doors. r-* 4. Include master cross reference indicating door numbers in numerical sequence and associated hardware set. C. Keying Schedule 1. Hold a keying conference with the Owner or Owner's representative and users to �e develop a keying schedule. 2. Develop schedule in accordance with DHI-03. 3. Obtain keying system approval before delivering hardware to project. 4. Unless otherwise indicated or requested, provide keying as follows: a. Key all doors different and key all doors to the same room alike. b. Key all exterior doors alike. C. Master key all doors except mechanical room doors to one key. d. Key mechanical room doors to existing utilities master key system. D. Certificates of Compliance 1 . Submit certificates of compliance attesting that hardware items conform to the NFPA, CFR and ANSI/ BHMA standards specified. In lieu of certificates, submit statement that proposed hardware items appear in current BHMA directories of certified products. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Submit certificates of compliance, attesting that doors which are indicated, scheduled, or specified to be fire rated are fitted with the required hardware (i.e. active latch bolts, self-closing devices) and operate in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 80 and 101. Identify all such doors on certificates. ,., E. Closeout Submittals 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01700. 2. Provide list of actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code. 3. Submit data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements adjustment methods and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 4. Furnish spare parts data, including a complete list of parts and supplies and source of supply, for locksets, exit devices, closers, electronic locking devices and electro -magnetic closer holder release devices. 5. Submit special tools required for hardware adjustment or control. 6. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish 6 complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and trouble shooting guides. 7. Submit simplified "as installed" diagrams for electronic locking devices and electro- magnetic closer holder release devices. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING �-- A. Deliver, store and handle hardware to site in accordance with provisions of Section 01600, B. Individually package each article of hardware in manufacturer's standard commercial carton or container, and properly mark or label to be readily identifiable with approved hardware schedule. C. Tag or otherwise identify each change key with door for which its cylinder is intended. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate requirements for hardware to be mounted on metal doors or metal frames between hardware manufacturer and door or frame manufacturer to establish location, �.. reinforcement required, size of holes, and similar details. w 03879300 HARDWARE 08700-3 01/01 1.9 'WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty for door closers. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Blank keys: Provide two for each lock scheduled. B. Provide 10 extra cylinder cores for each master key group. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hinges 1 . Bommer; Landrum, SC 2. Hager Hinge Co.; St. Louis, MO 3. McKinney Manufacturing Co.; Scranton, PA 4. Stanley Hardware Division, Stanley Works; New Britain, CT B. Lock and Latches 1 . Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; City of Industry, CA 2. Best Lock Corporation; Indianapolis, IN 3. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT 4. PDQ Industries, Inc.; Leola, PA 5. Sargent Division, ESSEX Industries, Inc.; New Haven, CT 6. Schlage Lock Co.; San Francisco, CA C. Push/Pulls 1. Rockwood Manufacturing Co.; Rockwood, PA 2. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA D. Electromagnetic Locks 1. Loknetics Security Engineering; Forestville, CT 2. Von Duprin, Inc.; Indianapolis, IN E. Exit Devices 1 . Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT 2. Norton Door Controls; Charlotte, NC 3. Sargent Division ESSEX Industries Inc.; New Haven, CT 4. Von Duprin, Inc.; Indianapolis, IN F. Closers 1 . Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT 2. LCN Closers Division, Schlage Lock Co.; Princeton, IL 3. Norton Door Controls; Charlotte, NC G. Overhead Holders 1. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 2. Rixson Architectural Hardware; Charlotte, NC H. Manual and Automatic Bolts 1. Door Controls International (DCI); Dexter, MI 2. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co; Wallingford, CT 4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA I. Gasketing/ThreshhoIds 1. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; Memphis, TN 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc.; Rosemount, MO 4. Zero International, Inc.; Bronx, NY 03879300 HARDWARE 08700-4 01/01 13 J. Protection Plates 1. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO 2. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.; Temple, TX 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA K. Door Stops/Bumpers 1. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 2. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO 3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.; Wallingford, CT 4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA L. Door Silencers 1. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 2. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.; Wallingford, CT 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA M. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. General 1. Provide hardware components as indicated in paragraph HARDWARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section. 2. Schedule is based on products manufactured by Schlage, Ives, LCN, Hager, Pemko and Von Duprin. Components of other manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with the ANSI/BHMA standards for Grade 1 products and are listed in the latest edition of the BHMA Directories of certification. 3. Regardless of whether or not the HARDARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section has every door and every component scheduled for each opening, provide all components required to make every opening functional based on hardware scheduled for similar openings and the referenced codes. B. Exit Devices and Exit Device Accessories 1. General a. Provide dust proof floor strikes for vertical rod devices. b. Provide manufacturer's standard filler to extend exit device beyond door lite frames where door lites extend below exit device. Factory cut or form filler to match profile of exit device trim. C. Closers 1. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Size one size larger than manufacturer's published recommendations, but not less than size 5. 2. Size requirements for other closers: Conform to manufacturer's published recommendations, except as specified otherwise. 3. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Provide parallel arms or top jam mount closers for outswinging exterior doors. 4. Provide narrow projection closers for doors close to a wall so as not to strike wall at 90 - degree open position. 5. Operating Pressure: Provide closers with maximum operating pressure as follows: a. Interior Doors: Set closing force on doors accessible to the physically handicapped for a push-pull of 5 pounds applied at knob or handle. b. Exterior Doors: Maximum 8.5 pounds. C. Fire Rated Doors: Set to minimum required to relatch door. D. Protection Plates 1. Conformance: ANSI A156.6, category J100. 2. Fabrication a. Metal Plates (1) Fabricate from 0.062 inch thick aluminum. (2) Bevel all edges. (3) Countersink screw holes for oval head screws. 03879300 01101 HARDWARE 08700-5 3. Size a. Width: 2 inches less in width than door width for single doors and 1 inch less for pairs of doors. b. Height (1) Kick Plates: 10 inches except where bottom rail is less than 10 inches, -- extend plate extend to within 1/2 -inch of panel mold or glass bead. E. Miscellaneous 1. Metal Thresholds a. Where required, modify thresholds to receive projecting bolts of flush bolts and exit devices. b. Thresholds for doors accessible to handicapped: Raised thresholds, corrugated, beveled with slopes not exceeding 1:2, and with height not exceeding 1/4 inch. Bevel not required where height is less than 1/4 -inch. F. Accessories 1 . Special Tools: Provide special tools such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging keys, required to adjust hardware items. G. Fastenings 1 . Provide proper type, size, quantity, and finish with each article of hardware. 2. Concrete or Grout Filled Masonry: Provide machine screws and expansion shields. 3. Hollow Masonry: Provide resin filled screen anchors equal to Hilti C7 anchors. 4. Gypsum Wallboard: Provide nylon or derlin expansion anchors equal to Hilti "Togglers". 5. Fastenings exposed to weather and in finished work: brass, bronze, or stainless steel. 6. Provide one-way or tamperproof screws on exterior doors equipped with half or full surface hinges. H. Fire Door Hardware 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. I. Finishes 1. Painting of primed surfaces: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 2. Conform to ANSI A156.18 as follows: a. Hinges: BHMA 626 b. Lock and door trim: BHMA 626 C. Door closers: BHMA 630 or BHMA US26D painted. T' d. Miscellaneous hardware: Finish appearance to match door hardware. e. Aluminum housed weatherstripping: Finish appearance to match door hardware. f. Thresholds: Finish appearance to match door hardware. 3. Door Protection Plates a. Metal Plates: BHMA US26D. J. Keying 1 . Provide a grand master keying system. 2. Key locks in sets or subsets. 3. Furnish locks with the manufacturer's standard construction key system. 4. Send keys directly from lock manufacturer to Owner by registered mail or other – approved means. 5. Supply keys in following quantities: a. 2 keys for each lock b. 3 master keys C. 3 grand master keys d. 3 great grand master keys e. 6 construction keys f. 2 control keys. 6. Furnish keys to Owner arranged in a container for key control system storage in sets or subsets as scheduled. — 03879300 HARDWARE 08700-6 01/01 r PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that power supply is available to power operated devices. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 7" 3.2 INSTALLATION r-+ A. General 1. Locate in accordance with DHI 04 and bHl 05 recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and DHI Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Install in accordance with DHI-02. 3. When approved, slight variations in locations or dimensions will be permitted. 4. Attach door control devices for exterior doors such as closers and holders to doors with thru bolts such as sex bolts and nuts. 5. Conform to 36CFR Part 1191 and the TAS for positioning requirements for handicapped. B. Door -Closing Device 1. Install and adjust in accordance with templates and printed instructions supplied by manufacturer. 2. Insofar as practicable, mount closer on room side of door for doors opening to or from halls and corridors. C. Key Control Storage System a^ 1. Install where directed by Architect. D. Kick Plates 1 . Install kick plates on push side of single -acting doors and on both sides of double-acting doors. E. Door Edgings 1. Install on stop face of butt edge of door unless otherwise scheduled. F. Auxiliary Hardware 1. Install lever extension flush bolts at top and bottom of inactive leaf of pairs of doors. 2. Install dust -proof floor strike or threshold, cut-out for bottom bolt G. Thresholds 1. Install in a bed of sealant with stainless steel screws and expansion shields. 2. Provide proper clearance and an effective seal with specified weather stripping. 3. Minimum screw size: #10, length dependent on job conditions. H. Weatherseals 1. Locate as indicated, snug to door face and fastened in place with color matched metal screws after door and frames have been finish painted. 2. Install to exclude light and air flow when door is in closed position. 3. Screw spacing: as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Gasketing 1. Install at inside edge of hinge, head and latch side of door frame. .— J. Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors 1. Install in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80 AND NFPA 105. w 03879300 HARDWARE 08700-7 01/01 3.3 REMARKS A. Door schedule remarks. Refer to end of Section for door schedule. 1. Glazing a. G 1 = 1/4" tinted tempered. — b. G2 = 1/4 clear tempered. 2. Label a. L1 = 20 min rated label. — b. L2 = 45 min rated label. C. L3 = 90 min rated label. 3. Miscellaneous (general notes) a. M1 = Existing door to be refinished to match new doors. — 3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW -1 Opening No's 104, 202, 203 Each opening to have: Existing Hardware to Remain HW -2 — Opening No's 101 A, 101 B Each to have: 1 ea. Schlage Cylinder B462P - One per pair 626 1 ea. Ives Stop 444 B26D HW -3 Opening No's 207, 208 Each door to have: 1 %z pr. Hager Butts BB1279 4 %z x 4 %z 626 1 ea. Corbin Push Pull HL14 626 1 ea. LCN Closer 4023T x 3038 AL 1 ea. Hager Stop 236W 26D 3 ea. Hager Silencers 307D HW -4 Opening No's 103 Each door to have: 1 '/2 pr. Hager Butts 661279 4 '/2 x 4 %z 626 1 ea. Schlage Lock AL70PD 626 1 ea. Schlage Cylinder B462P 626 _ 1 ea. Hager Stop 236W 26D 3 ea. Hager Silencer 307D -- 1 ea. LCN Closer 4023 x 3077 626 HW -5 Opening No's 209 Each door to have: — 1 %s pr. Hager Butts BB1279 4 '/i x 4 % 626 1 ea. Schlage Privacy Set AL405 626 1 ea. Hager Stop 236W 26D 03879300 HARDWARE 08700-8 01/01 - M 03879300 HARDWARE 01/01 08700-9 1 ea. Hager Gasketing 727S (Perimeter) -- """" 1 ea. Hager Door Bottom 774S A HW -6 Opening No. 210 Each pair to have: 3 pr. Hager Butts BB1279 4 Yz x 4 Yz 626 1 ea. Schlage Lockset AL 50PD 626 1 ea. Hager Stop 236W 26D 1 ea. LCN Closer 4023T x 3038 AL 3 ea. Hager Gasketing 727S (Perimeter) -- 1 ea. Hager Door Bottom 774S A HW -7 Opening No's 298, 299 Each gate to have: 1 set Bommer Pivots 7122 626 HW -8 Opening No. 201B Each door to have: 1 Ys pr. Hager Butts BB 1279 4 Ys x 4 Ys 626 1 ea. Schlage Cylinder 20-057 626 1 ea. LCN Closer 4023T x 3038 AL 1 ea. Hager Stops 236W 30 �. 1 ea. Hager Gasketing 727S (Perimeter) 1 ea. Hager Door Bottom 774S A HW -9 Opening No. 201 A, 204 Each pair to have: 3 pr. Hager Butts BB1279 4 'h x 4 Yz 626 1 ea. Schlage Lock AL50PD 626 1 ea. LCN Closers 4023T x 3038 AL 1 ea. Hager Stops 236W 630 1 ea. Hager Gasketing 727S (Perimeter) 1 ea. 'Hager Door Bottom 774S A .q, HW -10 Opening No. 202 Each pair to have: 3 ea. Hager Butts 661279 4 Yz x 4 1/2 626 1 ea. LCN Closers 4023T x 3038H AL 1 ea. Schlage Lockset AL70PD 626 1 ea. Schlage Cylinder B462P 626 2 ea. Trimco Flush Bolts 3913 PL 1 ea. Trimco Door Coordinator 3094 B1 1 ea. Hager Gasketing 727S (Perimeter) 2 ea. Hager Door Bottom 774S A 03879300 HARDWARE 01/01 08700-9 Luw. N cc O N N_ O co E T— U- n c O A u c O U O O o Fo N v n. O L U (D0 L N J22JJ U? L m LL (D0 J JJJ J22JJ � r r r LA LLQ LO Q Cj N r r N N r LO r Ln M <- r r to co :n co co co co co r !n r LO r ui r to r Lo r 0 r u•) 7777 0 rrr Lo U" 0 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Mr O 0M m O a)OLTO r r N r r r r r r r r r r r Ln r Ln r Ln r In r Ln r to r LO r Lo r LO L6 Il•) Q <— —< N CO N r r r r r r r r N N L7`0 � �0- 0`0zz It It Ln X Ln Ln Ln x Ln O Ln Lf) Lp JJ 2 222 2 2222 QQ =x =_= x= ____ 000 0 0000 U U U U U U U U QQ 2X Cl) toCl) Xcn cncocncn m m Q X Q Q Q x Q Q Q Q Q V, V, g gvvv v vvvg COcn M Cf) cMMM CMOMMMMM e-r(j�r rrrr rW UJrrrr x x m x x x x x x m m x x x x O O = O O O O O 0 0 0 0 0 Ix x x x F- f` x� ~ x x f` x ti � x x� F- � x H f- x x x x x X 000 O x O O O O x O Q Q 0 0 L7'')MZce) cMLMMLV W mZZMcnmm ¢mNmv amN cnv co 1,- 0000 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O r r r r r r N N N N N N N N N N N No Text SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass for hollow metal and aluminum frame work. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM E330- Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. B. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings. C. ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures. D. ASTM C864 - Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal, Gaskets, Setting Blocks and Spacers. E. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. F. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass. G. ASTM C1048 - Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. H. ASTM C1085 - Butyl Rubber -Based Solvent - Release Sealants. I. ASTM C1172 - Laminated Architecture Flat Glass. J. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. K. ASTM E546 - Test Method For Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. L. ASTM E576 -Test Method For Dew/Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in Vertical Position. M. ASTM E773 - Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. N. ASTM E774 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 0. ASTM E4802 - Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic Sheet. P. ASTM F1233 - Standard Test Method for Security Glazing Materials and Systems. Q. GANA - Glazing Manual R. GANA - Laminated Glass Design Guide. S. GANA - Sealant Manual. T. FS TT -C-00598 - Caulking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type. U. FS TT -G-410 - Glazing Compound, Sash (Metal) for Back Bedding and Face Glazing (Not for Channel or Stop Glazing). V. SIGMA - Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association. W. UL 752 - Bullet Resisting Equipment. 03879300 GLAZING 08800-1 01/01 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900. 2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with ASCE 7-95 code to a design pressure of 20 Ib/sq ft as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330. C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Glass: a. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. b. Polycarbonate material manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning materials and methods. C. Provide copy of manufacturer's sample warranty. 2. Glazing Sealants, Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required. C. Manufacturer's Certificates 1. Certify that glass meets or exceeds requirements of CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category I materials. 2. Certify that sealed insulating glass units meet or exceed specified requirements. 3. Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating that glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials including sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks. 4. Certify that bullet resistant glazing meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual, SIGMA and GANA Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to adjacent Work. 03879300 GLAZING 08800-2 01/01 r 1. 11 WARRANTY A. Provide Warranties in accordance with Section 01700. B. Ten year manufacturer's warranty: 1. Include coverage for plastic film from coating failure, fading or cracking for 5 years. 2. Include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and replacement of same. 3. Include coverage for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same. C. Five year manufacturer's warranty: 1. Insulating Glass Units: Include coverage for from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. 2. Polycarbonate Glazing: Include coverage against yellowing/loss of light transmission, abrasion, breakage, delamination, and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flat Glass Materials 1. Libbey-Owens-Ford Co. 2. PPG Industries, Inc. 3. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc. 4. Viracon. 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Plastic Glazing Materials 1. Cyro Industries, Inc. 2. General Electric Co. 3. Rhom and Hauss Co. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. C. Glazing Compounds 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. GE Silicones. 3. Norton Co. 4. Pecora Corp. 5. Tremco Mfg. Co. 6. VIP Enterprises, Inc. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Glazing 1. G1 - Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT - Fully tempered with horizontal tempering; Condition A, uncoated; Type I - Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 1 clear; Quality q3 glazing select; conforming to ANSI Z97.1; thickness as noted on drawings. B. Glazing Compounds 1 . Modified Oil: FS TT -G-410; color as selected by Architect. 2. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1085; Shore A hardness of 10-20 color as selected by Architect; non -skinning. 3. Silicone Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class and Use suitable for glazing application indicated; single component; solvent curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non -staining, cured Shore A .-+ hardness of 15 to 25. a. Color: As selected. b. Structural Silicone: Provide high -modulus structural silicone glazing materials where sealant bonds glass to substrate. 03879300 GLAZING 08800-3 ,., 01/01 4. Polysulfide Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class and Use suitable _ for glazing application indicated; two component; chemical curing, non -sagging type; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25. - a. Color: As selected. 5. Polyurethane Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class and Use suitable for glazing application indicated; single component, chemical curing, non- staining, non-bleeding, Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35. a. Color: As selected. 6. Acrylic Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class and Use suitable for glazing application indicated; single component, solvent curing, non-bleeding; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25. a. Color: As selected. C. Glazing Accessories 1. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. 2. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. 3. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 - 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; size as required for glazing channel; black color. 4. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C864 Resilient type as recommended by glazing manufacturer for framing system furnished with extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; color as selected by Architect. - 5. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. 6. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 2. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 03879300 GLAZING 08800-4 01/01 Fai 4. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as P" follows: a. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where .•. gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. b. Provide 1 /8 -inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. 5. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. '^ 6. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. B. Exterior Glazing 1. Dry method as indicated in Figure 18 of GANA Glazing Manual and as recommended by glazing manufacturer for framing system furnished. C. Plastic Film 1 . Install plastic film with adhesive, applied in accordance with film manufacturer's instructions. 2. Place without air bubbles, creases or visible distortion. 3. Fit tight to glass perimeter with razor cut edge. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is complete. C. Clean glass and mirrors. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. END OF SECTION 03879300 GLAZING 08800-5 01/01 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Metal grid suspension ceiling framing. C. Framing accessories. D. Acoustical insulation. E. Acoustical sealant. F. Gypsum board. G. Cementitious backer board. H. Taped and sanded joint treatment. I. Texture finish. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05810 - Expansion Joint Assemblies: Expansion Joints. B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing and furring; Gypsum sheathing applied over wood framing. C. Section 06114 -Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking for support of surface mounted accessories specified in other sections. D. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Wood Door Frames. E. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Thermal [and acoustical] insulation. F. Section 07270 - Firestopping: Fire -resistive -rated joint sealants. G. Section 08113 - Steel Frames. H. Section 09300 - Tile. I. Section 09900 - Painting: Surface finish. J. Section 09950 - Wall Coverings: Surface finish. 1.4 REFERENCES ^^ A. ANSI Al 18.9 - Cementitious Backer Units B. ASTM B221 - Aluminum -alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. C. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard. D. ASTM C442 - Gypsum Backing Board and Core Board. E. ASTM C475 - Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. F. ASTM C514 - Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board. G. ASTM C557 - Adhesive for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing. H. ASTM C630 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. I. ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. J. ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Board. K. ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. L. ASTM C919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. M. ASTM C931 - Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board. 03879300 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250- 1 .■•, 01101 N. ASTM C954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 inches to 0.112 inches in Thickness. O. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases. P. ASTM C1007 - Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories. Q. ASTM C1047 - Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. R. ASTM C1311 - Solvent -Release Sealants. S. ASTM D3678 - Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Interior Profile Extrusions. T. ASTM D4397 - Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial and Agricultural Applications. U. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. V. ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. W. ASTM El 19 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. X. ASTM E497 - Installing Sound -Isolating Lightweight Partitions. Y. ASTM El 190 - Strength of Power -Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members. Z. FM 1-21 - Fire Resistance of Building Assemblies. AA. FS FF -P-395 (Rev. C) - Pin, Drive Guided and Pin Driver, Powder Actuated (Fasteners for Powder Actuated and Hand Actuated Fastening Tools). BB. GA -214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. CC. GA -600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual. DD. UL - Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory. EE. WHl - Certification Listings. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. B. Partition Component Sizes and Spacings: Provide steel framing members as indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the following maximum deflection and lateral loading conditions: 1. Interior Partitions a. Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5 Ibf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. b. Maximum Deflection: L/120 at 5 Ibf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. C. Maximum Deflection: L/120 at 7.5 Ibf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. d. Maximum Deflection: L/120 at 10 Ibf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ceiling Component Sizes and Spacings: As indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754, maximum deflection of L/240 and deadload of 5 Ibf per sq. ft. minimum, spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit following in accordance with provisions of Section 01300: 1. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint compounds and moldings. 03879300 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250-2 01/01 A-+ 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies in conjunction with Section 05400 as follows: a. Fire Rated Partitions: Listed assembly by UL No. indicated. b. Fire Rated Structural Column Framing: Listed assembly by UL No. indicated. C. Material Compatibility 1: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. C. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. D. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. E. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions 1. General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Room Temperatures a. For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F. b. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. C. Do not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources. 3. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 2.2 MATERIALS A. Framing 1. Exterior Non -axial Load Bearing Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, C shaped sized in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraph "SYSTEM DESCRIPTION". 03879300 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250-3 01/01 2. Interior Studs and Tracks a. To Receive Gypsum Board: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick (unless otherwise required by partition height for loading specified), C shape, with knurled faces. Double 20 gage studs at door frame jambs. b.- To receive Plaster: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 22 gage thick unless otherwise indicated, C shape, with knurled faces. 3. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ASTM C645. 4. Interior Channels: ASTM C645; Hot or Cold -rolled steel, ASTM A 525 G-60, hot dipped galvanized coating. 5. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C645, manufacturer's standard direct -hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting network. 6. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sound transmission, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 525 or ASTM A 568 to form 1/2 -inch -deep channel of the following configuration: — a. Single -Leg Configuration: Asymmetric -shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single slotted leg (web). b. Double -Leg Configuration: Hat -shaped channel, with 1 -1/2 -inch -wide face connected to flanges by double slotted or expanded metal legs (webs). C. Configuration: Either configuration indicated above. 7. Deflection Track: Galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick, C shaped, with minimum 3 inch legs offset 5/8 inch at the midpoint. Track equal to "Shadowline" design by Fire Track. B. Gypsum Board 1. Standard Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, square edges. 2. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, square edges. 3. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C630; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, square edges. 4. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C931; standard type, 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, square edges. 5. Cementitious Backing Board: High density, glass fiber reinforced, 1/2 inch nominal thick. C. Accessories 1 . Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed mineral fiber, friction fit, Type unfaced, 3 inch thick. 2. Acoustical Sealant: ASTM C1311; Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board; black in concealed locations; color as selected from manufacturer's standard in exposed locations. 3. Trim: a. Corner Beads: ASTM C1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces, 1-1 /4 inch wide flanges. b. Edge Trim: ASTM C1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces, types as indicated. C. Accent Trim: (1) Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, 6063-T5, of profile indicated with Class II Clear AA-Cl2C22A31 anodic coating. 4. Vapor Barrier: ASTM D4397; minimum 6 mils thick. 5. Vapor Barrier Tape a. 12 mil thick polypropylene backing with integral acrylic adhesive. b. Acceptable Product: 3M Contractor Sheathing Tape No. 8086. 03879300 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250-4 01/01 6. Furring Brackets: ASTM C645; galvanized steel. Serrated -arm type, adjustable, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Metal Studs 1. General a. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. rte+ b. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center (regardless of fire rated partition allowances for wider spacings except where otherwise indicated. 2. Form all corners using conventional three stud framing. 3. Interior Partition a. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending through the ceiling bracing and for partitions extending through the ceiling structure above. b. Non -Fire Rated Partitions: Brace partitions, extending above ceiling only, with runner track running diagonally from top of partition to underside of roof deck above and space alternately at 4 feet on center maximum. C. Fire Rated Partitions ,., (1) Where open web steel joints are used as the framing members. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. 03879300 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250-5 ,..,, 01/01 minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch, designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring. 7. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water. 8. Wall Texture: Latex based aggregated texturing material. 9. Cementitious Backing Board Tape: Manufacturer's standard 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. 10. Fasteners a. Framing to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. b. Powder -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: FS FF -P-395 (Rev. C), size and type recommended by framing manufacturer. C. Metal Framing to Metal Framing: Manufacturer's standard screw attachments. d. Gypsum Board to Metal Framing (1) Screws complying with ASTM C954; type as required for substrate indicated. (2) Adhesive: ASTM C557. e. Gypsum Board to Wood Framing: Nails complying with ASTM C514. 11. Tie and Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1 190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Metal Studs 1. General a. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. rte+ b. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center (regardless of fire rated partition allowances for wider spacings except where otherwise indicated. 2. Form all corners using conventional three stud framing. 3. Interior Partition a. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending through the ceiling bracing and for partitions extending through the ceiling structure above. b. Non -Fire Rated Partitions: Brace partitions, extending above ceiling only, with runner track running diagonally from top of partition to underside of roof deck above and space alternately at 4 feet on center maximum. C. Fire Rated Partitions ,., (1) Where open web steel joints are used as the framing members. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. 03879300 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250-5 ,..,, 01/01 (2) Provide deflection track at head of all full height partitions and install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.. 4. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs. 5. Blocking: Screw wood blocking to studs. Install blocking for support of finish — carpentry items, plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, and other devices as indicated. 6. Coordinate installation of wood bucks, anchors, and wood blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing. B. Metal Wall Furring 1. Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete block and concrete walls. 2. Erect furring channels horizontally; space maximum 16 inches on center, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. 3. Erect free-standing metal stud framing spaced one inch from existing walls, attached — by adjustable furring brackets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Acoustical Accessories 1 . Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 2. Install acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with ASTM C919, ASTM E497, and manufacturer's instructions. 3. Caulk all penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, duct work, and rough -in boxes, in conformance with ASTM E497. D. Vapor Barrier — 1. Install vapor barrier full height on interior side of walls indicated, tight across framing members, on maximum practical length to minimize joints. 2. Lap joints minimum 2 inches and tape joint full length. 3. Tape all cuts, rips and tears. 4. Attach vapor barrier to framing members with minimum fasteners to maintain tight until gypsum board can be installed. E. Gypsum Board 1. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840 and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Erect single layer gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 3. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. 4. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. 5. Double Layer Applications a. Use gypsum backing board for first layer, placed perpendicular to framing or furring members. Use fire rated gypsum backing board for fire rated partitions. b. Place second layer parallel to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. 6. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. 7. Control Joints a. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as required by ASTM C840. b. Install control joints at outside corners above each jamb of all door frames. Extend control joint from top of frame head to top of partition. 8. Place corner beads at all exposed external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials at all exposed locations. Leave a 1/4 inch space between edge trim and dissimilar material. Seal joint with sealant specified in Section 07900. 03879300 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250-6 01/01 -- PRO 9. Install backing board over metal studs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 10. Apply gypsum board to curved walls in accordance with ASTM C840. F. Joint Treatment 1. Gypsum Board: Install joint treatment in conformance with ASTM C840 and to level as defined by GA -214 and as scheduled at the end of this Section. 2. Cementitious Backing Board: Tape joints and corners in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. G. Gypsum Sheathing 1. Install gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over framing members. 2. Stagger vertical joints. 3. Install sheathing with minimum width of two framing spaces. 4. Apply sheathing tape to all horizontal and vertical joints in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. H. Texture Finish 1. Walls: Spray apply light finish texture coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved sample, to all surfaces scheduled to receive paint. r 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from plumb and true Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. ., 3.4 JOINT TREATMENT SCHEDULE A. Level 1: All gypsum board surfaces concealed above ceilings. B. Level 2: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive ceramic tile, wood paneling and behind fixed millwork. C. Level 3: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive spray applied texture and Type I wall coverings specified in Section 09950 - Wall Coverings. �^ D. Level 4: All gypsum board surface scheduled to receive Type II wall coverings specified in Section 09950 - Wall Coverings. E. Level 5: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive paint. END OF SECTION 03879300 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250-7 01/01 SECTION 09300 rpm TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceramic mosaic tile floor finish using the thinset application method. B. Mortar bed installation. C. Ceramic the walls and base finish using the thinset application method. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Floating of floor slab for mortar bed. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Control and expansion joint components. C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall: Cementitious backer unit and gypsum wallboard substrate. D. Section 09915 - Color and Finish Schedule. E. Section 15412 - Sanitary Drainage and Vent Systems: Floor drains. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/TCA Al 08.4 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Water Resistant Organic Adhesive. B. ANSI/TCA A108.5 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. C. ANSI/TCA 108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tilework. D. ANSI/TCA Al 18.1 - Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar. E. ANSI/TCA Al 18.4 - Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. F. ANSI/TCA Al 18.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts. G. ANSI/TCA A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile, Type 1 and Type 2. H. ANSI/TCA A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile. I. TCA - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Submit shop drawings indicating tile layout, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, and setting details. 2. Submit product data indicating material specifications, characteristics, and instructions for using adhesives and grouts. 3. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. 4. Submit maintenance data including recommended cleaning and stain removal methods, cleaning materials, and polishes and waxes. B. Samples 1. Mount tile and apply grout on two 12 x 12 inch plywood panels to indicate pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. C. Certificates 1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 03879300 TILE 09300-1 0*4 01/01 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications 1. Company specializing in the manufacture of products specified in this Section with minimum 5 years experience. 2. Conform to ANSI/TCA A137.1 B. Installer Qualifications 1. Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 2. Installer: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with Section 01600. B. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer. C. Store bagged materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from weather. D. Store the in manner to prevent scratching, chipping and breaking. E. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment. B. Maintain 50 degrees F. during installation of mortar materials. 1.9 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide approximately 4% maintenance materials of each the specified to the Owner at location as directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Tile 1. American Marrazzi, Tile, Inc. 2. American Olean Tile Co. 3. Crossville Ceramis 4. Dal -Tile Corp. 5. Florida Tile Industires, Inc. 6. Monarch Tile, Inc. 7. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 8. Substitution: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Tile Setting and Grouting Materials 1. American Olean Tile Co. 2. Custom Building Products 3. Dal -Tile Corp. 4. Laticrete International, Inc. 5. Mapei Corporation 6. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 7. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 03879300 TILE 09300-2 01/01 03879300 TILE 09300-3 01101 C. Waterproofing Membrane 1. Compotite Corporation. 2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIAL A. Tile 1. Ceramic Floor Tile a. Conformance: ANSI/TCA A137.1 b. Type: Porcelain Mosaic. C. Size: 2 x 2 inch d. Pattern: e. Edge: Cushioned f. Surface Finish: Matte g. Color: As scheduled in Section 09915 Color and Finish Schedule. 2. Ceramic Wall Tile ria a. Conformance: ANSI/TCA A137 b. Type: Non -vitreous with moisture absorption over 7.0 percent. C. Size: 4 1/4 x 4 1/4 x 1/4 inch d. Edge: Cushioned ' e: Surface Finish: Matte glazed f. Color: As scheduled in Section 09915 Color and Finish Schedule. 3. Base a. At mosaic the floors for moisture absorption, surface finish and size; 4 1 /4 inch high, coved bottom and internal corner. See Section 09915 for color selection. 4. Trim Shapes: Surface caps, corners and miscellaneous pieces to match adjacent the surface. B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI/TCA A136.1, Type 1; thinset bond type. C. Thinset Mortar: ANSI/TCA Al 18.4; Portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water. D. Grout r, 1 . Type: Pre -mixed cementitious with latex additive. 2. Colors a. Floors: Refer Section 09915 Color and Finish Schedule. b. Walls: Refer Section 09915 Color and Finish Schedule. E. Mortar Bed 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type I. 2. Sand: ASTM C-144. 'MIN 3. Water: Potable. 2.3 MIXES A. Mortar Bed 1. Mix 1 part Portland Cement to 6 parts damp sand by volume. 2. Add minimum amount of water to produce workable consistency. B. Thinset and Grout 1. Mix and proportion pre -mix bond coat and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 03879300 TILE 09300-3 01101 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that surfaces are plumb and level and have square corners with the following maximum variation: 1. Subfloor Surfaces: 1/8 inch from true flat in 10 feet with no abrupt, irregularities greater than 1/32 inch. 2. Vertical Surfaces: a. Deviation from plumb: 1/8 inch in 8 feet. b. Deviation from alignment: 1 /8 inch in 10 feet. C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration. B. Vacuum clean existing substrate and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Apply conditioner to surfaces as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install adhesive, tile, and grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Lay floor and wail tile in pattern matching existing in both directions in each space or on each wall area. 3. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. 4. Place edge strips at exposed tile edges in floors. 5. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. 6. Form corners and bases neatly. 7. Place the joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. 8. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting 9. Grout the joints and damp cure for minimum of 72 hours after installation. 10. Apply sealant to junction of the and dissimilar materials and at junction of dissimilar planes. B. Mortar Bed 1 . Install cleavage membrane. 2. Apply mortar bed over cleavage membrane to a thickness as indicated on the drawings. 3. Use mortar within 2 1/2 hours of initial mixing. 4. Do not use mortar after it has begun to set. C. Floor Tile 1 . Install in accordance with ANSI 108.5 and TCA Handbook number F113. D. Wall Tile 1. Over masonry walls, install in accordance with ANSI 108.5 and TCA Handbook number W202. 2. Over cementitious backer units, install in accordance with ANSI 108.5 and TCA Handbook number W244. 3. Over gypsum wallboard, install in accordance with ANSI 108-4 and TCA Handbook number W242. 03879300 TILE 09300-4 01/01 03879300 TILE 09300-5 „�. 01/01 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Install the with the following variation from true flatness: 1 . 1 /8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 2. From edge of the to edge of adjacent tile: 1/32 inch. f i� B. install grout with the following variation from flush with tile surface: ` 1. Maximum 3/64 inch for 1/4 inch wide joint. 2. Maximum 1/16 inch for 3/8 inch wide joint. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Sound the after setting. I B. Replace hollow sounding units. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Wash the thoroughly to remove all residue. B. Use of acid in cleaning solutions is prohibited. C. Replace all broken chipped or otherwise damaged tile. D. Remove and replace tiles that do not conform to specified tolerances. 3.7 PROTECTION ` A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for minimum of seven days after ,.e installation. .s- END OF SECTION 03879300 TILE 09300-5 „�. 01/01 SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical panels. C. Non -fire rated assemblies. D. Perimeter trim. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 09915 - Color and Finish Schedules. B. Section 15932 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. C. Section 16515 - Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. C. ASTM E 119-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. D. ASTM E 413-87 Determination of Sound Transmission Class. E. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings F. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels. G. ASTM E 1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products H. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Building Materials Directory. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and ceiling panels with five years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with three years minimum documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to code for combustibility requirements for materials. B. Provide acoustical panels with the following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: 1. Flame Spread: Class II, 26-75. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. C. Identify acoustical tile and panels with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 03879300 01/01 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-1 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide product data on metal grid system components, acoustic units, accessories. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Samples 1 . Submit four samples, illustrating material and finish of acoustic units. 2. Submit four samples each, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, and edge trim. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical units to project site in original unopened packages. B. Store materials in enclosed space protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight and surface contamination. C. Handle acoustic units carefully to avoid chipping edges or surface finish. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during, and after installation. 1.10 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 1 box of each type acoustical ceiling unit specified to Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Suspension Systems 1. Grid a. Conformance: ASTM C635, intermediate duty, non -fire rated. b. Type: Exposed T. C. Finish: Factory applied white baked enamel. d. Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. 2. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, edge moldings and hold down clips as required for suspended grid system. B. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized; size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. C. Acoustic Units 1. Conformance: ASTM E1264. 2. Type C1 a. Size: 24 x 48 inches. b. Thickness: 3/4 inches. C. Type: III. 03879300 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-2 01/01 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. C. Verify that walls and partitions are plumb and straight within specified tolerances. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Suspension System 1 . d. Form: 3. ! " e. Light Reflectance: 75 percent 2. f. NRC Range:.65 -.75. g. CAC Range: Minimum 40. r• h. Fire Hazard Classification: None. 4. i. Edge Detail: Square. 5. j. Surface Color: White. k. Pattern: D. 6. 1. Refer to Section 09915 for acceptable product. 3. Type C2 a. Size: 24 x 48 inches. b. Thickness: 3/4 inches. C. Type: III. d. Form: 3. ` e. Light Reflectance: 75 percent. f. NRC Range: .65 -.75. v g. CAC Range: Minimum 40. h. Fire Hazard Classification: None. i. Edge Detail: Square. ' j. Surface Color: White. k. Pattern: D. I. Refer to Section 09915 for acceptable product. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. C. Verify that walls and partitions are plumb and straight within specified tolerances. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Suspension System 1 . Install system in accordance with ASTM C636, manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this Section. 2. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. 3. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. 4. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. 5. If metal deck is not supplied with hanger tabs, coordinate the installation of hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. r� 6. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 7. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. 8. Center system on room axis leaving equal border units no less than 50 percent of ` acoustical unit size in accordance with reflected ceiling plan. 9. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. 10. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently. ' 03879300 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-3 01/01 1 1. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. 12. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. B. Acoustic Units 1. Fit in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. 2. Lay all units one way with pattern parallel to longest room axis. 3. Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces. 4. Install level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. 5. Rabbet edges of field cut reveal edge border the to match factory edges. Paint field cut edges to match factory finish. C. Accessories 1. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 10 ft of an exterior door. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1 /8 inch in 10 ft. B. Maximum variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum. 3.4 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide two full cartons extra quantity of each type acoustic units specified to Contracting Officer at location designated. END OF SECTION 03879300 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-4 01/01 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vinyl tile flooring. B. Terrazzo the flooring. C. Resilient base. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers : Cove trim sealant. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Wall materials to receive base. C. Section 09680 - Carpet - Glue Down: Termination edging of adjacent floor finish. D. Section 09915 - Color and Finish Schedules. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM D2047 - Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish -Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine. B. ASTM D4078 - Water Emulsion Floor Polish. C. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. ASTM E648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor -Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. E. ASTM F1066 Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. F. Rubber Manufacturers Association - Moisture Emission Test Unit G. FS SS -T-312- Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl and Vinyl Composition. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable UBC code for fire performance ratings as follows: 1. Flooring, critical radiant flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, per ASTM E 648. 2. Flooring, smoke density: Maximum 450, per ASTM E662. 3. Wall base: Flame spread maximum 75, smoke developed maximum 450 per ASTM E84. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics, sizes, patterns and colors available. B. Manufacturer's Instructions 1. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. C. Samples 1. Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for initial color selection. 03879300 01/01 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650-1 D. Closeout Submittals 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01700. 2. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested methods and schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re -waxing. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F. B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide one box of each color of the and 50 lineal feet of base and stair materials of each material specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Tile Flooring 1. Vinyl Plastics, Inc., Sheboygan, WI. 2. Tarkett, Inc., Parsippany, NJ. 3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, PA. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Terrazzo Tile Flooring 1. Fritz Industries, Dallas, TX. C. Resilient Base, Treads and Risers 1. Vinyl Plastics, Inc., Sheboygan, WI. 2. Johnson Rubber Company, Middlefield, OH. 3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, PA. 4. Mercer Products Co., Inc., Orlando, FL. 5. R.C. Musson Rubber Co., Akron, OH. 6. Roppe Rubber Corp., Fostoria, OH. D. Accessories: As recommended by flooring manufacturer. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Vinyl Composition Tile. F2 1. Conformance: ASTM F1066, Class 2. 2. Size: 12 x 12 x 1/8 inch thick 3. Color/Pattern: Color and pattern through total thickness. Refer to Section 09915 for color selection. 03879300 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650-2 01/01 B. Base 1. Compliance: ASTM F-1861 Type TP Thermoplastic Rubber. 2. Size: 4 inch high; 1/8 inch thick; refer to Section 09915 for color selection. 3. Length: 4 foot sections. 4. Accessories: Premolded end stops and external corners, of same material, size, and color as base. C. Accessories 1. Subfloor Filler: Cementitious; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. Gypsum based filler and leading compounds will not be altered. 2. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. 3. Edge Strips: Same material as flooring. 4. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1 /8 inch in 10 ft, and are ready to receive Work. B. Verify concrete floors exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. C. Verify that concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content as recommended by manufacturer as follows: 1. Prior to installation of any resilient flooring, conduct quantitative moisture emissions tests in accordance with Rubber Manufacturers Association Guidelines. 2. Maximum Allowable Moisture Content: 3 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hours. 3. Test Quantities: Minimum of 4 tests for areas up to 5,000 sq. ft. and one additional test for each additional 5,000 sq. ft. of floor area. 4. After concrete floor surfaces have been cleaned, spread small patches of adhesive to be in several locations in each room and allowed to dry overnight. 5. If the adhesive can be peeled easily from the floor surfaces, the floor is not sufficiently dry. 6. Apply resilient flooring when tests show that the adhesive adheres tightly to the floor surface, 7. If concrete floors are in contact with the ground or over unventilated crawl spaces, use small patches of primer in lieu of adhesive to test for moisture. D. Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances that may impair adhesion of new adhesive and finish materials. E. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. B. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler. C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface. D. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured. E. Vacuum clean substrate. F. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-thru" or interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be removed. 03879300 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 01/01 r 09650-3 3.3 EXISTING WORK A. Extend existing resilient flooring installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations, or as specified. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. 2. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion 3. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. 4. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. Secure resilient strips by adhesive. 5. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 6. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern. 7. At movable partitions, install flooring under partitions without interrupting floor pattern. B. Vinyl Tile Flooring 1. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when the is placed. 2. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. 3. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. 4. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern. 5. At movable partitions, install flooring under partitions without interrupting floor pattern. C. Base 1. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. 2. Miter internal corners. 3. At external corners, 'V' cut back of base strip to 2/3 of its thickness and fold. 4. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. 5. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Subfloor Flatness: Maximum 1 /8 inch deviation in 10 feet. B. Vertical Alignment (Offset from edge of tile to edge of tile): None allowed. C. Horizontal Alignment (Offset from a straight line): Plus or minus 1/16 inch in any length. 3.6 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning. B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. C. Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section 01700 -Contract Closeout: Protecting installed construction. B. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION 03879300 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650-4 01/01 SECTION 09680 CARPETING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glue down carpet. B. Adhesives, floor fillers, edge strips and accessories 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring and Base: Base finish. B. Section 09915 - Color and Finish Schedules. 1.4 REFERENCES 03879300 CARPETING 09680-1 01/01 r A. ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM D 418-82 Pile Yarn Floor Covering Construction. _. C. ASTM D 1335-67 Tuft Bind of Pile Floor Covering. D. ASTM D 1423-82 Twist in Yarns by the Direct -Counting Method. E. ASTM D 2257-80 Extractable Matter in Yarns. F. ASTM D 3936-80 Delamination Strength of Secondary Backing of Pile Floor Coverings. G. FS DDD -C-95 - Carpets and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic. H. FS DDD -C-0095 - Carpet and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, & Rev. A Modacrylic Polyester, Polypropylene. I. (CPSC) Publication: 16 CFR 1630 Standard for the Surface Flammability of Carpet and Rugs. J. (AATCC) Test Methods: 16E-1982 Colorfastness to Light: Water -Cooled Rev 85 Xenon - arc Lamp, Continuous Light. K. AATCC Crockmeter Method: 165-1986 Colorfastness to Crocking. L. Carpet & Rug Institute Publication: CRI -104-1986 Installation of Textile Floorcovering Materials. •- 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. 3. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. B. Samples 1. Submit four samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet material specified in Section 09915. l 03879300 CARPETING 09680-1 01/01 r 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company with ten years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with 5 years minimum documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Uniform Building Code, 1997 Edition for applicable flame spread/ smoke developed for carpet flammability requirements of 26 - 75 / 0 - 450 in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Carpet 1. Mohawk Commercial. B. Sub -floor Filler 1. W.W. Henry Co., Huntington Park, CA. C. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Carpet F1: Woven Interlock Multi color loop broadloom; direct glue equal to Mohawk, Supertron. B. Accessories 1. Sub -Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by carpet manufacturer. -- 2. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; of types recommended by carpet manufacturer. 3. Edge Strips: Vinyl type, smooth finish, color as selected from manufacturer's standard. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft and are ready to receive work. B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent; and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface. 03879300 CARPETING 09680-2 01/01 `� C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Vacuum floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Apply carpet and adhesive in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Lay out rolls of carpet for approval. C. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots. D. Double cut carpet, to allow intended seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unf rayed. E. Locate seams in area of least traffic. F. Fit seams straight, not crowded or peaked, free of gaps. G. Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same direction, or as directed by manufacturer, for anticipated traffic. H. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous through a wall opening into another room. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. I. Cut and fit carpet around interruptions. J. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation. 3.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 120 sq ft of carpeting F1 in each color/pattern as specified. Deliver to Owner as directed. 03879300 01/01 END OF SECTION CARPETING 09680-3 v f FA SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Surface finish schedule. C. Color selection schedule. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 05210 - Steel Joists: Shop preparation and priming of joists. B. Section 05312 - Steel Roof beck: Shop preparation and priming of roof deck. C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Texture on gypsum wallboard surfaces. D. Section 09800 - Special Coatings E. Section 15391 - Marking and Identification: Color schedule for equipment and piping. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. C. ASTM D2486 - Test Method for Scrub Resistance of Interior Latex Flat Wall Paints. D. ASTM D3359 - Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. E. ASTM D4138 - Test Method for Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Protective Coating Systems by Destructive Means. F. ASTM D4261 - Surface Cleaning Concrete Masonry for Coating. G. ASTM D4263 Test Methods for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. H. ASTM D4414 - Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notch Gages. I. ASTM D4540 - Guide for Testing Interior Latex Semigloss and Gloss Paints. J. ASTM D4541 - Test Method for Pull -Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers K. Steel Structure Painting Council - Steel Structures Painting Manual 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ANSI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with five years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with five years documented experience. 03879300 PAINTING 09900-1 01/01 C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to UBC and NFPA 101 applicable code for Class 11 respectively flame spread/smoke development rating requirements for finishes of 26-75/0- 450. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Provide product data on all finishing products. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed application instructions. B. Samples 1. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled, for selection. ` C. Certificates 1. Submit paint manufacturer's certificate(s) stating the following: a. Paints for interior use contain no mercurial mildewcide. b. Paints for interior use contain no insecticide. C. Paints for interior use contain no more than 0.06 percent lead. d. Paints proposed for use meet the VOC regulations of the local Air pollution District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which the project is located. D. Field Samples 1. Provide field sample panel, 48 inches long by 48 inches wide, illustrating special coating color, and finish. 2. Locate where directed. 3. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. a B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F. for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F. for interiors; 50 degrees F. for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Synthetic Finishes: 65 degrees F. for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. 1.10 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide a one gallon container of each color to Owner at location designated. B. Label each container with color and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's label. 03879300 PAINTING 09900-2 01/01 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. ICI Paint Stores, Cleveland, OH. B. Kelly -Moore Paint Co., Inc., San Carlos, CA. C. PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, PA. D. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. a 2.2 MATERIALS A. Coatings 1. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 3. Compatible with existing coatings in renovation areas. B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified, of commercial quality. C. Stripping Agents: As recommended by manufacturer for finish to be removed. 2.3 FINISHES A. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish schedule. B. The schedule is based on the products of ICI Paint Stores and Kelly Moore Paint Co., Inc. as follows: No. Product Name (ICI Paint) Type 1. 1030 PVA Primer/ Sealer Latex 2. 1110 Ultra -Hide Stain Jammer Vinyl Toluene 3. 1310 Ultra -Hide Prime -n -Finish Alkyd 4. 1370 Spraymaster DTG Alkyd -Flat 5. 1402 Dulux Professional Wall & Trim Enamel Latex - Eggshell 6. 1406 Dulux Professional Wall & Trim Enamel Latex -Semi Gloss 7. 1434 Ultra -Wall Enamel Latex, Low Lustre 8. 1482 Spray Master Pro Uni-Grip WB Latex -Eggshell 9. 1516 Ultra -Hide Wall & Trim Enamel Alkyd, Semi -Gloss 10. 1582 Spray Master Dryfall Alkyd -Eggshell 1 1 . 1700 Woodpride Stain Alkyd - Oil 12. 1808 Woodpride - WB Interior Varnish Waterborne Clear Gloss 13. 1802 Woodpride Interior Varnish Aquacrylic-Satin 14. 1916 QD Sanding Sealer Vinyl Toluene 15. 2000 Decra-Shield exterior primer Acrylic -Latex 16. 2406 Decra-Shield Acrylic -Semi -Gloss 17. 2516 Ultra -Hide Durus Exterior Enamel Alkyd -Semi -Gloss 18. 3038 Ultra -Hide Durus Acrylic Gloss 19. 4000 Bloxfil Block Filler Acrylic 20. 4020 Devflex DTM Primer Acrylic 21. 4308 Devguard Industrial Enamel Alkyd -Gloss 22. 4160 Devguard Tank & Structural Primer Alkyd 23. 4206 Devflex Acrylic Waterborne Acrylic, Semi -Gloss 03879300 PAINTING 09900-3 01/01 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Moisture Content 1 . Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. a. Field test concrete in accordance with ASTM D4263. b. Test moisture content of wood in accordance with ASTM D2016. 2. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below following maximums: a. Gypsum Soffits: 12 percent. b. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Masonry, Unit Masonry: 12 percent. d. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. e. Exterior Located Wood: 12 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. f. Concrete Floors: 7 percent. g. Vertical Concrete Surfaces: 12 percent. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Unpainted Surfaces 1. General a. Prepare surface in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended procedures unless higher level of preparation is specified. b. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. C. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. d. Shellac and seal marks on wood surfaces which may bleed through surface finishes. 2. Impervious Surfaces a. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri -sodium phosphate and bleach. b. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 3. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces a. Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. b. Apply latex based compatible sealer or primer. 4. Insulated Coverings a. Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. 03879300 PAINTING 09900-4 01/01 "" No. Product Name (ICI Paint) Type 24. 4406 Tru -Glaze -WB Waterborne Epoxy Semi -Gloss 25. HF10 High Heat Coating Silicone, Flat 26. HT -12 High Heat Silicone Silicone, Flat No. Product Name (Kelly -Moore) Type 1. 70 Kel-Guard Synthetic Rubber C. Dry mill film thickness (DMFT) indicated is minimum acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Moisture Content 1 . Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. a. Field test concrete in accordance with ASTM D4263. b. Test moisture content of wood in accordance with ASTM D2016. 2. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below following maximums: a. Gypsum Soffits: 12 percent. b. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Masonry, Unit Masonry: 12 percent. d. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. e. Exterior Located Wood: 12 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. f. Concrete Floors: 7 percent. g. Vertical Concrete Surfaces: 12 percent. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Unpainted Surfaces 1. General a. Prepare surface in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended procedures unless higher level of preparation is specified. b. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. C. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. d. Shellac and seal marks on wood surfaces which may bleed through surface finishes. 2. Impervious Surfaces a. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri -sodium phosphate and bleach. b. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 3. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces a. Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. b. Apply latex based compatible sealer or primer. 4. Insulated Coverings a. Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. 03879300 PAINTING 09900-4 01/01 "" accc or One wit paint mann Octurer s recommen a eve o preparation. (2) Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. 11. Interior Wood a. Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. b. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. C. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. d. Fill open grain wood to receive opaque finish with wood filler. e. Fill nail and other anchor holes in wood to recieve transparent finish with filler stained to match finish. 12. Exterior Wood a. Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. b. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. C. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after prime coat has been applied. 13. Wood Doors a. Seal top and bottom edges with clear or opaque primer as required for finish scheduled. 03879300 PAINTING 09900-5 01/01 5. Concrete Floors a. Clean in accordance with ASTM D4258. b. Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. C. Verify required acid -alkali balance is achieved in accordance with ASTM D4262. d. Allow to dry. 6. Galvanized Surfaces a. Clean in accordance with ASTM D1730. b. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. C. Apply coat of etching primer. 7. Aluminum Surfaces a. Clean in accordance with ASTM D1730. b. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. C. Apply coat of etching primer. 8. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces r, a. Clean concrete in accordance with ASTM D4258. b. Clean unit masonry in accordance with ASTM D4261. C. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. d. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri -sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. e. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. f. Allow to dry. 9. Plaster Surfaces r a. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. b. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. " C. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. 10. Steel and Iron Surfaces a. Concealed Locations (1) Remove all grease, dirt, mill scale, rust and weld slag in accordance with SSPC - SP1 - Solvent Cleaning and/or SSPC - SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation. (2) Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. b. Exposed Locations (1) Remove all grease, dirt, mill scale, rust and weld slag in accordance with SSPC - SP1 - Solvent Cleaning and/or SSPC - SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning in _.wI d . h 4I d 1 I f accc or One wit paint mann Octurer s recommen a eve o preparation. (2) Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. 11. Interior Wood a. Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. b. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. C. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. d. Fill open grain wood to receive opaque finish with wood filler. e. Fill nail and other anchor holes in wood to recieve transparent finish with filler stained to match finish. 12. Exterior Wood a. Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. b. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. C. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after prime coat has been applied. 13. Wood Doors a. Seal top and bottom edges with clear or opaque primer as required for finish scheduled. 03879300 PAINTING 09900-5 01/01 B. Primed and Previously Painted Surfaces 1. All Surfaces a. Thoroughly clean of all grease, dirt, dust or other foreign matter. b. Remove blistering, cracking, flaking, peeling or other deteriorated coating. C. Roughen slick/glossy surfaces. — d. Repair damaged areas such as, but not limited to, nail holes, cracks, chips and spalls with suitable materials to match adjacent areas. e. Feather edges of chipped paint and sand smooth. f. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer. g. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. h. Clean surfaces with solvent. i. Prepare non-ferrous surfaces in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation. j. Chemically Strip surfaces bare to substrate where indicated on drawings. 2. New Shop Primed Steel Surfaces a. Where higher level of preparation is specified in this Section than in other Sections for unpainted steel, comply with requirements of this Section and following: (1) At Contractor's option, either shop or field prepare steel in accordance with procedures specified in this Section. - (2) If steel is shop prepared and primed in accordance with lesser requirements specified in other sections, it is considered a temporary protective coating only. (3) Remove temporary shop coatings and prepare steel in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation for unpainted surfaces. b. If steel is shop prepared and primed in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation, field prepare in accordance with paragraph "All Surfaces" above. C. Prime coat specified under paragraph 3.9, SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE, can be eliminated except for bare areas requiring touch-up. 3. Existing Steel Surfaces a. Prepare in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Paint, Stain and Varnish 1 . Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. 3. Apply each coat to uniform finish. 4. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. 5. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. 6. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. 7. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. 8. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint. 03879300 PAINTING 09900-6 01/01 9. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. 3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Referto Section 15391 for schedule of color coding and identification banding of equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit. B. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, occurring in finished areas except mechanical and electrical rooms. C. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally. D. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers and grilles to match face panels. r - E. Paint exposed conduit, boxes and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas except mechanical and electrical rooms. F. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. G. Color code equipment, plumbing piping, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows names and numbering. H. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing. I. Shop Primed Equipment 1. Remove louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. ., 2. Prepare and paint shop primed equipment as specified for base material and location. J. Shop Painted Equipment 1. Prepare and paint shop painted equipment as specified for base material and location as follows: a. Interior Finished Spaces (excluding mechanical and electrical rooms): Paint surfaces to match color of adjacent finish. This applies, but is not limited to, mechanical diffusers and electrical panels and covers. b. Exterior Equipment: Where noted on drawings, paint exposed mechanical and electrical equipment color as selected by Architect. 3.6 PROTECTION OF DISSIMILAR METALS AND METALS IN MASONRY AND CONCRETE A. Where specified in other sections, protect dissimilar metals that are in direct contact and metals set on or filled with mortar or concrete with one coat of coal tar paint equal to Carboline Bitumastic Super Service Black. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General 1. When requested by Architect, provide verification of coating application and durability in accordance with specified requirements at no cost to the Owner. B. Steel Surfaces 1. Dry Film Thickness: Verify in accordance with SSPC-PA 2 - Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages. 2. Adhesion: Confirm adhesion of coating system to substrate in accordance with either ASTM D3359 (Method B) or ASTM D4541. C. Concrete Floors 1. Verify compliance in accordance with ASTM D1546. 03879300 PAINTING 01/01 09900-7 D. Other Surfaces 1. Film Thickness a. Measure wet film thickness in accordance with ASTM D4414 and convert to dry film thickness by multiplying wet film thickness by percent soilds and by percent solvent added. —' b. Measure dry film thickness in accordance with ASTM D4138. E. Scrubbability 1. Test interior flat latex paints in accordance with ASTM D2486. F. Interior Latex Semigloss and Gloss Paints: Test in accordance with ASTM D4540. G. High -Performance Interior Architectural Wall Coatings: Test in accordance with ASTM D3730. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Repair surfaces which have been destructively checked for dry film thickness. B. Recoat surfaces determined not to be in conformance with dry film thicknesses specified. C. Recoat in accordance with coating manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.9 CLEANING A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. 3.10 SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE A. Exterior Surfaces Surface 1 st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) Aluminum 4020 (3.0) 2406 (2.0) 2406 (2.0) Ferrous Metals Gates, 4160 (2.0) 2516 2516 Fencing, Bollards, Bumper Guards, Railings, Exposed Lintels, Misc. Metal Muffler Exhausts Temp to 1000 Deg. HT -12 (1.0) HT -12 (1.0) Temp to 500 Deg. HT -10 (1.0) HT -10 (1.0) Doors, Frames 4160 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) and Equipment a Galvanized Metals 4160 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) Louvers, —" Ducts, Downspouts, 03879300 PAINTING 09900-8 01/01 Surface 1 st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) Misc. Wood 2000 (2.1) 2406(l.4) 2406 0.4) B. Interior Surfaces Concrete Concrete Walls 1030 Varies 1406(1.4) 1406 Concrete Floors 700.0) 70(1.0) Concrete Masonry (CMU) 3010 Varies 1402(l.4) 1402(l.4) Plaster Metal Decking Galvanized 1370 1582 1582 "^ Primed 1482 1482 Ferrous Metals Bar Joists 4160 (2.0) 1482 (2.0) 1482 (2.0) & Beams (Exposed) Doors and Frames, 4160(2.0) 4308 4308 Railings, Equipment Galvanized Metal Ducts, 4160 (2.0) 4308 4308 Louvers, r Piping, Vents Gypsum Drywall Surfaces to 11100.1) 11100.1) receive vinyl (if required) wall covering. All other 1030 0.1) 14020.5) 1402 0.5) e-+ spaces. Wood Drawer 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) & Cabinet Thin 50% Thin 25% Interiors Transp. Finish. Trim, Transp. 1802(l.0) 1802(l.0) Finish Thin 50% Thin 25% Trim, Transp. 1600 Varies 1802(l.0) 1802 0.0) Finish (Stained) Thin 50% Thin 25% 03879300 PAINTING 09900-9 01101 Surface 1 st Coat (DM FT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) Cabinets, Ext. 1600 Varies 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) & Interiors Thin 50% Thin 25% Transp. Finish (Stained) Cabinets, Ext. 1310(l.5) 1516 (1 .4) 1516(l.4) & Interiors Opaque Finish. Wood Doors Transp. Finish 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) Thin 50% Thin 50% Stained & Transp. Finish 1600 Varies 1802 0.0) 1802(l.0) Thin 50% Thin 50% 3.11 COLOR SELECTION SCHEDULE END OF SECTION 03879300 PAINTING 09900-10 01/01 r-+ r- SECTION 09915 COLOR AND FINISH SCHEDULE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Color Schedule 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 06400 - Custom Woodwork. B. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors. C. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings. D. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring and Base. E. Section 09680 - Carpet. F. Section 09900 - Painting. G. Section 10160 - Metal Toilet Compartments. 1.4 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 1.5 GENERAL A. This section covers only the color of the interior materials and products that are exposed to view in the finished construction. The word "color" as used herein includes surface color and pattern. Requirements for quality and method of installation are covered in other appropriate sections of the specifications. Specific locations where the various materials are required are shown on the drawings. Items not designated for color in this section may be specified in other sections. When color is not designated for items, the Contractor shall propose a color for approval. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REFERENCE TO MANUFACTURER'S COLOR A. Where color is shown as being specific to one manufacturer, an equivalent color by another manufacturer may be submitted for approval. Manufacturers and materials specified are not intended to limit the selection of equal colors from other manufacturers. 2.2 COLOR SCHEDULE A. The color schedule lists the colors, patterns and textures required for interior finishes, including both factory applied and field applied colors. 03879300 COLOR AND FINISH SCHEDULES 09915-1 01/01 2.3 INTERIOR FLOOR FINISHES Flooring materials shall be provided to match the colors listed below. F1 carpet F2 vinyl tile F3 terrazzo the F4 porcelain mosaic DalTile, Semi -gloss grout F5 carpet 2.4 INTERIOR BASE FINISHES Collins & Aikman, Kiva 27021 Bonito Armstrong, Standard Excelon 51858 Sandrift White Fritz Tile, 3000 Series GT3098 Royal Bronze DalTile, Keystone D147 Buffstone Range DalTile, Standard 368 French Gray J&J, Prestige 3345 Sapphire, Judge's Bench Base materials shall be provided to match the colors listed below. 61 4" resilient Roppe, 700 Series P191 Camel B2 wood Transparent finish (see below) 133 ceramic cove DalTile, Semi -gloss 1469 Galaxy 2.5 INTERIOR WALL FINISHES Interior wall color shall apply to the entire wall surface, including reveals, vertical furred spaces, grilles, diffusers, electrical and access panels, and piping and conduit adjacent to wall surfaces unless otherwise specified. Items not specified in other paragraphs shall be painted to match adjacent wall surface. Wall materials shall be provided to match the colors listed below. W1 paint, gwb Kelly Moore W2 paint, existing plaster match existing W3 ceramic tile (full height) DalTile, Matte ceramic accent DalTile, Semi -gloss grout DalTile, Designer W4 ceramic the (wainscott) DalTile, Matte trim cap DalTile, Semi -gloss grout W5 wood paneling (full height) W6 wood paneling (wainscot) 2.6 INTERIOR CEILING FINISHES KM555-L Wood Plank 0700 Mellow White 1469 Galaxy 96114 Classic Bone 0700 Mellow White 1469 Galaxy 96114 Classic Bone Transparent finish (see below) Transparent finish (see below) Ceiling colors shall apply to ceiling surfaces including soffits, furred down areas, grilles, diffusers, registers, and access panels. Ceiling color shall also apply to joist, and conduit and piping where joists and deck are exposed and required to be painted. Ceiling materials shall be provided to match the colors listed below. C1 2x4 acoustical C2 2x2 premium acoustical USG, Omni (SLT) white C3 paint Kelly Moore KM555-L Wood Plank C4 paint match existing 03879300 COLOR AND FINISH SCHEDULES 09915-2 01/01 2.7 INTERIOR MISCELLANEOUS Miscellaneous items shall be provided to match the colors listed below. P1 trim paint Kelly Moore KM554-L Jacobean P2 transparent satin stain to match; Nevamar WO -0002 Golden Highland Oak P3 Laminate - Countertop Nevamar AL -3-2T Dreamy Allusion 2.8 OTHER FINISHES toilet partition Knickerbocker 5222 Porcelain floor transition A Roppe P140 Fawn floor transition B Roppe P110 Brown h 2.9 FINISH SCHEDULE See attached Finish Schedule. { PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION Ahw 1.� 03879300 COLOR AND FINISH SCHEDULES 09915-3 01/01 k� k /\ . §\ ¢k . .,o g k% 02 $$� g \\/ C14. a R c oe� k 0§ % ®\f 2 E 2 2 t o E§ � EGc2E 0 § $t3»@ § m $o/@ k LL § =a Lx, 0,k _� 2-8om�3¥ g 7F32go x K 0 x kk�.EEECLE' x 0 22m Ea =z - - -� n■MECZ00f a 8 _ F e - m o �Zoo-CL:)M= su�)l < \ �§..0 LL itwwa¥aewc E EE 03 k x k§ CCL4xxa'EcLaaa' , �� E 2 E LLo R 7 C6 7 nn c J S 7xx =tt xx 7xxxxx9999xx Q EI EE � co co 2. � kx><0x0000gXL) Q �nn2-xk *x 'k��R¥f# ¥x cn X. Lx X. \\\kxx n k ¥ n w••xx.$XX 233- xx z,•x x �/ mm�nn2-xx %xx�¥��\� kG��xcom co mmGmmxm m kE k 0E��xEExx�x��x7 kE x k Q �u< aI 2E o�32�2 e D kk��< M3:z ¥ /� ESE��\�\3%�%� 2-i>-(� �SG Lu Sxx-1Ow LU o �=0>uwww0 wwwu� ua � > ci § Cgo-jG@Go00000- z - ---w.. I"I"m" I "am� � k /\ §\ ¢k �# .,o k% 02 $$� g \\/ � �0� R c oe� k 0§ % ®\f 2 E 2 2 t o E§ � EGc2E 0 § $t3»@ § m $o/@ k LL § =a Lx, 0,k _� 2-8om�3¥ g 7F32go % K 0 �2�«722) 0LLWeco6 k 0 22m Ea =z - - -� n■MECZ00f a 8 _ F e - m o �Zoo-CL:)M= su�)l < \ LU itwwa¥aewc SECTION 10050 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Foot Rail System 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish carpentry 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS x,{ A. Conform to Uniform Building Code and NFPA 101 for combustibility and smoke development requirements for materials as follows: 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. B. Comply with requirements of American with Disabilities Act ( Public Law 101-336 ). ' 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations. B. Manufacturer's Certificate 1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Submit manufacturer's specifications, shop drawings and installation instructions. D. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect products and materials from physical damage and from becoming wet or soiled. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Foot Rail System 1 . Furnish and install in Courtrooms where shown on the drawings in courtroom jury boxes, foot rails equal to Model Number 904-1S as manufactured by Lawrence Metal Products, Inc., Bay Shore, NY, telephone 1-800-441-0019. Floor brackets for 2" diameter rail shall be satin finish chrome, model number 904 - Bracket spacing shall not exceed 42" O.C. Provide bracket at any rail splice. Rails to be 2" diameter satin finished stainless steel rail model number 020-3S. See drawings for lengths required. 03879300 01/01 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10050-1 Domed end caps for 2" diameter rails shall be satin finish chrome. Model number 010-R- 1 S. Provide end caps at all ends. Provide all fasteners necessary for the system. B. Cast Seals Southwell Company, San Antonio, Texas C. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive product. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install all specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Use concealed fasteners. END OF SECTION 03879300 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10050-2 01/01 SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS a PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal surfaced markerboards B. Tackboards C. Trim, marker rail and accessories. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Supporting construction fornd markerboards. B. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Substrate construction behind markerboard. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. B. ANSI/ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. C. APA - American Plywood Association. D. ASTM A424 - Steel Sheets for Porcelain Enameling. E. ASTM B209 - Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. F. ASTM C208 - Insulation Board (Cellulose Fiber) Structural and Decorative. G. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. H. FS LLL -B-810 - Building Board, (Hardboard) Hard Pressed, Vegetable Fiber. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for flame spead/smoke development ratings of for markerboards and tackboards in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.6 SUBMITTALS ra A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1 . Indicate on shop drawings, wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations special anchor details. 2. Provide product data on markerboards, tackboards, trim and accessories. Include ` maintenance information on regular cleaning and stain removal. 3. Submit samples illustrating materials and finish, color, and texture of markerboard trim and tackboard surfacing. r-+ 4. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide life time warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage of markerboard surface from discoloration due to cleaning, crazing, cracking or staining. 03879300 01/01 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc. B. Greensteel Division C. Best -Rite. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A424, Type I, 24 gage commercial quality. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ANSI/ASTM B221, 6061 T-5 alloy. C. Cork: Fine grain natural cork, homogeneous composition. D. Hardboard: FS LLL -B-810; tempered, smooth face. E. Foil Backing: Aluminum foil sheet .002 inch thick. F. Adhesives: Type recommended by manufacturer. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Map Supports: Formed aluminum hooks 8 at each markerboard, sliding type to fit map rail. B. Provide 10 assorted markers and 2 erasers for each markerboard. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Markerboard 1. Trim: 5/8 inch wide x 0.062 inch thick extruded aluminum. 2. Chalktray: 2 5/8 inch deep extruded aluminum, with rounded and smooth polished ends; thru-bolted to writing surface. One piece, full length of markerboard; concealed fasteners. 3. Writing Surface: 24 steel with baked -on porcelain enamel surface. 4. Backing: 3/8 inch thick particle board with 0.002 inch thick foil backing. 5. Size and Configuration: As indicated on drawings. 6. Map Rail: Extruded aluminum with integral cork insert. 7. Acceptable Product: Claridge Series 4. 2.5 FINISHES A. Marker Surface: White porcelain. B. Aluminum Frame and Accessories: Clear anodized aluminum, satin finish. _. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces and internal wall blocking are ready to receive work, and opening dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate construction. 03879300 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100-2 01/01 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install markerboards and tackboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure units level and plumb. C. Butt markerboard panels to tackboards tight with concealed spline to hairline joint. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean markerboard surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Cover markerboard and tackboard surfaces with protective cover, taped to frame. C. Remove protective cover at Date of Substantial Completion. r+. END OF SECTION !"e!S 03879300 01/01 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100-3 SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES µ, A. Metal toilet compartments, and urinal. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Framing and Sheathing: Concealed wood framing and blocking for :.. compartment support. B. Section 09915 - Color and Finish Schedule. C. Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM A424 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling. B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. C. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. D. FS A -A-60003 - Partitions, Toilet, Complete. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall and floor supports, and door swings. C. Product Data: Submit data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01311 - Project Coordination. B. Coordinate Work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS m A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1 . Accurate Partitions Corp. r- 2. Flush Metal Partition Corp. 3. Global Steel Products 4. The Mills Co. 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 03879300 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10160-1 01/01 B. Product Description: Floor mounted and overhead braced. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G902275 zinc coating. B. Steel Sheet [for Porcelain Enameling]: ASTM A424, Type I, commercial quality. —" C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304. D. Toilet Compartments: Baked enameled steel, floor -mounted head rail -braced. E. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bonded to sound deadening core, —> formed and closed edges, mitered and welded corners ground smooth. 1. Panel and Door Faces: 20 gage. 2. Pilaster Faces: 18 gage. 3. Reinforcement: 12 gage. 4. Internal Reinforcement: Furnish in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark locations of reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories. F. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Door Width: 24 inch. 3. Accessible Door Width: 36 inch. 4. Height: 58 inch. G. Pilasters: 1-1 /4 inch (32 mm) thick, of sizes required to suit compartment width and spacing. H. Urinal screens: Wall mounted with two panel brackets. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed chromed steel with satin finish, concealing floor fastenings. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. B. Head Rails: Hollow chrome -plated steel tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size, with anti -grip profile and cast socket wall brackets. C. Brackets: Satin chrome -plated non-ferrous cast metal. D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. 1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through -bolts and nuts; tamper proof. E. Hardware: Satin Stainless steel: 1 . Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two for each door. 2. Nylon bearings. 3. Thumb turn door latch. 4. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 5. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one for each compartment, mounted on door. 6. Furnish additional door pull for outswinging doors. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Baked Enamel Steel Compartments: Clean, degrease, and neutralize. Follow immediately with phosphatizing treatment, prime coat and two finish coats baked enamel. B. Color: Refer Section 09915 Color and Finish Schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. 03879300 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10160-2 01/01 µ, m D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. E. Verify location relative to the Texas Accessibility Standards for stall width and depth. k. - 3.2 INSTALLATION A-* A. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. B. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. C. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. D. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged enamel finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Indicated Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch (5 mm). C. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opened position when unlatched. Return out swinging doors to closed position. D. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. 03879300 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 01/01 10160-3 A. Shop Drawings 1. Provide plans indicating locations for corner guards. Indicate attachment details and recommended spacing for all components. Incorporate schedule indicating locations for different size wallguards located on the same wall. B. Product Data 1. Indicate physical dimensions, system features, wall mounting brackets with mounting ^, measurements, anchorage details, and rough -in measurements. C. Installation Instructions 1 . Indicate installation rough -in measurements and instructions. D. Certificate 1 Certify that products meet or exceed flame spread rating of 25 and smoke development of 450 in accordance with ASTM E84 for surface finish. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate work with wall or partition Sections for installation of concealed blocking or anchor devices. 03879300 WALL GUARDS, HANDRAILS AND CORNER GUARDS 10260-1 01/01 SECTION 10260 WALL GUARDS, HANDRAILS AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Corner guards. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: In -wall supports. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Wall construction. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Corner guards to resist lateral impact force of 100 lbs at any point without permanent damage. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Provide plans indicating locations for corner guards. Indicate attachment details and recommended spacing for all components. Incorporate schedule indicating locations for different size wallguards located on the same wall. B. Product Data 1. Indicate physical dimensions, system features, wall mounting brackets with mounting ^, measurements, anchorage details, and rough -in measurements. C. Installation Instructions 1 . Indicate installation rough -in measurements and instructions. D. Certificate 1 Certify that products meet or exceed flame spread rating of 25 and smoke development of 450 in accordance with ASTM E84 for surface finish. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate work with wall or partition Sections for installation of concealed blocking or anchor devices. 03879300 WALL GUARDS, HANDRAILS AND CORNER GUARDS 10260-1 01/01 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Construction Specialties, Inc.; Muncy, PA. B. Institution Product Corp.; Muskego, WI. C. Pawling Corporation; Wassaic, NY. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Corner Guard 1 . Cover: Molded vinyl/acrylic, .078 inch thick, 3 inch wide with 1/4 inch corner radius. 2. Cover Retainer: .063 inch thick continuous extruded aluminum. 3. End Caps: Molded, high -impact type, color to match corner guard. 4. Finish: All exposed vinyl/acrylic to have matte finish pebble grain texture, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. 5. Acceptable Product: Construction Specialties model SM -20. B. Accessories 1. Mounting Brackets and Attachment Hardware: Appropriate to component and substrate. 2. Vinyl Cove Base Support: Manufacturer's standard rigid aluminum. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams. B. Predrill holes for attachment. C. Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that rough -in for components are correctly sized and located. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in position. B. Position corner guard flush with finished floor, extend to ceiling. _ END OF SECTION 03879300 WALL GUARDS, HANDRAILS AND CORNER GUARDS 10260-2 01/01 SECTION 10800 r� b TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet accessories. B. Attachment hardware. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: In wall blocking and framing for support of accessories. B. Section 09300 - Ceramic Tile: Wall finish. C. Section 10160 - Metal Toilet Compartments: Supporting construction. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements 1 . Conform to 36 CFR Part 1 190 and the Texas Accessibility Standards for location and mounting height of accessories. 1.5 REFERENCES A. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board - 36 CFR Part 1191, Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. ANSI/ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips. C. ASTM _Al67 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. D. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. E. ANSI/ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. F. ANSI/ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. G. ANSI/ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. H. ASTM A500 - Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. I. ANSI/BHMA All 56.16 - Auxiliary Hardware. J. FS CID A -A-2380 Dispenser, Paper Towel. K. FS DD -M-00411 Mirrors, Glass. L. FS WW -H-191 1 Holder, Toilet Paper (Single Roll). M. NHLA - Rules for the Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress. N. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Install grab bars in conformance with structural strength requirements of 36 CFR 1 191 and the Texas Accessibility Standards without damage to supporting structure or finishes. 03879300 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800-1 01/01 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1 . Provide schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes and installation locatioon by room for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and attachment methods. 3. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. 1.8 KEYING A. Supply 6 keys for each accessory to Owner. B. Master key all accessories. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; North Hollywood, CA. B. Bradley Corporation; Menomonee Falls, WI. C. McKinney/Parker; Scranton, PA. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ANSUASTM A366. B. Exposed Sheet Steel: ASTM A525. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304. D. Tubing: ASTM A500, stainless steel. E. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 1 - Clear; Quality q1 mirror select; 1/4 inch thick minimum. F. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamperproof. G. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. H. Hardwood: Red oak, first grade in conformance with NHLA. I. Primer: Zinc Chromate. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Grab Bar 1. Conformance: FS WW -P-541/813 (Am.1), Type IV, Class 2, Form and length as indicated in schedule at end of this Section. 2. Acceptable products a. Form a: Bradley #8120-00 length as indicated on drawings. B. Combination Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle (PTDWR) 1. Conformance a. Paper Towel Dispenser: CID A -A-2380, Type III. b. Waste Receptacle: FS WW -P -541/8B (Am. 1), Type II, Style R (semi -recessed), open top, stainless steel removable type. 03879300 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800-2 01/01 ,� x 03879300 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800-3 01/01 2. Capacity. a. Paper Towel Dispenser: 350 C -fold or 400 multi -fold towels. b. Waste Receptacle: Minimum 1.6 cubic foot. 3. Size: Complete unit approximately 14 -inches wide, 4 -inches deep and 56 inches tall. sem+ 4. Acceptable product: Bradley #2252. C. Paper Towel Dispenser (PTD) 1. Conformance: CID A -A-2380, Type III. 2. Capacity: 200 C -fold or 350 multi -fold towels. 3. Size: Approximately 1 1 -inches wide, 4 -inches deep and 8 -inches tall. 4. Acceptable product: Bradley #252. D. Sanitary Napkin/Tampon Dispenser (SND) 1 . Conformance: FS WW -P-541/8, Type 11, Style S (surface mounted), stainless steel, disposable liner type. 2. Size: Approximately 12 -inches wide, 6 -1/2 -inches deep and 26 -inches tall. 3. Where wall thickness is not sufficient for full flush installation, provide matching collar to permit semi -recessed installation with minimal protrusion from the wall. 4. Acceptable product: Bradley #426. E. Sanitary Napkin and Tampon Disposer (SND) r 1. Conformance: FS WW -P-541/8, Type 1, Style P (partition mounted), stainless steel, disposable liner type. 2. Size: Approximately 10 -3/4 -inches wide, 4 -inches deep and 1 5 -1 /8 -inches tall. �. a. Partition Mounted: Approximately 10-3/4" wide, '/2 " to 1-1 /4" deep and 17-1/8" tall. 3. Acceptable product: Bradley#4721-15. F. Toilet Tissue Dispenser (TTD) 1. Conformance: FS WW -D-1 908A, Type II, stainless steel, surface mounted -single roll. F, 2. Size: Approximately 7-3/4" wide x 3-5/8" deep x 2" tall (theft resistant spindle). 3. Acceptable product: a. Surface mounted single roll theft resistant spindle: Bradley #5084-52. G. Soap Dispenser (SD) 1. Type: Vertical stainless steel tank, liquid type. `.. 2. Size: Approximately 5 -inches wide, 3 -inches deep and 8 -inches tall. 3. Acceptable Product: Bradley #6562. H. Mirrors (M) 1. Conformance: FS DD -M-411 C, Class 2, Style E, Grade 2. 2. Size: 18" x 48". 3. Acceptable product: Bradley #700 series. ^, 2.4 FABRICATION A. General 1. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. 2. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. 3. Form surfaces flat without distortion, scratches or dents. 4. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent "" electrolysis. 5. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. 6. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 7. Fabricate all accessories with concealed mountings covered by finished snap -on or set screw type escutcheons or mountings concealed behind units with doors unless otherwise specified. S. Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices. 9. Provide manufacturer's standard keyed lock in all accessories having doors. 10. Provide continuous type hinge on all accessories having doors. x 03879300 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800-3 01/01 B. Grab Bar (GB) 1. Fabricate from 1-1/2 inch OD seamless stainless steel tubing with 1 1/2 inch clear projection between wall and bar. 2. Provide integral mounting flange with screw mounting holes concealed on lip of flange and designed to support grab bar in compliance with specified performance requirements. 3. Provide one piece flange covers fabricated to fit over wall anchors and fixed by means of not less than three set screws. 4. Fabricate bends in conformance with 36 CFR Part 1 191. 5. Stainless Steel: Either 302 or 304 L, 16 gauge (.064") minimum for 1 Y<" for 1 Yz" O.D. bars and 18 gauge (.050") minimum for 1 " O.D. bars. 6. Finish: Satin finish. In addition, provide manufacturer's standard non -slip surface, either knurled or peened, over gripping surface of bars. 7. Attachment: concealed. 8. Construction: Provide one piece construction with ends returned to wall with integral intermediate supports as required. All joints shall be heliarc welded, ground and polished on exposed surfaces, finished to present uniform matching appearance throughout. 9. Anchors: Provide sub -anchors as required at each support, size and type as recommended by the manufacturer for each type of wall and finish condition. Support on drywall or plaster bases solely by means of toggle bolts is prohibited. C. Combination Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle (PTDWR) 1. Fabricate as single framed unit containing upper paper towel dispenser and lower waste receptacle compartment with each concealed behind lockable door. 2. Fabricate cabinet and frame of not less than 0.0312 -inch stainless steel with 1 inch frame face and 1/4 inch return to wall. 3. Fabricate doors of not less than 0.0500 inch stainless steel. D. Mirrors 1. Fabricate with 18 gauge stainless steel angle frame with seamless square mitered corners, welded and ground smooth. 2. Provide 20 gauge galvanized steel back and 18 gauge cold rolled steel hangar, all welded construction. E. Sanitary Napkin and Tampon Disposer (SND) 1. Fabricate body and lid from not less than 0.0312 -inch stainless steel and back from not less than 0.0250 -inch stainless steel. 2. Fabricate lid with integral slope to front and integral handle. 3. Fabricate with bottom service door equipped with tumbler lock. F. Soap Dispenser (SD) 1 . Fabricate from not less than 0.0375 -inch stainless steel. 2. Fabricate with clear non -breakable plastic fill level indicator and key type fill cover. 3. Valve: All purpose liquid type, chrome plated brass valve body and stainless steel valve mechanism with integral check valve. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. Galvanizing: ANSI/ASTM Al 23, A386 to 1.25 oz/sq. yd. B. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. C. Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy electrostatic baked enamel. D. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ANSI/ASTM B456, Type SC 2 satin polished finish. E. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster. 03879300 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800-4 01/01 PART 3 EXECUTION ;. 3.1 EXAMINATION .-. A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site at appropriate time for building -in. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required. C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Install grab bars in conformance with performance requirements specified. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Building 'A' Accessories Required ROOM OR SPACE SD GB MG PTDWR SND SMLD TP TTD PTD MM �^^ Toilet 115 1 1 1 1 1 Restroom 127 1 2 2 1 1 2 Shower 129 1 .� Shower 130 1 Restroom 142 1 2 2 1 3 1 3 Shower 143 1 Shower 144 1 Lunchroom 164 1 M. Restroom 168 1 1 1 1 W. Restroom 169 1 1 1 1 2 r* B. Building 'B' W. Employee Restroom 116 1 1 1 1 2 M. Employee Restroom 117 1 1 1 1 M. Public Restroom 118 1 W. Public Restroom 119 1 Mechanical 120 1 r-• C. Building 'C' Customs' Secondary Garita - Men 105 1 1 1 Women 106 1 1 1 1 03879300 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800-5 01/01 D. Building 'D' Accessories Required ROOM OR SPACE SD GB MG PTDWR SND SMLD TP TTD PTD MM M. Toilet 105 1 2 1 1 1 1 W. Toilet 106 1 1 1 1 1 1 Breakroom 107 1 Mechanical 1 E. Toilet Rooms Each to have: 1 Mirror 18" x 36" 1 Paper Towel Dispenser 1 Toilet Tissue Dispenser F. Toilet Rooms Each to have: 1 Mirror 18" x 36" 1 Paper Towel Dispenser 1 Toilet Tissue Dispenser 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 42" long 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 36" long G. Rooms Each to have: 1 Paper Towel Dispenser H. Janitor's Rooms Each to have: 1 Janitor Shelf I. Men's Toilet Rooms Each to have: 1 Mirror 18" x 36" 1 Paper Towel Dispenser 1 Toilet Tissue Dispenser 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 42" long 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 36" long J. Women's Toilet Rooms Each to have: 2 Mirror 18" x 36" 1 Paper Towel Dispenser 2 Toilet Tissue Dispenser 2 Sanitary Napkin Waste Receptacles 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 42" long 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 36" long 03879300 01/01 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800-6 END OF SECTION r 03879300 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800-7 01/01 K. Dressing Rooms Each to have: 1 Mirror 18" x 36" 1 Towel Bar 1 Shower Rod 1 Shower Curtain 1 Grab Bar, Form b or c, 36" long, each side 2 Double Garment Hooks L. Shower Rooms t'^ Each to have: 1 Toilet Tissue Dispenser 1 Towel Bar 1 Shower Seat 1 Shower Rod 1 Shower Curtain 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 24" long 1 Grab Bar, Form b or c, 36" long each side 2 Double Garment Hooks END OF SECTION r 03879300 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800-7 01/01 SECTION 12700 COURTROOM WOOD BENCH SEATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood bench seating units (pews) 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish carpentry 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Uniform Building Code andNFPA 101 for combustibility and smoke development requirements for materials as follows: 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. B. Comply with requirements of American with Disabilities Act ( Public Law 101-336 ). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations. B. Manufacturer's Certificate 1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Submit manufacturer's specifications, shop drawings and installation instructions. D. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect products and materials from physical damage and from becoming wet or soiled. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. L. L. Sams and Sons, Waco, Texas. Telephone 1-800-537-4723 B. Imperial Woodwork, Waco, Texas. Telephone 1-800-234-6624. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Furnish and install in Courtrooms where shown on the drawings wood bench seating equal to that manufactured by L. L. Sam and Sons. e, 03879300 COURTROOM WOOD BENCH SEATING 12700-1 ,�., 01/01 B. Seating to be Model 77NS, 3 -ply backs and 5 -ply seats with solid back cap rail and seat nosing. Provide body splice as required by building access. Body splice shall use concealed division thick fasteners to provide smooth uninterrupted surface. Provide 2" thick concealed division with intermediate support. Maximum spacing at intermediate supports shall not exceed 6'-0". Intermediate supports shall have concealed spacing. Seat height shall be 17" minimum. C. Ends where shown shall be Model 808, 2 1/4" thick minimum 3 -ply construction, with concealed anchorage. D. Material shall be exposed wood, veneer and solid shall be best quality Appalachian Red Oak air seasoned and kiln dried, free of knots, worm holes, wood shakes, weather stain, honeycomb, or any other blemishes or imperfections. E. Glue to be Polyvinyl type. F. Core Material to be equal to Nylwood Fibercore, minimum density of 45 pounds. G. Cross Banding shall be equal to Crezon B-185 by Crown Zellerback Company, Portland, Oregon. H. Standard Finish shall be oil penetrating stain to match Architect's sample, with filler if required. Finish must be Miniwax #2716 Dark Walnut - No Substitutions. I. Sanding Sealer to be 21 % solids, sprayed on. Sanded with 6/0 sandpaper, dusted with soft rags and air between coats. J. Lacquer to be 32% solids, heated and under pressure. Additional coats to obtain fine finish. NOTE: Refer to the drawings for locations and dimensions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive product. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install benches in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Use concealed fasteners. END OF SECTION 03879300 COURTROOM WOOD BENCH SEATING 12700-2 01/01 -- SECTION 14240 s**, HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. -* 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES ` A. Hydraulic elevator systems. B. Passenger cabs with doors and frames; hoistway entrance doors and frames. C. Excavating and backfilling for plunger casing and machine room piping. D. Motor and pump, controllers, hoistway equipment and accessories. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02220 - Excavation, Backfilling & Compacting r-+ B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete - elevator pit C. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry - masonry hoistway enclosure. D. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications - pit ladder, divider beams r, E. Section 07130 - Sheet Waterproofing - water proofing elevator pit F. Section 15000 - Mechanical - hydaulic piping G. Section 16000 - Electrical - electrical service, wiring 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASME A17.1 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators B. UL 10B (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. C. TAS (Texas Accessibility Standards, April 1994) 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer shall have a service office and full time service personnel located in Lubbock, Texas. B. Service office shall have been functioning with full time personnel for a minimum of 5 years prior to bid date of project C. Installer shall be licensed or approved by manufacturer who has completed elevator installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. In addition to local governing regulations, comply with the applicable provisions of the following: 1. ASME A17.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators," referred to as the "Code." 03879300 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-1 01/01 H 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Electrical wiring and control diagrams b. Drawings detailing any additional structural supports required but not shown on drawings. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgment that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Manufacturer's full line of color and finish options for selection by Architect/Engineer d. Inspection and permit documentation. 3. Certifications: a. Certification of manufacturer's service facilities. b. Installer qualifications C. Maintenance Data: Provide written information necessary for proper maintenance and adjustment of the equipment prior to final acceptance as follows: 1. Straight line wiring diagrams of as -installed elevator circuits with index of location and function of all components. Leave one set in machine rooms. Provide 2 corrected sets for Owner's file 90 days after acceptance. 2. Lubricating instructions and recommended lubricant grade. 3. Parts catalogs and maintenance manuals. 4. Include any special tools, pass words or manuals that are required for maintenance, trouble shooting, adjustments or performing safety tests of the elevators for the Owner's use. 5. If the Contractor requires the Owner to sign a lease for the special trouble shooting tool, a copy of the lease shall be submitted with the bid. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The elevator warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights under provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Standard Elevator Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within the specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. 2. General Contractor is not to sign Final Acceptance until Owner/Architect have verified compliance with state inspection of elevator. 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees, of the elevator installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 03879300 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-2 01/01 2. Include 24 -hour -per -day, 7 -day -per -week emergency callback service. a. Response Time: 2 hours or less. �* B. Continuing Maintenance Service: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State service, obligations, ,,.., conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal option. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. hydraulic passenger elevator: a. Otis Elevator Co. b. Thyssen Dover Elevator Corp. C. Schindler Elevator Corp. d. Kone 2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Passenger Elevators: 1. Capacity (LBS): 2500 2. Speed (FPM): 100 3. Travel (FT): Refer to project drawings 4. Floors Served: Two 5. Stops: Two 6. Openings: Two 7. Opening Size: 3'-6" wide by 7'-0" tall 8. Clear Inside Floor Dimension: 51 " x 80" B. Smoke Containment System: 1. Sealeze elevator smoke seal; Richmond, VA. 2. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.3 OPERATING SYSTEMS A. Power Supply: 208 V, 3 PH, 60 Hz B. Lighting Supply: 120 V, 15 Amp, 60 Hz. C. Provide manufacturer's standard microporcessor operation system, with independent service. D. Provide "Selective -Collective Automatic Operation" as defined in ASME A17.1 2.4 CAR ENCLOSURE A. Basic Construction 1. Car Front: All stainless steel front. 2. Canopy: a. Car top: Manufacturer standard baked enamel black color. b. Lighting: Low voltage downlight or halogen. C. Ceiling: Suspended stainless steel 3. Car Panels: a. Stainless steel b. Vertical 03879300 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-3 01/01 C. 90.5" height d. protective pad hooks: stainless steel 4. Car Platform: a. All steel construction with welded frame reinforced as necessary. b. Cover floor area with minimum 3/4" fire treated plywood. C. Fasten securely to frame and reinforcing members. d. Mount Platform on auxiliary steel frame fastened to car frame. Isolate with rubber pads. 5. Handrail: _ a. Single stainless steel handrail at back of car. b. 1.5" OD maximum. B. Car Top Exit Panel: Provide switches on top emergency exit that will cause alarm to sound when cover is opened. C. Exhaust Blower: Two speed D. Duplex outlet: 110 V, AC E. Floor Covering: VCT _ F. Emergency Communication System: 1. Provided hands-free audio emergency two way communication device between car and 24 hour monitoring service. System shall meet the requirements of the Texas _ Accessibility Standards. G. Car Operating Panel: 1. Flush mounted at height in compliance with the Texas Accessibility Standards. 2. Finish: Stainless Steel 3. Illuminated buttons tamper resistant, with grade II Braille and raised number adjacent to illuminated bottons 4. Emergency stop switch with override at lobby control panel. 5. Key switches for lights and ventilation in locked service cabinet. 6. DOOR OPEN and DOOR CLOSE button. 7. Alarm button. H. Car Position Indicator: ^' 1. Illuminated -signal type or digital -display type located a minimum 72" centerline above finish floor at a location above door frame or above call buttons. 2. Include travel direction arrows and audible device if not provided in car control station. 2.5 HOISTWAY ENTRANCE A. Unit Frames: Welded or bolted minimum 14 ga. steel. B. Doors: Single speed single slide, flush construction, with sound deadening material. 1. Door panels: minimum 16 ga. stainless steel, welded joints 2. Reinforce doors for hangers. 3. Provided 1.5 hour UL Label. C. Sills: Extruded aluminum with slip resistant wearing surface D. Floor numbering: Paint on leading edge of door. E. Provide raised number/letter equivalent. F. Guards for projections and setbacks: 16 ga. steel. G. Hanger cover plates: 16 ga. steel; removable. H. Finish: stainless steel I. Car and hoistway Door Operator: 1. Electric, to operate car and hoistway doors simultaneously. 2. Door to open automatically as elevator is leveling and close either after expiration of time interval or when car button call is registered. 03879300 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-4 01/01 -- 3. Provide uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor -controlled infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall �- cause the doors to stop and reopen. 2.6 SIGNAL AND CONTROL FIXTURES A. Hall Push -Button Station: 1. Provide 1 hall push-button station at each landing for each elevator. 2. Units to have flat faceplate designed for mounting on wall with body of unit recessed in wall. 3. Finish: stainless steel, tamper resistant. B. Hall Lanterns/Position Indicators: 1. Provide units with illuminated arrows or digital type located vertically adjacent to jamb. 2. Finish: stainless steel, tamper resistant. 3. Locate lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance, at a minimum 72" centerline above finish floor. 4. With each lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. 2.7 HYDRAULIC CYLINDER A. Piping: 1. Provide size, type and weight piping recommended by manufacturer, and provide isolation couplings to prevent sound/vibration transmissions from power unit. B. Inserts: 1. Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of devices is specified in another Specification Section or shown on the drawings. C. Cylinder Casings: 1. Protective casings 2" larger than cylinders made from schedule 80 PVC pipe complying with ASTM D 1785, with bottoms of casings sealed with end caps complying with ASTM D 2467 and attached with solvent cement complying with ASTM D2564. D. Corrosion Protective Filler: 1. A solventless, petroleum-based compound specifically formulated for filling the space between hydraulic cylinders and casings. Filler is heavier than water, electrically nonconductive and has a pliable waxlike consistency, but becomes fluid when heated to 150 deg. F. a. Available products: subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are no limited to the following: 1) No -Ox -Id R -R #611 OA; Diversified Enterprises. 2) Union -Gard 160; Pasivid Standard Chemical Co. E. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785 1. Fittings for PVC Pipe: ASTM D2466 2. Solvent Cement for PVC Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2564. 03879300 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-5 A., 01/01 2.8 ELEVATOR CONTROLLER AND HYDRAULIC PUMPING UNIT A. Motor and Pump Assembly: 1. Mount motor and pump assembly on rubber isolated base. 2. Provide removable drip pan. 3. Control valve assembly shall be designed to reduce transmission of vibrations and noise to elevator car. 4. Metered bypass, check, relief, and manual lowering valves, and metered lowering and leveling devices. 5. Manual valve for lowering of car when power fails. B. Elevator Controller 1. Manual reset overload relay sized for motor 2. Solid state starter. 2.9 STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS A. Provide additional structural members if required in addition to those shown on Drawings. B. Provide rails sized to span between structural members indicated on Drawings or provide intermediate supports. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Pit Ladder: 1. Provide a pit ladder complying with ASME A17.1 and installed by elevator subcontractor. 2.11 EMERGENCY SERVICE A. Emergency Service Operation: 1. Provide Firefighter's Service to operate as follows: a. Firefighter's Service - Phase 1: The activation of a key switch at the designated level marked "ON", "OFF" and "BYPASS", or action of smoke detection system, shall return the car to designated level, by-passing all car and hall calls. The car shall park at designated level with the doors open for egress. The alternate refuge level shall be level 2. The car will not respond to car or hall calls unless the Phase II switch in the card is activated. The operation of this system shall be in conformance with the current ASME A17.1 Code, Section 211.3, Heat and smoke or products of combustion sensing devices are to be furnished by others with wiring into the elevator hoistways. The elevator contractor shall furnish wiring from smoke detector wiring in hoistway to elevator machine rooms. If an elevator is on independent service when elevators are recalled, a buzzer shall sound in the car and a jewel shall be illuminated as required by ASME A17.1, Section 211.3, and the local Building Code. After a period of 15 to 60 seconds, elevator shall return to the designated floor. b. Firefighter's Service - Phase ll: In -car control of elevator during the emergency operation, by means of a key switch in the car, shall be provided. Operation shall be per ASME A17.1 Code, Section 211.3. The system shall be designed to interface with smoke sensors, including alternate level refuge feature. 03879300 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-6 01/01 2.12 EMERGENCY POWER A. Emergency Power Operation 1. Elevator contractor to include emergency power circuitry in elevator control system. Upon loss of normal power supply and transfer of emergency power, elevator will lower to designated landing, and return to normal operation. 2. Emergency power source provided by others. 3. Transfer requirements, including any additional or auxiliary contacts must be included in proposal and shop drawing submittal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine elevator area, with installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of elevator work. Examine hoistway, hoistway openings, pits, and machine room as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by the installer, listing dimensional discrepancies and conditions detrimental to the performance of elevator work. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. C. Excavation for Jack: 1. Drill excavation for elevator pit to accommodate installation of plunger -cylinder unit; comply with applicable requirements of Section 02220 Excavation, Backfilling & Compacting. a. Install standard -weight steel pipe well casing in well hole with waterproof seal at pit floor and with waterproof, high-pressure seal at bottom of casing. D. Install plunger cylinder in protective cylinder casing (second casing) installed with well casing. Fill void space between cylinder casings and cylinders with corrosion protective filler. 1. Align plunger cylinders and fill space between casings with fine sand. E. Welded Construction: 1. Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS. F. Coordination: 719 1. Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. G. Install piping above the floor, where possible. Where not possible, install underground »-, piping in Schedule 40 PVC pipe casing assembled with solvent cement fittings. H. Lubricate operating parts of system, including ropes, if any, as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Alignment: c•' 1. Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing. J. Leveling Tolerance: 1. 1/4", up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. K. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landings. Fill space under sills solidly with nonshrink nonmetallic grout. 03879300 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-7 01/01 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptable Testing 1. Upon nominal completion of elevator installation, and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by the "Code" and by governing regulations and agencies. B. Advise Owner, Architect and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators. 3.3 HANDICAP ACCESSIBILITY A. Elevator Accessibility 1. The elevator, and all components required for operation shall be in compliance with the Texas Accessibility Standards, and the American's with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines. END OF SECTION 03879300 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-8 01/01 PART 1 GENERAL SECTION 15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 1.1 SPECIAL NOTE A. The Architectural and Structural Plans and Specifications, including the supplements issued thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect, are a part of these specifications and the accompanying mechanical and " electrical plans, and shall be complied with in every respect. All the above is included herewith, will be issued separately or is on file at the Architect's office, and shall be .. examined by all bidders. Failure to comply shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation due to omission of drawings. B. Where the Supplementary General Conditions conflict with the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions shall govern. 1.2 CHECKING DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents. 1.3 GENERAL A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as 99074 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-1 01/01 a- to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these .W, standards. c B. All piping, conduit and ductwork for the mechanical and electrical trades shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless 7 otherwise specifically indicated or directed. C. Piping, ductwork, conduits and raceways may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in r- finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required. D. All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this requirement. E. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the ^•* Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while 99074 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-1 01/01 a- they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. F. The mechanical and electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. G. The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets – and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to — the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. H. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general —. plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. J. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. K. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. R L. Piping, ducts, and conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. M. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. N. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item 99074 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-2 01101 required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. 0. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M", "P" & "E" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is n assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. 1.4 DIMENSIONS A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. 1.5 INSPECTION OF SITE A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical and electrical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. 1.6 ELECTRICAL WIRING 7% A. All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of these .•� specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors. in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished r- by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. 1.7 MOTORS AND CONTROLS A. All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor under Division 16 shall furnish each motor with a starter and all controls of the types specified or required. 99074 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-3 01/01 N C. These starters shall be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits of the motors which they are to serve, shall be suitable for the motor current characteristics and shall provide thermal overload protection. All starters shall be standard of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. They further shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide overload protection in each phase wire. 1.8 PROGRESS OF WORK A. The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Architect or Owner. 1.9 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.10 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the Architect before proceeding. C. The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, plumbing brass, grilles, registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. E. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. F. The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. 1 .11 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL A. Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Architect, who will be the sole judge of equality. B. Within 30 days of being awarded the Contract for any section or sections of the work under this heading, the Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and every item and the submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details. If the material is not submitted within 30 days of the contract signing, the Contractor shall furnish the specified materials. 99074 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-4 01/01 r C. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material. 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Architect reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Review by the Architect and any action by the Architect in marking shop drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire contract documents. Contractor will be held responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. C. Shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under each section, properly indexed and certified that they have been checked by the Contractor. E. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. 1 .13 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the incompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question. 0. 1.14 PERMITS, FEES, ETC A. The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a permit from the local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including sewer, water, gas and electric services as applicable. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. The Contractor 99074 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-5 01/01 shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these specifications. 1.15 TESTING A. The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. 1 .16 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 1.17 TERMINOLOGY A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install", and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. F. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1 .18 COOPERATION AND CLEANING UP A. The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. B. At all times during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the premises clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris. The Contractor shall, on direction at any time from the Architect, clear any designated areas or area of materials and debris. On completion of any portion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving the premises free of all obstructions and hindrances. 99074 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-6 01/01 1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. All of this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations. Verify the scope of this work at the site and in cooperation with all other trades before bidding. B. No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting. C. The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. D. Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching required under the respective section with all trades. E. In all spaces where new work under Division 15 and 16 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade. F. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect. 99074 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-7 01/01 0 r- 1. 19 COORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between r� trades. For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage - 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details B. Items furnished under various sections which require plumbing connections shall be coordinated for services, pressure, size and location of connections, type of fuel, clearances for service, auxiliary devices required, etc. C. Items requiring insulation shall be fully insulated and that insulation shall be checked ,.... against manufacturer's directions and job requirements for suitability, coverage, thickness and finish. D. Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. �*+ E. All items specified under Divisions 15 and 16 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, - square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades. 1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. All of this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations. Verify the scope of this work at the site and in cooperation with all other trades before bidding. B. No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting. C. The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. D. Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching required under the respective section with all trades. E. In all spaces where new work under Division 15 and 16 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade. F. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect. 99074 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-7 01/01 0 1.21 PAINTING A. Painting for Divisions 15 and 16 shall be as follows: 1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and miscellaneous metal. 3. Paint all exposed sheet metal. 4. Paint all insulated surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment, etc. Surfaces until a smooth, non grainy surface is obtained. B. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal or insulation surface is visible. 1.22 SEALING A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors by packing fire resistant rope and fire resistant cement. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 1.23 LARGE APPARATUS A. Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. The wall and door of the Mechanical Room must be removed and re -installed to install the air unit. 1.24 PREPARED OPENINGS A. It is anticipated that an opening will be required in the existing Mechanical Room for installation of the large equipment. Cooperate with all trades to avoid a larger opening than is required. The openings shall be restored after installation of the equipment. 1.25 USE OF SYSTEMS A. It is considered that it will be necessary to operate the mechanical systems to provide heating and ventilation in portions of the building that are enclosed. As systems or portions of systems become operable, they shall be operated as required to maintain habitable conditions in enclosed portions of the building that are still under construction and portions that are fully complete as may be required to properly protect installed piping, equipment and finishes. B. In order to provide protection to ducts, plenums, etc. install temporary filters over or in return air openings until all finished painting is completed. Protect supply outlets, coils, etc. as necessary in each case. C. Except for operation of cooling equipment to prove its performance and to adjust and balance the systems, that equipment will not be operated for comfort of construction workers. D. During warm weather the Contractor shall arrange for the operation of systems to supply 100 percent outside air. The systems controls shall be reset to their normal cycle of operation in each case during the times that heating is required and when the cooling equipment is operated. 99074 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-8 01/01 r E. Immediately prior to the time that the systems are to be accepted by the Owner, each system shall be carefully examined and if ductwork is dirty, it shall be carefully cleaned by men skilled in that type of work. All filters shall be put in first class condition by replacement of filters and/or other procedures as directed. F. The use of the equipment for maintaining environmental and/or protective temperature conditions shall in no way constitute acceptance of that equipment and the connected piping, ducts, insulation, finishes, etc. by the Owner. Furthermore, it shall in no way shorten the guarantee period hereinafter specified. The Contractor shall either secure extended warranties from the vendors of equipment or shall purchase insurance to provide proper coverage on the equipment through the guarantee period and shall file with the Architect substantiating affidavits from equipment manufacturers or a copy of the insurance policy covering the equipment through the guarantee period. The personal underwriting of the Contractor for equipment manufacturers' warranties is not acceptable, but his personal underwriting of piping, ductwork, insulation and associated materials is acceptable subject to the provisions of the contract. G. The Contractor shall provide such labor as may be required in the operation of the systems and shall pay all costs. N 1.26 OWNERS OCCUPANCY A. It shall be understood that the building in which the work is to be done is a necessary part of the Owner's operation, and shall continue in use throughout the construction period without interruption. Take all precautions required by the Owner for the protection of his equipment and property. B. Contractor shall cooperate with the owner in scheduling areas in which work is permitted. Owners schedule will govern. 1.27 SCHEDULE OF WORK A. Under no condition shall any work be done in the present building that would interfere with its natural use during its normal hours of occupancy, unless special permission is granted by the Owner. This is particularly applicable where new connections are to be made to present lines or items of equipment in that building or where present equipment items in that building are to be relocated or modified in any way. The Contractor shall include this scheduling requirement in his proposal as no additional compensation for overtime work will be granted. 1.28 WORKING TIME A. Where new connections are to be made into existing lines, present lines must be relocated or rerouted, present equipment items relocated or other work accomplished that would affect the operation of the present building, the work shall be carried on at such times as to cause a minimum of interference with the normal operation of that building. In certain cases the work may be accomplished during normal working hours during certain designated seasons or times of the year. In other cases the work may have to be executed during times of the day outside of the normal working period, on holidays, etc. Each individual case presents a separate decision as to the time during which it shall be performed. The Contractor involved shall present each case to the Architect for his decision, which will be made after due consultation with the Owner. No additional compensation for overtime will be granted for compliance with these requirements. 99074 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-9 01/01 1.29 RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS A. There are portions of the existing plumbing system, heating, ventilating and air conditioning system and electrical System which shall remain in use to serve the finished building in conjunction with the indicated new installations. By`' actual examination at the site, each bidder shall determine those portions of the remaining present installations which must be relocated to avoid interferences with the installations of new work of his particular trade and that of all other trades. All such existing installations which interfere with new installations shall be relocated by the Contractor under the Division in which the existing material normally belongs, and in a manner as directed by the Architect. For example: 1 . Existing Plumbing piping, etc. shall be relocated under Division 15 where it interferes with the installation of new work. 2. Where existing piping, ductwork, etc. interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 15. 3. Where existing conduit and electrical equipment interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 16. B. Failure to become familiar with the extent of the relocation work involved shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility and shall not be used as a basis for additional compensation. 1.30 SALVAGE MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall remove existing equipment, piping, duct, grilles, conduit, wire, junction boxes, light fixtures and other items associated with the mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems where shown on the drawings. Where such items are exposed to view or uncovered by any cutting or removal of general construction and has no continuing function (as determined by the Architect), they shall be removed by the contractor under the section in which the item normally falls. B. Existing items (see above) where concealed in/above construction which is not disturbed, abandon in place. Plug, cap, disconnect or otherwise render harmless all such items. C. All items or materials removed from the project shall be made available for the Owner's inspection. The Owner retains the option to claim any item or material. Contractor shall deliver any claimed item or material in good condition to the place designated by the Owner. All item not claimed become the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the site. 1.31 SLEEVE DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall, before concrete is poured, prepare 1/8" scale floor plan drawings on tracing paper and shall show on these drawings, with dimension lines, the size and location of every pipe sleeve required for the passage of his lines. Prints shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to the setting of the pipe sleeves. 1.32 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. 99074 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-10 01/01 t B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information. 1.33 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT A. The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. B. Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect. C. Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or by the Owner, the Contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings. D. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor. 1.34 MARKING OF PIPE A. The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping systems. The identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. Markers shall be painted on using stencils. B. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Marker on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers. C. Size of Identification: Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering Letters (" Height) 3/4 to 1-1/4 1-1/2 to 2 % 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 1.35 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING: rs• A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. For 99074 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000- 11 01/01 r-� example, pumps will be identified as P-1, P-2, P-3, etc.; exhaust fans will be EF -1, EF -2, etc.; AC Units will be AC -1, AC -2, etc. B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3 -ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Boilers 2. Chillers 3. Pumps 4. AC Units 5. Convertors 6. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 7. Exhaust and Return Air Fans 8. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items 1.36 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. 1.37 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Architect will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. B. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1 . Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. 3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. 5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 8. Parts list for all items. 9. Name and address of each vendor. 1.38 GUARANTEE A. Unless a longer period is specified elsewhere, the contractor shall guarantee all workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. 1.39 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A. Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: 1 . Accurate "as built" drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed. 99074 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-12 01/01 r PW 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and Balance Report. 1.40 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINAL INSPECTION A. Before calling for the final inspection, the Contractor under each Division shall carefully inspect his work to be sure it is complete and according to plans and specifications. END OF SECTION Wft z 99074 01/01 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000- 13 SECTION 15300 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.4 INSPECTION A. All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. 1.5 PROTECTION DURING STORAGE A. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. r B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A74, Class SV Push On Gaskets for C.I. Soil Pipe ASTM C564 Caulked Joints for C.I. Soil Pipe Fed. Spec. HH -P-117, Type II No Hub Joints ASTM D3183 ®*+, Clay Tile Pipe and Fittings ASTM C700 Clay Tile Joints ASTM C425 Rubber Rings for A.C. Pipe ASTM D1869 99074 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300- 1 01/01 ABS Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM D2751 ABS Soil Joints — Elastomeric ASTM D2751 PVC Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3034, Type PSM Max. SDR = 35 PVC Soil Fittings — Elastomeric ASTM D3212 Copper Tubing ASTM B88 Wrought Copper Solder Fittings ANSI B16.22 Cast Bronze Solder Fittings ANSI 816.18 Steel Pipe ASTM Al 20, A53, Al 06 Butt Weld Fittings ANSI B16.9 Socket Weld Fittings ANSI 816.11 Steel Flanges ANSI B16.5 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI B16.3 Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Fed. Spec. WW -P-501 E Cast Iron Water Pipe ANSI A21.6 Cement Lining for C.I. Water Pipe ANSI A21.4 Cast Iron Water Pipe Fittings, Lined ANSI A21.10 and A21.10a Push -On Joints for C.I. Water Pipe ANSI A21.11 Mechanical Joints for Water Pipe ANSI A21.11 PVC Water Pipe ASTM D1584 Type 1 120 Push On Joints for PVC Water Pipe ASTM D1585, AWWA C900 Asbestos Cement Water Pipe AWWA C400 Class 150 AC Water Pipe Fittings ANSI A21.10, 150 Ib. AC Water Pipe Joints ASTM D1869 Flange Bolt, Sets ASME Pressure Piping C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Maloney. E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, ground joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. 2.2 VALVES A. General Service Valves: 3" and smaller, all bronze, screwed; 3-1/2" and larger, flanged, iron body, bronze trimmed, equal to the following Crane Nos: Type Fluid Pressure Fluid Pressure Below 125 PSIG Above 125 PSIG Gate 3" and smaller 428 424 Gate 3-1/2" and larger 465-1/2 7-1/2 E Globe 3" and smaller 1 14-1/2 P Globe 3-1/2" and larger 351 21E Angle 3" and smaller 2 16-1 /2 P Angle 3-1/2" and larger 353 23E 99074 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300-2 01/01 2.3 THERMOMETER WELLS A. Furnish and install brass or stainless steel closed separable thermometer wells for all thermometer and controller bulbs which are designated for liquid measurements. Whenever a thermometer or controller bulb is inserted in a pipe for either remote or local temperature indication or control, locate the thermometer well so that it will be completely surrounded by flowing fluid. Such thermometer locations as shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only -install thermometer wells for maximum effectiveness and in the case of locally indicating instruments, for easy readability. 2.4 COMBINATION PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE PORT A. Furnish and install where indicated "Pete's Plug" a 1/4" MPT fitting to receive either a temperature or pressure probe 1/8" OD. Fitting shall be solid brass with valve core of neoprene fitted with cap with gasket. Furnish an extended stem as required to extend through pipe insulation where installed in insulated lines. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for e specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of 99074 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300-3 01/01 B. Where valves have discs, select the discs for the intended service using materials as recommended by the valve manufacturer. Provide extended stems for valves in ` insulated line, so that the handle clears the insulation and jacket. C. Acceptable General Service Valve Manufacturers: Stockham, Jenkins, OIC, Walworth, Hammond. Butterfly Valves: Ductile iron body, flanged or with drilled and tapped lugs, SS Grade CFBM discs, stainless steel shafts with 316SS bushings, resilient EPDM seats and O -rings, "Bubble Tight" shut-off at 250 psi pressure. On valves 4" and smaller, handle shall be infinite position with memory stops. On valves 8" and larger, provide geared operators. Valves shall be equal to Demco NE -C-5122031. The following valves will be acceptable: Centerline Series LT, Crane 42-SSZ, Demco, Grinnell WD -8271, Keystone 122, Norris R-3011. D. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and O -rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Valve shall be three piece break away for in-line service. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Ring type two piece ball valves are not acceptable. Where valves are ^+ installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems to clear the insulation and jacket. E. Pipe Flexible Connections: Flexible connections shall be molded expansion joints as ' manufactured by Proco Series 240. Construction shall include neoprene cover and tube elastomer, retaining flanges and control rod plate. F. Water Pressure Gauges: Equal to Weksler No. BA14-1 with cast aluminum case; Weksler, Weiss, and Trerice acceptable. 2.3 THERMOMETER WELLS A. Furnish and install brass or stainless steel closed separable thermometer wells for all thermometer and controller bulbs which are designated for liquid measurements. Whenever a thermometer or controller bulb is inserted in a pipe for either remote or local temperature indication or control, locate the thermometer well so that it will be completely surrounded by flowing fluid. Such thermometer locations as shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only -install thermometer wells for maximum effectiveness and in the case of locally indicating instruments, for easy readability. 2.4 COMBINATION PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE PORT A. Furnish and install where indicated "Pete's Plug" a 1/4" MPT fitting to receive either a temperature or pressure probe 1/8" OD. Fitting shall be solid brass with valve core of neoprene fitted with cap with gasket. Furnish an extended stem as required to extend through pipe insulation where installed in insulated lines. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for e specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of 99074 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300-3 01/01 piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted. G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. 3.2 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS A. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for each application. No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder (95% tin, 5% antimony) or Silvabrite 100 solder (95.5% tin, 4% copper, .5% silver composition) for all copper tubing. Under no circumstances will solder with any lead content be permitted on the jobsite. B. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic are process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler _ material conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1/8" per pass. Remove all slag or flux remaining on any bead of welding before laying down the next successive bead of welding. Remove any cracks or blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of welding by chipping or grinding before depositing the next successive bead of welding. END OF SECTION 99074 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300-4 01/01 "a SECTION 15310 PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1 .1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all Vol equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories" A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: Except as otherwise specified or noted on the drawings, piping inside of, under and within 10'0" of the building or other structures shall be bell and spigot, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, each heavily coated at the factory with asphaltum or coal tar pitch and each having the manufacturer's mark or name and the date of manufacture cast on it. Type "L" copper in sizes up to 2" may be used where space is restricted. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used, unless otherwise prohibited. B. Sanitary Fixture Waste Arms: Fixtures served by sanitary soil waste and drain lines shall be connected using cast iron pipe and fittings, red brass pipe, Type L hard copper tubing with cast brass drainage fittings or lead. Use brass soldering nipples or ferrules as required. C. Sanitary Vent Lines: Vents in the sanitary system shall be service weight cast iron bell and spigot pipe and fittings for all lines 2" and larger and standard weight galvanized steel, Type L or heavier weight copper, red brass, or lead for lines smaller than 2" except that the same class of material shall be used throughout, insofar as practicable. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used, unless otherwise prohibited: D. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All water lines underground or under slabs on grade shall be of Type K hard drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Where connections are made between copper tubing and cast iron pipe, use adapters. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder -joint fittings. No lead solder will be permitted. E. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. F. Downspouts and Interior Storm Drain Lines: Bell and spigot, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, each heavily coated at the factory with asphaltum or coal tar pitch. Type "L" copper in sizes up to 2" may be used where space is restricted. C.I. 99074 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15310- 1 01/01 joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used, unless otherwise prohibited. G. Interior Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be provided at the bottom of each stack, at each change in direction, and in each horizontal run at intervals not exceeding 50 feet in all interior soil, waste, and drain lines. Where cleanouts occur in walls of finished areas, they shall be concealed behind chrome plated access covers, such as Wade W -8480-R or provided with other special plugs and covers as required to present a finished appearance. Floor cleanouts in unfinished areas shall be Wade W-6000 with threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule with cast iron plug and gasket and secured satin bronze scoriated top. Floor cleanouts in finished tile floors shall be Wade W -6000 -TS with square the top; in carpeted areas Wade W-6000-72 with carpet marker. All cleanouts shall be the same size as the line served up to 4" size and shall be 4" for all larger lines. H. Air Chambers: Air chambers of Type L copper, not less than 12" long and no smaller than the supply pipe, shall be provided and installed in each water supply to each and every fixture, outlet, item of equipment, etc. The length and/or the diameter of these air chambers shall be greater where required to eliminate water hammer. PDI shock absorbers may be used if sized in accordance with PDI recommendations. I. Vacuum Breakers: On each water supply line serving a plumbing fixture, item of equipment, or other device which has a water supply below the rim of the fixture, or which has a threaded or tubing spout, provide and install an approved vacuum breaker. These vacuum breakers shall be designed to prevent any possible backflow through them. Where these are installed in chrome plated lines, they shall be chrome plated to match. J. Automatic Air Vents: This Contractor shall furnish and install Crane No. 976 or 977 air vent valves at all high points for the hot water system, as shown and/or as required. Run a 3/4 inch type L hard copper drain line from the discharge of each air vent valve to a floor drain or as directed. 2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. The plate numbers on the drawings represent fixtures that will be acceptable on the job. Approved equal fixtures of Crane, American Standard, Eljer, and Kohler will be acceptable. B. All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass. This includes faucets, fittings, stops, risers, strainers, tailpieces, traps, waste, escutcheons, flush valves, brackets, vacuum breakers, goosenecks, hole covers, bolts, nuts and etc. C. All threaded supply fittings or outlets with tubing nozzles shall have back flow ^ preventers. D. All fixtures shall have wheelhandle stop valves. E. Generally all wall hung fixtures shall be provided with chair carriers so that no weight is supported from the wall. F. All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance. G. Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before rough -in. H. Where fixtures mate with irregular walls, the joint shall be grouted with dental plaster, G. E. Silicone or other grout as directed by the Architect. 1. The Contractor shall verify all rough in heights before installation and shall secure a current ruling on heights of handicapped fixtures before rough in to insure that they meet the requirements of the parties having jurisdiction. J. Refer to drawings. 99074 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15310-2 01/01 t 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ISOLATING VALVES A. The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have an isolating valve in each line serving the riser. These isolation valves shall be installed at an accessible location. Where these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or otherwise, provide access doors in the ceiling or chase. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, 001, the following specifications shall apply. 1. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1/4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. 2. Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not less than 10" above the roof. 3. Water Lines: Grade to established low points and provide valved drains to completely drain the system. 4. Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that there is no movement of flush valves, stops, etc. at fixture rough -ins. 3.3 TESTING A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases, insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. B. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Test for 6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be no leaks whatsoever. C. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested ., with water before the fixtures are installed. Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipes shall be tightly closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the section under test shall be tightly plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more than 1 " in 8 hours. D. Gas Lines: Test with 50 psig air pressure for 24 hours with no pressure drop (except for temperature correction). If any drop occurs, soap test all joints, correct leaks and retest. E .r END OF SECTION 99074 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15310-3 01/01 I"^ SECTION 15330 CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the chilled and heating water systems as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. B. Install chilled and heating water circulating piping complete and connect to coils, pumps, and other equipment. Include drain lines where shown or required. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". A. Chilled and Heating Water Lines: Type L copper assembled with solder joint fittings. B. Drain Lines: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe assembled with 150 pound malleable iron, banded pattern, screwed fittings or, at the Contractor's option may be type L hard copper assembled with wrought copper solder joint fittings. Do not mix the two materials. C. Automatic Air Vents: ASME labeled; equal to Crane No. 976. Crane and Sarco acceptable. D. Relief Valves: ASME labeled; equal to Bell and Gossett No. 250 having a relief setting of 125 pounds. Bell and Gossett, Taco or Thrush acceptable. Provide a relief valve in every closed water circulating system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS t .r A. Lay all water circulating lines on an even slope throughout to insure freedom from air locks and traps. Grade the system downward to the circulating pumps with valved drain connections from the low points to floor drains. Where additional low points are .-s - unavoidable, provide service drains to permit the complete drainage of the system. B. Provide automatic air vents at all high points of the system. Where horizontal mains change size, employ eccentric reducing couplings so installed as to keep the tops of coupled pipes on the same level. - C. Install drains from each pump base and from each air unit pan to the nearest floor drain in each case. Provide any other drain lines indicated on the drawings or required. WO 99074 CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS 15330-1 01/01 i D. Install manual valves where required to segregate individual items of equipment or sections of circulating systems or where indicated on the drawings or required. 3.2 CLEANING A. Chilled Water System: Fill the system with a solution consisting of either one pound of caustic soda or three pounds of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons of water. Eliminate all air and circulate this solution for 48 hours. Drain the system and thoroughly flush it with fresh water. Clean out all strainers. Refill the system with fresh water. B. Heating Water System: Same as chilled water system, except heat the solution. 3.3 TESTING A. Before insulating or concealing any lines, test all piping. Test all lines at 150% of the system working pressure or 100 psig whichever is greater, for not less than 4 hours with no leaks. END OF SECTION 99074 CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS 15330-2 01/01 SECTION 15390 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section applies to piping systems used to transport gases, liquids or semi -liquids. The term "piping systems", includes pipes, fittings, valves and pipe coverings located either inside or outside the buildings. This identification scheme does not apply to piping systems buried in the ground. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Occupational Safety and Health Standards - Part 1910.144. B. Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems - ANSI A 13.1 C. Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards - ANSI 253.1 1.5 METHOD OF IDENTIFICATION 'rte A. The primary identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. B. This identifying mark shall be supplemented by the use of a color code which will indicate the nature of the material carried in the system. Piping systems shall be placed, by the nature of their contents, in one of the basic groups listed below. Each group is assigned a predominant color range as noted. C. The entire exposed length of the piping system shall be painted by its proper color code to identify the system. Markers shall be painted on using stencils. Specialties shall be painted as specified for piping. D. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Markers on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and ducts and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers similarly color coded and sized. E. Size of Identification: .. 99074 01/01 1� MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION 15390- 1 Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering Letters (" Height) 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 3/4 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 8 to 10 2-1/2 Over 10 3-1/2 F. Colors: Exact colors shall conform to Owners Piping Identification Code. All numbers are PITTSBURGH: Piping Color Steam - 100 PSI Safety Yellow - 6-264 Steam - 40 PSI Safety Yellow - 6-264 Steam - 15 PSI Safety Yellow - 6-264 a Condensate - High Pressure Sunset Orange - 54-124 Condensate - Low Pressure Sunset Orange - 54-124 Condensate - Pump Return Sunset Orange - 54-124 Ducts - Supply and Return Safety Orange - 6-259 Hot and Chilled Water Supply & Return Spanish Blue - 1-346 Waste and Vent Flat Black - 54-198 Cold Water Vista Green - 6-256 Hot Water Rose Coral - 15P-27 Fire Lines & Gas (Nat.) Safety Red - 6-261 Air Lines Autumn Brown - 54-126 Equipment Pumps H & CH Water Seal Brown - 1-344 Converter Rose Coral - 15P-27 A.H. Unit, Generator Touch up as required H.W. Storage Tank Rose Coral - 15 P 27 Sump Pump, Water Pumps Safety Blue - 6-262 Controls Equipment Powder Blue - 4P-55 Copper Pipe Polish and lacquer Electrical Materials Grey 99074 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION 15390-2 01/01 ii Vacuum Lines Reef Brown - 95-6 (Color Guild) Gas (Natural) 1.6 IDENTIFICATION Safety Red - 6-261 A. The Contractor shall provide and install, on each valve and cock which he installs, a Seton P-250 tag with depressed, black filled numbers and letters identifying the service by letters and the number of the valve. Attach these to the handles of the valves and cocks using meter seals, approved brass S hooks, or heavy copper clad annealed iron wire. B. Furnish and install where directed a chart or directory listing the complete identification of every valve and cock. This chart shall designate class of service, and shall itemize the valve or cock identified, shall list its exact location, shall give its number, and shall be neatly typed and mounted under a glass pane in a suitable frame. These charts shall, in addition, list the various colors identifying the piping. 1.7 MARKING ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Lay -in Ceiling Panels: Use color coded thumb tacks neatly aligned in one corner of the panel to identify valves, fire dampers, smoke dampers, etc. The color code shall conform to the piping identification color code for valve access. The color shall be red for fire and smoke dampers. B. Stencil 1/2" high letters on concealed access doors to identify fire and smoke dampers. 1.8 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. For example, pumps will be identified as P-1, P-2, P-3, etc.; exhaust fans will be EF -1, EF -2, etc.; AC Units will be AC -1, AC -2, etc. B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3 -ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Boilers 2. Chillers 3. Pumps 4. AC Units 5. Convertors 6. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 7. Exhaust and Return Air Fans 8. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items 99074 01/01 END OF SECTION MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION 15390-3 No Text SECTION 15400 AIR DISTRIBUTION +* PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of apparatus casing, ductwork, plenums, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, relief air vents, curbs and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. a, B. In addition, connect all air conditioning units, automatic dampers, filters and all other materials and install (and/or cooperate in the installation with other trades) those various items of equipment and materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ducts insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in the latest edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. B. Duct construction details shall conform to "HVAC Duct Construction Standards", 1st Edition, (1985) published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). Refer to the fan schedules (TSP) for system pressures. Construction shall be suitable for actual duct system pressures. C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes indirection with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of 1 " in 7" on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1" in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1" in 4" where conditions necessitate. E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made 99074 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400-1 01/01 airtight at duct surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. 2.2 DUCT LINER A. All sheet metal supply, return, and fresh air duct shall be lined. B. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 1" with Johns -Manville "Permacote Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with immobilized antimicrobial impregnated acrylic surface coating on one side. C. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .25 btu-in./sq. ft. -degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 F. D. Duct liner shall comply with ASTM C1071 with an NRC not less than 0.70 as tested per ASTM C423. E. The duct liner shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with the coated side away from the metal, using weld pins or adhesive Tuffbond and adhesive type metal clips, Gemco, or equal, of the type which do not protrude through the duct. The size of the ducts indicated are actual internal sizes and the sheet metal sizes shall be 2" greater in both dimensions to accommodate the lining. No voids are permitted. F. Use 100% adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by SMACNA. 2.3 DUCT SEALER A. All supply air ductwork from the air unit to the grilles shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant. B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system. 2.4 PLENUMS A. The Contractor shall fabricate and install all sheet metal plenums. Plenums shall be constructed and insulated as specified for "Low Pressure Ductwork." In addition as a minimum requirement, plenums shall be braced with 1-1/2 by 10 gauge angles 24" on center, all sides. When plenums are mounted on the floor there shall be an additional angle around the plenum secured to the floor. Caulk all seams air and water tight. B. There shall be at least one door in each plenum 18" by 48" with two latches, 12" square Airsan Ductport, piano hinge, and gasket. All plenum doors shall be double metal - clad with 1 " thick internal insulation. Provide two Ventlock series 300 latches on each door. 2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible ducts shall be used for connecting air terminal devices. Generally flex duct shall not exceed 3'0" in length or have more than 90 degree of bend. Flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed of a continuous vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused to a continuous layer of fiber glass impregnated and coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4 inch thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working 99074 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400-2 01/01 A. All round takeoffs shall be made with spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass ductboard as applicable. Provide each with a factory installed balancing damper, positive locking nut and air scoop. 2.8 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER A. Furnish and install a combination fire/smoke damper in all ducts penetrating fire/smoke velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories under their UL -181 standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M -KC for high pressure and Thermaflex M -KE for low pressure application. 2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS FSD-36, Class 11, 10 CFM/SF leakage @ 1 "SP for low pressure applications and Ruskin A. Provide sound isolating flexible connections between connecting ducts and the inlet and outlet of each fan. These connections shall in each case be long enough to permit a minimum separation of 3" between the duct and the fan or unit housing with at least 1 " slack in the flexible material itself. B. The material shall be of a vinyl coated woven nylon/polyester blend base fabric, 22 oz. per square yard, meeting NFPA 90A and B for flame spread and smoke developed. It shall be fire resistant, waterproof and mildew -resistant. The material shall be equal to Excelon Fabric as manufactured by Duro-Dyne. 2.7 ROUND DUCT TAPS A. All round takeoffs shall be made with spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass ductboard as applicable. Provide each with a factory installed balancing damper, positive locking nut and air scoop. A. Access doors of sufficient size shall be installed in ducts to permit servicing of contained equipment including fire extinguishing equipment, dampers, etc. Where those panels are in insulated ducts, they shall be double wall panels with material to match the lining and of the same thickness. In uninsulated ducts they shall be single wall construction. All access panels shall have No. 310 Ventlock catches and pulls, No. 260 hinges and No. 390 gaskets. B. Where access panels are not exposed or readily accessible above removable ceilings, provide access doors in the general construction. 99074 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400-3 01/01 2.8 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER A. Furnish and install a combination fire/smoke damper in all ducts penetrating fire/smoke partitions. Each combination fire and smoke damper shall meet all requirements specified elsewhere for fire dampers and additionally shall include an operating shaft which, when rotated 90 degrees, causes damper to operate between closed and open. Operating shaft and damper combination shall be suitable for linking to and operation by a pneumatic damper operator. Combination fire/smoke dampers shall be Ruskin type FSD-36, Class 11, 10 CFM/SF leakage @ 1 "SP for low pressure applications and Ruskin type FSD-60, Class I, airfoil blade, 4 CFM/SF @ 1 "SP for high pressure applications. B. Each combination fire/smoke damper shall be furnished complete with factory sleeve and pneumatic damper operator factory installed on exterior of sleeve and properly linked to damper operating shaft. Actuator shall be of the spring return fail closed type that will close damper upon power interruption. Damper operators shall be UL listed as fire damper operators and bear the UL label for such. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber and galvanized steel mechanically locked into blade edge (adhesive or clip -on seals not acceptable). C. The smoke damper shall close on a signal from the fire alarm system or from the .;; operator of a smoke detector. D. Provide access doors with ductports in the duct and a ceiling access door if necessary for servicing the damper and actuator. 2.9 ACCESS PANEL A. Access doors of sufficient size shall be installed in ducts to permit servicing of contained equipment including fire extinguishing equipment, dampers, etc. Where those panels are in insulated ducts, they shall be double wall panels with material to match the lining and of the same thickness. In uninsulated ducts they shall be single wall construction. All access panels shall have No. 310 Ventlock catches and pulls, No. 260 hinges and No. 390 gaskets. B. Where access panels are not exposed or readily accessible above removable ceilings, provide access doors in the general construction. 99074 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400-3 01/01 2.10 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES A. Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers for every purpose. Refer to the tabulation on the drawings for types, sizes and accessories. B. All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the ceiling shall be factory finished in OFF-WHITE. Door grilles shall be factory finished in baked enamel medium birch tan. C. All other grilles and registers shall be factory primed and spray painted 2 coats on the job. D. All grilles and registers shall be installed with tamperproof screws and shall be secured to the duct with a minimum of four screws. E. Where perforated supply grilles are scheduled, they shall be of the type with adjustable curved blades in the neck of the diffusers. Other types are not acceptable. F. Air distribution devices as manufactured by Barber Colman, Titus, Tuttle and Bailey, Metal -Aire or Krueger will be acceptable. END OF SECTION 99074 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400-4 01/01 a- Aft N., SECTION 15500 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 GENERAL Y 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. r 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 4- A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. - MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. �*+ Hanger Copper Tubing 4" and Larger 364 copper plated Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199 Hanger Steel lines 4" and larger 239 Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239 Hanger Cast Iron Lines 239 Hanger Plastic Pipe 108 + 109 K. Hanger Refrigerant Pipe 102 Hanger Glass Pipe 375 Wall Bracket All 150, 151, or 155 Saddles Steel Lines On Rollers 71, 1710, 1712, 172, 173 Conc. Inserts New Construction 185 Rollers Steel Piping 161, 272 Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304 Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger 241 Pipe Rest All 295 or 291. Exp Shield Concrete 374 Beam Clamps All 249, 254, 255, 282, 280 Adjuster All 2381 99074 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15500- 1 01/01 r-� 2.2 HANGER RODS A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" 3/4" 2.3 HANGER SPACING Size of Steel Pipe or Copper Tube Supported 2-1/2" and smaller 3" and 4" 5" through 8" 10" and larger Size of Cast Iron Pipe Supported 3" and smaller 4" through 6" 8" through 10" 12" and larger A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper, and steel lines, but hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or the type of pipe involved or required by code. Size of Line 3/4" and smaller 1 " through 1-1 /2" 2" and larger All cast iron lines PART 3 EXECUTION Hanger Spacing in Feet 5 7 10 5 (Minimum two per joint) 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10'0" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U -braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. F. Where pipes or equipment are suspended under existing concrete construction, drill and use Grinnell Fig. 117 expansion case or Phillips concrete fasteners in sizes not 99074 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15500-2 01/01 G� exceeding 1/2" and for loads of 200 lbs or less. For larger rods or loads above 200 lbs drill through the beam above the bottom steel and bolt a Grinnell Fig. 202 bracket to the side of the beam for support. Size brackets per manufacturer's recommendations. Use pipe stands where required. G. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed for sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes. 3.2 DUCT HANGERS A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. !04 END OF SECTION 2 99074 01/01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15500-3 as i SECTION 15600 INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically excepted. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those provided by equipment manufacturers. " B. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein. C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as �- adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. D. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. 2.2 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS 99074 01/01 _4 e.. A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be laminated of flame resistant white kraft paper and .001 inch thick aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber fabric between the foil and the paper. The foil and paper shall be adhered with a flame resistant latex adhesive. B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with one coat insulating cement equal to OC -110 built up to the thickness of the adjoining pipe covering and vapor seal with two 1/8 inch wet coats of vapor barrier mastic equal to Benjamin Foster No. 65-07 reinforced with glass fabric extending 2" onto the adjacent insulation. INSULATION 15600-1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. ` The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. 3.2 APPLICATION OF INSULATION A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. B. On glass fiber pipe covering with factory -applied vapor -barrier jacket, lap the jacket on the longitudinal seams and seal with vapor barrier lap adhesive equal to Benjamin Foster 82-07 or use self sealing lap. Tightly butt the ends and cover butt joints with a 4" wide band of vapor barrier jacket secured with the same adhesive. 3.3 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. In the following, the word "exposed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in any room above the lowest floor in any building unit, exterior to the building and above ground, and/or in equipment rooms; the word "concealed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in other underfloor areas, ceiling spaces furrings and chases. B. Also included in this section is the requirement for patching and repair of existing insulation where new connections are made. 1. Chilled Water Lines: Insulate with molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied all purpose vapor barrier jacket equal to Manville "Micro -Lok APT 850". Insulation shall be 1-1/2" thick. Insulate valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers. 2. Heating Water Supply and Return Lines: Insulate with molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied all purpose vapor barrier jacket equal to Manville "Micro -Lok APT 650". Insulation shall be 1-1/2" thick. Insulate valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers. 3. Drain Lines: 3/8" thick Armaflex. Insulation may be slit flange type or threaded on during fabrication. 4. Ducts: a. Insulate the supply, return and fresh air ducts with 0.75 Ib. density, 2" thick Manville "Microlite R Series" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory 'm applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket. b. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On horizontal runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints _- tightly. Except on ducts handling warm air only, seal all joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with two coats of Benjamin Foster 30-35 adhesive. Embed three inch wide Glassfab membrane in adhesive between coats. Install with not more 99074 INSULATION 15600-2 01/01 than 25% compression in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. .. c. Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three inch wide facing strip. d. Ducts handling warm air only need not be vapor sealed. END OF SECTION t r, 99074 INSULATION 15600-3 01/01 SECTION 1.5700 EQUIPMENT r= , PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with the applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified. m"s 1.3 SCOPE ' A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1 . Space requirements 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - no. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5. Quality �..., 6. Quantity PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTOR STARTERS A. The Division 15 Contractor shall furnish all motor starters (controllers) and control equipment for equipment specified under Division 15. The Contractor under this section of the specifications shall be responsible for coordinating starter sizes, characteristics, heater element sizes and all other details. B. All individual starters shall be the product of a single manufacturer and submitted for review at the same time. 99074 EQUIPMENT 15700-1 01/01 IN C. Where starters are specified with items of equipment, the starters shall be factory mounted and wired. D. Magnetic Starters (Full Voltage): Starters shall be individual units, combination starter/molded case circuit breaker units, combination starter/fused disconnect switch units or combination starter/unfused disconnect switch units unless otherwise indicated. E. Units shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse, Federal or Gould manufacture with the proper enclosures. F. Provide pilot lights and either pushbutton stations or hand -off -automatic switches as required for the control of each item of equipment. Generally, pushbutton stations shall be used only where no interlock or remote functions are specified. Control devices shall be in the starter cover unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified. Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits when the starter is disconnected. H. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one per phase. I. Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, with 120 volt secondary, a secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary leg grounded. J. Manual Starters: Where manual starters are indicated, they shall consist of a horsepower rated on-off switch, or hand -off -auto switch with a pilot light and overload element(s) in the same enclosure. Where the starter is installed in public areas, it shall be in a recessed box with a stainless steel coverplate. 2.2 FANS A. The fans indicated on the drawings shall be provided in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. B. All v -belt drives shall be a variable pitch type and shall be so selected that the specified fan performance occurs at approximately the midpoint of the adjustable range. Motor mounting shall be flexible to permit belt tightening. The static pressure tabulated in the schedule is for bidding purposes only. The fan shall be adjusted to achieve the air delivery specified and if changing of the motor and drive is required it shall be done at no increase in the contract. C. Motor and Drive: The motor shall be open drip proof NEMA T frame design to meet horsepower and electrical requirements specified. The adjustable v -belt drive shall be selected for a 1.4 service factor based on motor horsepower and shall be factory set for the specified rpm. The motor shall be mounted for alignment and tensioning the belts. Conduit shall be flexible. D. Provide isolators and flexible duct connections with each fan to limit the transmission of noise and vibration. E. Fans shall be AMCA rated as scheduled. F. Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers and disconnect. G. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. H. Fans shall have factory applied finish. I. Fan motors 1/8 HP and larger shall be permanent capacitor start type. 2.3 POWER ROOF VENTILATORS A. All roof mounted exhaust fans shall be of the low silhouette type with fan wheels mounted horizontally. All fan housings shall be corrosion resistant construction. All fans shall be equipped with ball bearings, permanently lubricated. Fans shall be resiliently mounted. B. Unless scheduled otherwise, all exhaust fans shall have backward inclined centrifugal wheels. C. All fans shall have backdraft dampers and bird screens. 99074 EQUIPMENT 15700-2 01/01 D. Refer to the drawings for special requirements. E. Curbs shall be factory fabricated and furnished with the unit. F. Exhaust fans shall be as manufactured by Cook, Penn Ventilator, Jenn Aire Products Co. or Greenheck. 2.4 AIR UNITS, LOW PRESSURE A. Air units shall be of the sectionalized, factory assembled standard catalogued low pressure type as manufactured by Carrier, Trane, Temtrol or Bohn. Refer to schedule on drawings. Units shall be dis-assembled, moved into the equipment room, and re- assembled. B. The sections which constitute the completed air conditioning unit shall each be assembled at the factory in a sheet metal housing appropriately finished, and shipped as a unit. They shall be assembled on the job into complete units having physical and performance characteristics as detailed and scheduled, suitable for application at the static pressure indicated in the schedule. C. Each air unit shall be complete with the following components: D. Fan Casing: Fabricated of heavy gage steel sheets bolted to structural framing and reinforcing members. Panels and reinforcing shall be not less than the following thickness. ITEM UNITS LARGER THAN UNITS SMALLER THAN 6500 CFM 6500 CFM Discharge Panel 16 gauge 20 gauge End Panels 12 gauge 16 gauge Front Panel 12 gauge 14 gauge E. Casings shall be gasketed air tight. F. Coil Casing: Fabricated of heavy gauge steel sheets bolted to structural framing and reinforcing members. Panels and reinforcing shall be not less than the following thickness: ITEM UNITS LARGER THAN UNITS SMALLER THAN 6500 CFM 6500 CFM 99074 EQUIPMENT 15700-3 01/01 End Panels 18 gauge 20 gauge Top Panel 18 gauge 20 gauge Front Panel 18 gauge 20 gauge Drain Pan 14 gauge 16 gauge r� Reinforcing 10 gauge 10 gauge Support Channels 10 gauge 10 gauge G. Casing shall be gasketed air tight and water tight. H. Units with welded tubular steel frames and bolted panels having equivalent strength will be considered. I. Drain pans shall have foamed in place plastic insulation. J. Fan: Forward curved class 1 AMCA rated, selected for maximum efficiency, delivery, static pressure, and BHP at the operating point. Submit calculations based on the 1970 ASHRAE method indicating the sound power generated at the midrange frequency of the audible octave bands. Sound power levels shall not exceed the following tabulation: (Refer: 10-12 watts). 99074 EQUIPMENT 15700-3 01/01 Frequency 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Sound Power 87 87 89 80 76 72 K. Fan curve shall indicate that operation is stable at 20 percent above and 20 percent below the selected RPM. Static efficiency at the selection point shall be 60 percent or more. L. Fan shaft shall be selected to operate at a speed 30% or more below its first critical speed. The rotating assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced. When the unit is running there shall be no visible deflection of any panel and no noise of metal to metal contact. If, in the judgement of the Architect, objectionable noise or vibration is observed, the units shall be aligned and dynamically balanced on the job by a factory mechanic to industrial tolerances, at no additional cost. Balancing method and tolerances shall be approved by the Architect. Any detective component shall be replaced. M. Fan scrolls and wheels shall be designed as a unit with smooth belled inlet and adjustable cut-off. Fan wheel shall be keyed to the shaft and shall be removable. N. Bearings shall be ball or roller type rated for 200,000 hour life. Bearing shall be bolted to structural bearing supports. Extend copper lube lines to a common convenient point. Each fan shaft shall have two bearings only. O. Motor and Drive: Motor shall be not less than the horsepower scheduled, 1750 RPM, fy dripproof. Drive shall be selected for 120% of the maximum motor horsepower. Provide an adjustable drive, selected for the RPM of the fan with 10% adjustment above and below the selected speed. P. The motor shall be installed on adjustable rails or cradle to permit belt tensioning and alignment. Provide flexible conduit for wiring the motor. Q. Provide a heavy belt guard for the belt drive, securely bolted to the unit casing, with 1 "x1 "x1 /4" angles. Field fabrication is acceptable for guard brackets if not available from the manufacturer. R. Cooling Coils: ARI certified water tube type with copper tubes and aluminum fins, mechanically bonded, pressure tested at 250 psig. Cooling coils shall have not less than 4 rows of tubes. Fin spacing may vary to produce the scheduled capacity, but may not have less than 6 fins per in. or more than 14 fins per inch. S. Heating Coils: ARI certified, non -freeze, steam distributing type with copper tubes and aluminum fins, mechanically bonded. Tubes shall be 1" OD minimum. Coils shall be pressure tested at 150 psig. T. Insulation: Casings shall be internally insulated with 1 " thick 3/4 Ib. neoprene coated fiberglass. Drain pans shall be insulated with 1/2" thick foamed in place plastic insulation. U. Vibration Isolators: Spring type, with neoprene pad base, and stop. Static deflection shall be 2". V. Drain: Provide full size drain line to nearest floor drain and turn down. Drain shall have 6" deep p -trap. W. Filters: As specified under "FILTERS". X. Dampers: Units where shown shall be equipped with factory installed low leakage, damper section with blades, ribs, bearings and interconnecting linkage. 2.5 FILTERS A. Provide all filters specified herein and/or scheduled or shown on the drawings. All filters shall be erected in holding frames, tight fitting, with no bypass path. B. All filters of every type shall be UL listed Class I or ll. _. C. Every air handling device which supplies air to any space shall have a filter bank. No., size, and type of filters, shall be as scheduled on the drawings. 99074 EQUIPMENT 15700-4 01/01 C2 D. All frames shall be fitted with new media at final acceptance. In addition provide 100% spare filters. E. Manometers: Provide and install a Dwyer gage with level, probes, cocks, and copper tubing across every filter bank. Attach the gage to the filter housing or adjacent duct. F. Disposable Medium Efficiency Filters: Filters shall be medium efficiency (30-35% based on ASHRAE 52-68) at a velocity of 500 FPM. Media shall be pleated, non woven reinforced cotton fabric supported by a welded wire grid with 95% open area. Frame shall be heavy duty waterproof chipboard. Filter shall have not less than 4.5 square feet of media per foot of face area. Filters shall be equal to Farr 30/30 series. 2.6 HEATING COILS, WATER A. Heating coils shall be furnished and installed complete with such supporting structures as are required. The capacity of each coil assembly shall be as scheduled on the drawings. They shall have physical and performance characteristics as indicated and shall be erected and connected in the arrangements shown. B. These coils shall be of the staggered type. Coils shall have vent and drain connections and shall be provided with duct connectors. They shall be constructed with seamless copper tubes and aluminum fins with the fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. They shall be suitable for use with hot water as the heating medium. Coils shall be sized as shown on the plans. Coils shall be removable without disturbing ducts. END OF SECTION 99074 EQUIPMENT 15700-5 01/01 SECTION 15800 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL a 1.1 NOTE _ a A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SCOPE 99074 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15800-1 01/01 A. The Contractor shall furnish under this contract an NEBB or AABC certified TAB report. B. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air and water, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. C. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building. D. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of k the system. E. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any r� unusual conditions. F. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, k to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. G. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of 4 successive eight hour days in a typical room on each separately controlled zone. The total variation shall not exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire temperature survey period. H. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled 1. zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. I. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: 1. A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each separately controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at time of measurement. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation specified above. 3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. 4. Flow rate and temperature at each coil and heating device. 5. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust fan, and other components of the system. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terms of CFM handled. 99074 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15800-1 01/01 6. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. J. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. K. When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. 1.3 INSTRUCTIONS A. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and r operation of the system components. In addition, provide schematic wiring diagrams of each piece of equipment framed under glass and mounted on the wall as directed. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. END OF SECTION 99074 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15800-2 01/01 rte+ SECTION 15900 TEMPERATURE REGULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials and equipment. Include system schematics indicating all devices, pneumatic piping, electrical wiring and sequence of operation. Sequence of operation shall reference each component device by designation used on schematics. 1.3 SCOPE A. This Contractor shall include in his bid an amount necessary to cover a complete system of automatic temperature regulating equipment. It is intended that the system be pneumatic in its operation except for certain sensing functions, remote starting and stopping provisions, resetting arrangements, and alarm indications which can best be performed by electronic instruments. It shall include all master and submaster thermostats, valves, dampers, and operators, amplifiers, air receivers, switches, piping, air regulator, relays, multiplexers, cabinets, etc. required to make it complete in full accordance with the intent of the plans and the following description. B. The wiring for all the remote indicating, motor control, control set point and adjustment and alarm devices shall originate in a terminal board and extend to and connect to all multiplexers, relays, thermocouples, and similar devices. The wiring shall be performed by the Contractor under Division 16 in accordance with diagrams on the plans, as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings which this contractor shall provide. C. The temperature regulation equipment shall be installed and adjusted to secure the sequences described hereinafter. The materials and equipment described herein shall be sufficient to any of the remote devices of reference elsewhere herein, but shall be arranged as required to operate in conjunction with those remote devices. D. The Contractor shall furnish and install all automatic dampers, and all automatic valves. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and adjust all damper and valve operators and all other switches, relays, etc. comprising the temperature regulation system. Temperature regulation specified herein is based on Johnson Controls, Honeywell, or Powers. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPRESSED AIR 99074 01/01 A. The existing air compressor will be reused to provide control air. This Contractor shall begin at the existing air line, connect 1 " to the service and extend it according to the various requirements cited by, and inherent to, the descriptions herein. A manual valve shall be provided to allow isolation of the building from the service. Verify the location of the existing air line. Provide a ball valve at connection point. TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900-1 2.2 GAUGES A. Provide and install two inch dial pressure gauges at each pneumatic valve and damper operator to indicate its performance. All such gauges shall be identified by a permanent tag or label indicating to which operator they apply. 2.3 THERMOSTATS A. All thermostats shall be of the gradual acting type, except in cases specified herein to the contrary. All shall be adjustable as to set point. B. Thermostats shall be guaranteed to control to plus or minus 1 degree of set point. C. Those for exposed installation in finished areas shall have plain cases and concealed adjustments unless specifically described otherwise herein. D. The interrelationship of reset schedule of all submaster instruments shall be job -adjustable and capable of broad ranges of specific value. E. The locations of all room type thermostats are indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall examine these locations and if, in his opinion, the operation of any instrument would be improved by changing its location, he shall so notify the Architect. With the Architect's approval, he shall install the thermostat in the location of his choice. 2.4 SAFETY LOW LIMIT A. Safety low limits shall be manual reset line voltage type with bellows actuated switches. Twenty foot capillary shall be responsive to the coolest section of its length. 2.5 PRESSURE CONTROLLERS A. Differential pressure controllers shall be direct or reverse acting to provide fully proportional control of pneumatic motors and valves. Air pressure output will be varied in relation to the difference in water pressures it senses. B. Static pressure regulators shall be direct or reverse acting with adjustable setpoint and throttling range with field calibration capability. 2.6 CONTROL VALVES, WATER A. All modulating straight -through water valves shall be provided with equal -percentage contoured throttling plugs. All three-way valves shall be provided with linear throttling plugs such that the total flow through the valve shall remain constant regardless of the valve's position. B. Valves 3" and smaller shall be screwed type, valves 4" and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be factory -rated to withstand the pressures encountered. Valves shall have stainless-steel stems and spring-loaded teflon packing. C. Water valves shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve but not to exceed 5 psi. Valves shall have replaceable seats and discs. 2.7 AIR FLOW CONTROL DAMPERS A. The temperature control contractor will provide all control dampers of the types indicated on the plans. Frames shall not be less than 13 gauge galvanized steel. Blades must not be over 8 inches wide nor less than .16 gauge galvanized steel roll formed. Bearings shall be oilite, ball bearing or nylon with 1/2" shafts. Side seals shall be stainless steel of the tight -seal spring type. Dampers and seals shall be suitable for temperature ranges of -40 degrees to 200 degrees F. 99074 TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900-2 01/01 B. All proportional control dampers shall be opposed or parallel blade type and all two -position dampers shall be parallel -blade types. C. Dampers shall be minimum leakage type to conserve energy and the manufacturer shall submit leakage and flow characteristic data for all control dampers with the temperature control submitted. Maximum leakage shall be 3% at static pressure of 3 inches of W.C. D. All control dampers shall be standard products of the temperature control manufacturer's factory. Local fabrication of dampers is not allowed. 2.8 PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS — FOR ZONE DAMPERS AND REHEAT 3 -WAY VALVES A. Pneumatic operators shall be sized to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two -position action as specified. B. Where sequencing of actuators is called for such sequencing shall be accomplished by spring ranges adequate for the application. C. Where critical application controllers are used, or where actuators are controlled from pressure sensors, pilot positioners shall be used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. This Contractor shall design and install the temperature regulation system using components as hereinbefore described to effect the performance functions described hereinafter. Considerable latitude is permitted in the arrangement and selection of components. However, the sequences described must be achieved automatically, within the tolerance specified, without manual manipulation, and any modification to the submitted design required to achieve this result shall be done at no change in the contract price. 3.2 MULTIZONE AIR HANDLING UNITS A. These units are low pressure blow thru units. Provide a thermostat for each zone, chilled water three-way valve, zone hot water valves, and all other devices specified hereinafter. Provide start/stop from the DDC system. B. The chilled water supply to the cooling coil shall be supplied with a modulating 3 -way control valve. Provide a software load analyzer to sense the temperature requirement in each zone. The load analyzer shall position the 3 -way valve to match the cooling requirement of the zone requiring the coldest air. Control of CHW valve shall be ►=- through the DDC system. C. Provide the fresh air damper with an automatic operator. The damper shall be open to the minimum position when the unit is running, and closed when the unit is off. Dampers shall be controlled by the DDC system. D. Smoke Detector: Refer to division 16. E. Provide a limit thermostat in the fan discharge to stop the fan when the temperature is 36 degrees or below, or 125 degrees or above. F. There shall be mixing dampers for each zone. On a call for cooling, the thermostat shall operate the dampers, mixing bypass and cold deck air to satisfy the setting of the thermostat. Heating coils in each zone shall provide the primary heating. On a call for heating at the thermostat, the thermostat shall modulate the zone hot water valve open. The thermostat for each zone shall be pneumatic. Heating water control valves shall be pneumatic and controlled by the zone thermostat. 99074 TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900-3 01/01 3.3 FINAL TEST AND ADJUSTMENT A. Upon completion of the installation, the control manufacturer shall make all final adjustments to the system as may be required by actual operating conditions. All throttling range adjustments shall be set as narrow as possible without causing hunting. Setpoints and setup amounts shall be such as to provide satisfactory operation under all load conditions. The operating personnel shall be instructed in the preventive maintenance procedures and in the operating of the control system. The control manufacturer shall submit a letter stating that the control system has been installed under the control manufacturer's supervision and has been adjusted, tested under operating conditions and is operating satisfactorily. in accordance with the desired sequence. B. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory representatives under direct employ of the Temperature Control Manufacturer shall provide two two-hour periods of instruction to the Owner's operating personnel who have responsibility for the mechanical system. An additional two-hour instruction period shall be given at the beginning of the next heating or cooling season. C. Provide three sets of complete operating and maintenance instructions with drawings, typewritten instructions and operating sequences, and descriptive data sheets. Assemble each set in a hard cover binder with "Temperature Control" title placed on front cover and binding. 3.4 GUARANTEE A. All devices shall be guaranteed to control to plus or minus 1 degree F. System shall be guaranteed for one year after final acceptance. 3.5 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM A. Existing Johnson Metasys System to remain. Expand and add points per the attached Point Chart. END OF SECTION 99074 TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900-4 01/01 m . ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ . -- 000■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■o■■■■■MMMM■■ • ■ ■■n■■■■n■■■■■■ • ao■■■■■ mMMM■■■■ •• ■■■■o■■■■■■■■■■ =-41=t--X=L2=NMMMMMMMMMMMM■■ ■o■■■■■■■■■I■■■■ - ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■■■■■mmmm■■■ • - ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ - ■■■■■■■■■■■MM ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ - ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ • ■o■o■■■o■■■■■■■ ■o■000■nnmmm■■■ - ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ • - - ■0000■oo■ MMMM ■■ o■■■■a■■o■■■■■■ SECTION 16050 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work shall include furnishing and installing all rigid steel and flexible metallic conduit, intermediate metallic conduit, electrical metallic tubing, polyvinyl chloride conduit, wireways, pull and junction boxes and outlet boxes, together with all supporting devices and other accessories required. en PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS A. Underground Plastic Conduit: Type 40, heavy wall, high impact rigid virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit and fittings, conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3 and UL listed for direct burial use; Carlon or equivalent. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided with a slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied. C. Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips (commercial Greenfield); conforming to UL Standard UL I and UL listed and labeled; Triangle Conduit and Cable Company, or equivalent. D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound, galvanized steel strips, as for -flexible metal conduit; with polyvinyl chloride cover extruded over the exterior to make conduit liquidtight; UL listed; Electri-flex type "LA" or equivalent. 2.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS .-, A. Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing: Join lengths of EMT with steel compression type couplings and connectors where exposed to the weather or in wet locations. Otherwise use steel, set -screw couplings and connectors. The connectors shall have insulated throats or a smooth interior so as not to damage the insulation during wire pulling operations. B. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 440 Series couplings at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 3110 or 3130 Series nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. C. Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 5271 Series adapters at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 5331 Series nylon ;,. insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. 99074 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16050- 1 01/01 2.3 WIREWAYS A. Interior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; screw covers; complete with all fittings, couplings, hangers and accessories; Square D, General Electric, or equivalent. B. Exterior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; removable front cover which is gasketed; weatherproof rainhood. 2.4 OUTLET BOXES A. UL listed of sizes and types specified. B. Sheet Steel Boxes: Sheet steel not lighter than No. 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication; Raco, Steel City or Appleton. C. Cast Metal Boxes: Cast iron or cast alloy with threaded hubs; Crouse -Hinds, Appleton or Pyle National. 2.5 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers. B. Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic inches, use standard outlet boxes. C. Larger Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over 100 cubic inches, use cabinets as specified for panelboard cabinets with covers of same gauge as boxes, secured with corrosion resistant bolts or screws. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Perform all excavation work required in connection with the installation of the work under this Division. After the electrical work has been installed, tested and approved, backfill all excavations with suitable material under the direction of the Architect. Include the cutting of all sidewalks, streets and other pavement and repairing the openings in them to return to the surface to approximately its original condition. B. Perform all excavations of every description of whatever substances encountered and to the depths required for installation of the work under this Division. C. During excavation, stack material suitable for backfilling in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trenches to prevent slides or cave-ins. Remove all excavated material not required or suitable for backfill, or waste as directed. Control grading to prevent surface water from flowing into excavations and remove any water accumulating therein by pumping. D. Use open cut grading and make trenches of the necessary width for proper installation of the lines with banks as nearly vertical as possible. E. Grade the bottom of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for conduit or duct on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. F. Except at locations where excavation of rock from the bottoms of trenches is required, take care not to excavate below the depths required. Where rock excavation is required, remove the rock to a minimum overdepth of 4 inches below the trench depths specified. Backfill the overdepth rock excavation and all excess trench excavation to the proper level with 3/4 inch crushed rock or the equivalent in coarse gravel prior to the installation of conduit or ducts. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting conduits or ducts is encountered —, 99074 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16050-2 01/01 in the trench bottom, remove such soil to a depth required and backfill the trench to trench bottom grade with 3/4 inch crushed rock or coarse gravel or other suitable material. 3.2 BACKFILLING A. Carefully backfill trenches with earth, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale or other approved material free from large clods of earth or stone, deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6 -inch layers. Do not use blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, or large boulders as backfilling material. Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and will be a requirement when so directed. Re -open any trenches improperly filled or where settlement occurs to the depth required for proper compaction, then refill, mound over and smooth off. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT A. Install at least 30 inches below finished grade unless noted to the contrary. Assemble and install raceways in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make joints with couplings and solvent cement. Fabricate bends of 30 degrees or more with factory -made elbows, or make field bends with proper heating equipment. Bends showing signs of overheating or flattening are unacceptable. Ream ends of all conduit before joining. B. "Snake" plastic conduit in trench, from side to side, with a complete cycle every 40 feet to allow for expansion and contraction. Maintain this configuration during backfilling. C. Where conduit turns up out of earth, or floor slabs, change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit below grade and outside of such structures. Do not extend any plastic conduit above grade. Make similar change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit at connections to underground pull or junction boxes. Wrap all steel conduits and fittings buried in earth as specified elsewhere herein, or use PVC coated steel conduits. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT A. All steel conduit in earth shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit. Wrap such conduit with 3M Company 0.020 inch thick No. 51 "scotchrap" vinyl plastic tape, half lapped to give a double thickness wrap. Remove all oil, grease and dirt from conduit with a suitable solvent, and clean and dry conduit before wrapping. If conduit is pre -wrapped in the shop and then cut and joined on the job, wrap all joints on the job, overlapping pipe wrapping 3" on both sides of joints. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS A. All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. B. Types: All conduits installed in wet or damp locations, shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits. Above grade interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit, intermediate metal conduits or electrical metallic tubing. Conduits installed below grade in slabs or buried in earth shall be PVC or rigid galvanized steel. 99074 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16050-3 01/01 C. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. D. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12" long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use flexible metal conduit also at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. In damp or wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. E. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within 3" of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 1" from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. F. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. G. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. H. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive and installed to meet requirements of the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory. - 3.6 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. B. Vertical Conduit Risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of riser clamps or U -bolts, clamping them to a steel channel bridging the opening in the floor. C. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where conduits smaller than 1-1 /4" are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of. the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. D. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. -- 99074 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16050-4 01/01 r^� r- 0- 3.7 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES A. Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. B. Boxes recessed in construction: Sheet steel boxes. C. For Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" octagonal by 1-1/2" minimum depth with 3/8" fixture stud for incandescent lights which are surface mounted, wall mounted or suspended. D. For Wall Switches, Receptacles and Communications Use: Use 4"x4" size with proper square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover, or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the device requires a larger box. E. Boxes for Exposed Work: Cast metal boxes. F. Boxes for Outdoors: Cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger sizes than required by code where job conditions so indicate. B. Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set box covers flush with finished surfaces for access. 99074 01/01 END OF SECTION RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16050-5 SECTION 16110 CONDUCTORS PART1 GENERAL 1 .1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work shall include the furnishing of all conductors, together with all splices, connections, identification, bundling, etc., including pulling devices. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER) A. Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, continuous without weld, splice or joint, uniform cross-section, free from flaws, scale and other imperfections; Okonite, Triangle, United Copper Industries, Anaconda or Simplex. No. 8 and larger shall be stranded; No. 10 and smaller shall be solid. B. Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type THHN/THWN, THW, or RHW insulation unless the type is specifically designated or specified. Service feeders shall be type THHN/THWN or THW. Feeder circuits shall be Type THW or THHN/THWN. C. Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type 'RHH conductors for wiring in proximity to boilers, and for motors and devices subject to high temperature because of high ambient temperature or convection or radiant heat. D. Lighting Fixture Conductors: Type and size approved by the NEC for the purpose. 2.2 JOINTS AND SPLICES A. Stranded Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors or Thomas and Betts Series 54000 compression connectors. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. All compression connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools. Split -bolt connectors are not acceptable. B. Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors; or UL approved electrical spring connectors of "Scotchlok", Ideal or T & B "Piggy" make. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. Split bolt connectors are not acceptable. 2.3 COLOR CODING A. Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases, A, B, and C respectively in the 208 volt system. B. Neutral conductors shall be white. Grounding conductors shall be green. 99074 CONDUCTORS 16110- 1 01/01 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WIRE PULLING A. Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Pull no conductors into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause injury to conductors is completed. Use an Underwriters' listed cable pulling compound where necessary. B. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. C. Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a suitable pull line to facilitate future installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices and shall have ample exposed length at each end. Identify each end of each line with a linen tag bearing complete information as to the purpose of the raceway and the location of its other end. All lines shall be nylon or polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE (600 VOLTS AND UNDER) A. Feeders: Run all feeders their entire length in continuous pieces without joints or splices, insofar as practicable. Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide as shown on drawings. Such joints shall consist of one through circuit to which shall be spliced the tap circuit. B. Branch Circuits: Not more than one power or lighting circuit shall be installed in a single conduit, except that one 3 -wire circuit or one 4 -wire circuit consisting of 2 different phase wires and a common neutral or 3 different phase wires and a common neutral may be installed in a single conduit. This provision shall not prohibit the installation in a single conduit of all conductors of a circuit with three- and four-way switching. C. Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or control circuits, and except for individual lighting fixture taps as permitted by the National Electrical Code. D. Receptacle and Motor Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. E. Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes and pull boxes. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. After a joint or splice is complete, insulate it with Okonite rubber tape, and Manson friction tape to make the insulation of the joint or splice equal to that of the conductor. F. Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with the conductor manufacturer's recommendations. G. Identifying Tags: Non-ferrous; stamped to clearly identify each circuit. Securely fasten tags to all cables, feeders and power circuits in pull boxes, lighting, power and distribution panelboards, etc. H. Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets and the like, using marlin twine lacing or nylon straps made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than No. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. END OF SECTION 99074 CONDUCTORS 16110-2 01/01 SECTION 16211 WIRING DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE ,�. A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. ►�*1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated, complete with lamps, coverplates, etc. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRING DEVICES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed herein are generally of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices of Arrow -Hart, Bryant, Pass, Seymour and Leviton or General Electric are also acceptable. B. Classification: All wiring devices shall be "Specification Grade", and shall be UL listed. C. Colors: All devices shall have an ivory finish where mounted in walls finished in light colors and a brown finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors. 2.2 WALL SWITCHES ;.. A. For loads not exceeding 1500 watts at 120 volts or 3000 watts at 277 volts: .DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO. Single pole wall switch 1201 or 1201-1 Three-way wall switch 1203 or 1203-1 Four-way wall switch 1204 or 1204-1 Pilot -lighted switch 1201 -PLC Momentary Contact switch 1556 or 1556-1 B. For loads exceeding above listing: DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO. r^ Single pole wall switch 1221 or 1221-1 Three-way wall switch 1223 or 1223-1 Four-way wall switch 1224 or 1224-1 Pilot -lighted switch 1221 -PLC 99074 WIRING DEVICES 16211 -1 01/01 2.3 RECEPTACLES A. Receptacle, 20 Ampere, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire Grounding Duplex: Hubbell No. 5362 or 5362-1 (NEMA 5-20R), B. Receptacle, 20 Ampere, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire Grounding Duplex with Self -Contained Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter: Hubbell No. GF -5362. 2.4 FLOOR MOUNTED DEVICES A. Floor Boxes: Walker Series 1500. 2.5 COVERPLATES A. Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, telephone, signal outlets and other kindred devices. B. For Flush Mounted Devices: All coverplates shall be Sierra Electric Corporation "P -Line" plastic plates to match devices which they cover. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION: A. At each wiring device, install a label on the inside of the coverplate which shall identify the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected. The labels shall be made on the job with indent type Dynamo adhesive tape. Attach the label to the plate with contact cement or other suitable adhesive material. In lieu of a label, the panel and circuit number may be marked on the inside of the coverplate with an indelible pencil. 3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. B. In general, devices which are shown to be installed at counters or other millwork shall be installed above the counter or millwork, unless noted. Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung. C. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by the Architect, install devices at the following heights. DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHT Wall Switch 4'0" Receptacle 18" Clock Hanger Outlet 12" below ceiling Wall Mounted Clock 12" below ceiling Telephone Outlet 18" Wall Dimmer Switch 4'0" END OF SECTION 99074 WIRING DEVICES 16211 -2 01/01 SECTION 16301 GROUNDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install the various grounding systems outlined herein in accordance with the National Electrical Code. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Products for grounding systems are specified elsewhere herein. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GROUNDING RACEWAYS A. Assure the electrical continuity of all metallic raceway systems, pulling up all conduits and/or locknuts wrench tight. Where expansion joints or telescoping joints occur, provide bonding jumpers. Where flexible metallic conduit is employed, provide a green -insulated grounding jumper installed in the flexible conduit. Install a separate green -insulated conductor in each non-metallic conduit. B. Provide grounding bushings on all service and feeder raceways terminating within switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, cabinets, and all other enclosures. Provide grounding conductors from such bushings to the frame of the enclosure and to the ground bus or equipment grounding strap. Size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC Table 250-95. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Provide a separate, green -insulated copper grounding conductor, with insulation of the same rating as phase conductors, for each feeder and for each branch circuit indicated. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors, and connect the grounding conductor to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect all ^^? grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and to ground buses in 99074 GROUNDING 16301 -1 01/01 service equipment to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault back to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. Size all of these grounding conductors per NEC Table 250-95. END OF SECTION 99074 GROUNDING 16301 -2 01/01 r SECTION 16410 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE „w A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment. 1.3 MANUALS A. Include all submittal data in the operation and maintenance manuals. 1.4 SCOPE A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS A. Panelboard Cabinets: Furnish and install cabinets to serve the various panelboards, of sizes as required to house the panelboards. 2.2 CABINET CONSTRUCTION A. Rigidly constructed of sheet steel of gauges conforming to Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. requirements; corners overlapped or welded; edges turned over to receive trim. B. Cabinet Fronts: Cut from single sheet of not less than No. 12 gauge cold rolled sheet steel; fastened in place by adjustable trim clamps which will allow plumbing; same size as the cabinet box if surface mounted; size to overlap the box a minimum of 3/4" on all sides if flush mounted. Provide each door with a substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch. On doors more than 48" high provide a combination three point catch and lock with T -handle. Provide each lock with two keys, with all locks keyed alike. C. Finish: All back boxes galvanized; all exposed metal, including fronts, primed and finished in gray lacquer. 2.3 PANELBOARDS, GENERALLY A. Mount all panelboards in cabinets as specified hereinbefore, arranged for flush or surface mounting as indicated on drawings. B. Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where such a device is scheduled as a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of device -- 99074 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 16410- 1 01/01 scheduled. Where a breaker or switch is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. C. All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip free, thermal magnetic, indicating type unless noted otherwise. Provide all multiple pole breakers with common trip and single operating handle; handle ties between breakers are unacceptable. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. D. Connect all circuit interrupting devices with sequence phasing. E. Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits mounted in a cardholder on the inside of the panelboard cabinet. Cover directory with transparent sheet plastic. F. All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. and the building main panel shall be listed as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment." G. Submit shop drawings of each panelboard for review before commencing fabrication; drawings shall indicate number, size, interrupting rating and type of circuit protective devices; dimensions, gauges and type of construction of cabinets, size and material of main bus and lugs, and any other pertinent information necessary to determine compliance with the drawings and specifications. H. Provide each panelboard with a factory engraved nameplate which shall identify the panelboard name. 2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards shall have the number and size of bolted -in circuit breakers as scheduled. Panels shall be of General Electric, Square D, or Cutler Hammer manufacture, equivalent to Square D type NQOD with type QOB breakers. 2.5 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Unless otherwise noted or required, all disconnect switches shall be UL listed and shall meet NEMA Standard KSI for Type HD heavy duty switches. Switches shall be unfused unless noted otherwise; quick make, quick break; in NEMA 3R enclosures if exposed to the weather; elsewhere in NEMA I general purpose enclosures unless special enclosures are required. All motor circuit switches shall be horsepower rated. B. Switches shall be of General Electric, Square D, or Cutler Hammer manufacture, equivalent to General Electric Type TH quick make, quick break switches. C. Where space does not permit use of the above specified switches, such as within weatherproof fan housings, etc., use suitable horsepower rated tumbler switches as unfused disconnects; General Electric Type RB or equivalent. D. Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters, provide auxiliary poles in switches as required to disconnect all auxiliary control circuits in starters. 2.6 FUSES A. Furnish and install all fuses necessary for leaving the installation complete and in working order, including a complete set of fuses in each spare switch. B. Fuses shall conform to the latest NEMA Standards, and shall be UL listed and labeled (except as noted otherwise) They shall conform to the UL classes listed hereinafter. Voltage ratings shall be suitable for the systems to which the fuses are applied. C. Where the spacing of fuse clips in equipment is greater than required by the proper size of fuse, use suitable fuse reducers to fit the fuses. 99074 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 16410-2 01/01 e- D. Fuses shall be Bussman Type FRN or FRS "Fusetrons". Fuses shall be available in rating 0-600 amperes, shall be dual element time delay type, and shall have interrupting rating of 100,000 or 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. END OF SECTION 99074 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 16410-3 01/01 SECTION 16510 LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review catalog data and drawings on all equipment items. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations on the drawings and as specified herein. Should any designations be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All features specified or scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the specifications or schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called for. B. Fixtures: All lighting fixtures shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Furnish scale drawings, catalog data, samples of finish, distribution curves, and any other data required by the Architect for every type fixture. C. Electronic Ballast: All fluorescent ballasts shall be electronic type, 95% PF, "A" sound rating, 20% THD, full light output. D. Energy Saving Ballasts: All 2 lamp, 40 watt, rapid start ballasts installed in an interior space where the ambient temperature is 60 degrees F or higher shall be General Electric "Watt -Miser" energy saving ballast. The ballast shall be high power factor, UL labeled, Class P with automatic reset features and "A" sound rating. E. Lenses: Wherever acrylic lenses are specified or noted, the material used shall be virgin acrylic with a minimum thickness of 0.125 inches. F. Lamps: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the sizes and types specified. G. Fluorescent Lamps: T8, 35K. t^t 99074 LIGHTING 16510-1 01/01 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR FIXTURES A. Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the general construction and securely attached. B. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Refer to the ceiling installer's layout for exact location. Center the fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes accessible through ceiling panels. Install conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. C. Fixtures in Plaster Ceilings: Provide a suitable plaster ring or frame for each fixture recessed in a plaster ceiling. D. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided the attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure. Where they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. E. Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible. F. Reused Fixtures: Where existing lighting fixtures are to be relocated, carefully remove and store the fixture. When it is ready to be hung, thoroughly wash all dirt and dust from the fixture and lens, hang the fixture and install new lamps. Should any such fixtures be damaged in this process replace them with matching new ones at no cost to the owner. END OF SECTION 99074 LIGHTING 16510-2 01/01 h"► SECTION 16611 MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data and drawings on all equipment items. 1.3 SCOPE A. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, material, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to motor and equipment wiring and control as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. All motors will, unless otherwise noted, be furnished under other Divisions of the specifications, or will be furnished by the Owner. Where motors are mounted integrally with items of equipment, they will be erected in place with such equipment ready for electrical connection; such erection is not a part of the work under this Division. Where motors are to be installed as separate items, their foundations, anchor bolts and other provisions necessary to their erection will be provided as a part of the work of the Division under which they are furnished; their erection and final setting are a part of the work of this Division, and shall be done by specially skilled millwrights or similar craftsmen. 2.2 MOTOR STARTERS A. All motor starters (controllers) will, unless otherwise noted, be furnished under other divisions of the specifications, or will be furnished by the Owner. B. Install under this Division, including supporting structures, all motor starters and control equipment which are not shipped integrally mounted with the controlled equipment. Provide and install all wiring of every character, for both power and control, except that which is factory installed and shipped as an integral part of assembled equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT WIRING A. Connect complete for operation all items of heating, air conditioning, plumbing equipment, and all other electrical devices furnished by the Owner or under other Divisions of the specifications. Outlets of various types have been indicated at 99074 MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING 16611 -1 01/01 equipment locations, but no indications of exact location or scope of the work are shown on the drawings. Refer to the Owner and to the various Contractors for the work under the other Divisions for the scope of connections to equipment furnished by them and for the exact locations of all items. Request of the Owner and the aforementioned suppliers and contractors all rough -in drawings required for proper installation of the electrical work, in ample time to permit preparation of the drawings and thus avoid delays on the job. B. Where disconnect switches or circuit breakers are not provided integral with control equipment for motors and other electrical appurtenances, provide and install all disconnect switches required by the National Electrical Code and/or indicated. 3.2 ELEVATOR WIRING A. Provide electric feeders for elevator power as scheduled. Provide in each individual elevator feeder a circuit breaker with shunt trip where shown. Terminate each such feeder at the elevator controls as directed by the elevator manufacturer. B. Provide all circuits required for elevator control power. C. Provide circuits for elevator cab lights, terminated as directed by elevator manufacturer. 3.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS: A. Completely connect for operation all items for temperature controls which require electrical connections, furnishing all wiring, conduit and labor. END OF SECTION 99074 MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING 16611 - 2 01/01 SECTION 16711 SOUND RECORDING / HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product catalog sheets on each item of equipment with complete technical information. B. Submit installation Guide and User Manual for each item of equipment. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide and install a complete and operating sound recording system for the courtroom as specified herein. Also provide an Infrared Hearing Assistance system. Each system shall be complete with all equipment, devices, cables, jacks, connectors, brackets, hangers, racks, cabinets, and other accessories required for a complete system, even though each item is not specified herein. B. This system shall be listed as an alternate bid item on the bid form. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where a label is available, each item shall bear the UL label. B. The installation shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC). C. A firm specializing in the installation sound recording/hearing assistance systems shall accomplish the installation. That firm shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the installation of such systems. When requested, the firm shall submit a list of similar systems installed by the firm complete with contacts and telephone numbers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LIST OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS A. Automatic Mixer — (1 required) Sure AMS 8100, 8 channel automatic mixer with Intellimix B. Microphones — (7 required) Sure AMS 24 microphones mounted on 15" goosenecks C. Microphones — (2 required) Sure AMS 26 probe microphones suspended over the seating area. D. R.C.I. custom microphone mute switch panel (1 required) E. Recorder - (1 required) Denon CD-R1000P rack mount CD -R / CD -RW recorder. F. Infrared Modulator / Emitter - 0 required) Williams Sound WIR-TX850, 1 channel G. Infrared receiver (2 required) — Williams Sound WIR-RX7 body pack infrared receiver with ear bud. H. Microphone cables — (As required) Shielded, non -plenum rated. I. Miscellaneous hardware — (As required) 99074 SOUND RECORDING / HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM 16711 -1 01/01 2.2 AUTOMATIC MIXER Measurement Conditions (unless otherwise specified): full grain; 1 kHz, one channel activated; with AMS26 microphone; terminations: Line 10kf2, Phones 300 .O (tip -sleeve and ring -sleeve), Direct Out 10 k.S2,• Auto mode, equalization controls adjusted for flat response. A. Frequency Response (Ref 1 kHz, channel controls centered) 80 Hz to 20 kHz ±2 dB; - 3 dB corner at 50 Hz Voltage Gain (typical, controls full clockwise). Voltage Gain (typical, controls full clockwise) Output Input Mic Aux Line Headphone Direct Out AMS26 mic -20 dBu +5 dBu +20 dBu — -38 dBu (72 dB SPL in) Aux 4 dB 29 dB 44 dB 52 dB — Send/Return -20 dB 5 dB 20 dB 28 dB — Inputs Input Impedance Designed for Use with Actual (typical) Input Clipping Level Mic AMS Mics only 400 Q + 132 dB SPL Aux <2 kn 10 kS2 +24 dBu Send/Return <2 1<92 1 100 kn + 20 dBu Outputs Input Impedance Designed for Use with Actual (typical) Input Clipping Level Line 2_600 Q 600 +24 dBu Headphone 8-2000 60 S2 recom- mended 1 kQ +6 dBu Direct Out >2 kQ 1 kQ + 18 dBu Send/Return <2 kf2 1 kQ + 18 dBu B. Total Harmonic Distortion: <0.1% at +18 dBu output level, 80 Hz to 20 kHz (through 80 Hz -20 kHz filter; Input 1 and Master at 5, all other controls full counterclockwise). C. Hum and Noise: Equivalent Input Noise ................................... 27 dB SPL (A -weighted) Output Hum and Noise (through 20 Hz to 20 kHz filter; channel -- controls full counterclockwise) Master full counterclockwise ................... -90 dBu Master full clockwise .............................. -65 dBu 99074 SOUND RECORDING / HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM 16711 -2 01/01 D. Polarity: Positive pressure on AMS microphone diaphragm produces positive voltage on pin 1 (+) with respect to pin 2 (—) at Output. Send inputs to all outputs are non - inverting. AUX input to all outputs is inverting. E. Input Channel Activation: AttackTime ................................................. 4 msec Hold Time .................................................... 0.4 sec (switchable to 1.0 sec) DecayTime ................................................. 0.5 sec F. Off -Attenuation: 15 dB (switchable to oo) G. Overload and Shorting Protection: Shorting outputs, even for prolonged periods, causes no damage. Microphone inputs are not damaged by signals up to 3 V; Line and Monitor inputs by signals up to 20 V. H. Equalization: Low -frequency ............................................. 6 dB/octave cut, adjustable °* corner from 50 to 300 Hz g High -frequency ............................................. 6 dB at 5 kHz, ±8 dB at 10 kHz, shelving I. Limiter: Type........................................................... Peak Threshold .................................................... Switchable: off, +4, +8, and + 16 (dBu at output) Attack Time ................................................. 2 msec Recovery Time ............................................. 300 msec Indicator...................................................... Lights red when limiting occurs J. Input LEDs: Green on channel activation, red at 6 dB below clipping K. Operating Voltage: 1. AMS8100: 100— 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 200 mA 2. AMS81 OOE: 220- 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 100 mA L. Temperature Range: Operating .................................................... 00 to 60°C (321 to 135°F) Storage....................................................... -30° to 70°C (-200 to 165°F) M. Overall Dimensions: 3. 44.5 mm H x 483 mm W x 317 mm D 4. (1%x 19x 12Y2 inches) N. Net Weight: 4.3 kg (9 Ib 9 oz) 0. Certifications: 5. AMS8100: UL and cUL listed under UL813, CSA C22.2 No.1 6. AMS81OOE: Conforms to European Union directives, eligible to bear CE marking; VDE GS -Certified to EN 60 065; meets European Union EMC Immunity Requirements (EN 50 082— 1, 1992). P. CE Certification Note: The extreme sensitivity of the Directional Intellimix circuitry may allow some channel gating due to static discharge or abnormal electrical disturbance to the power or signal lines. The unit will not be damaged: normal operation will resume after the disturbance ceases. P" Q. Service Statement: For additional service or parts information, please contact Shure's Service department at 1-800-516-2525. Outside the United States, please contact your authorized Shure Service Center. 99074 SOUND RECORDING / HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM 16711 -3 01/01 2.3 MICROPHONES (All measurements taken at Direct Output of AMS mixer) A. Type: Condenser (electret bias) B. Frequency Response: 50 to 16,000 Hz, RUN TYPICAL FREQUENCY RESPONSE C. Polar Pattern: Cardioid (Unidirectional) TYPICAL POLAR PATTERNS D. Acceptance Angle: Optimized for chest placement. Microphone activates for sounds within +65° (typical) of front axis. E. Output Level (at 1,000 Hz): Open Circuit Voltage - -53dB typical (0 dB = 1 V/µbar). F. Impedance: 900 Q actual at Direct Output of AMS mixer. G. Noise: 1. 27 dB equivalent SPL typical, A -weighted. 2. 52.5 dB equivalent SPL typical, weighted per DIN 45405. H. Polarity: Pin 2 is front facing transducer; Pin 3 is rear -facing transducer. Positive pressure on microphone diaphragm produces positive voltage on Pin 2 relative to Pin 3 at AMS mixer Mic/Line output, and negative voltage on tip terminal at AMS mixer Direct Output connector. 2.4 RECORDER A. Audio Section: 1. Channels 2 -channel stereo 2. Disc Played Music CD, CD -R audio, CD -RW audio 99074 SOUND RECORDING / HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM 16711 -4 01/01 3. Disc Record 4. Frequency response 5. Dynamic range 6. S/N Ratio 7. Total Harmonic Distortion 8. Line out Level (10 kohms load) B. General: 1. Power Supply 2. Power Consumption 3. Dimensions 4. Weight 5. Accessory CD -R audio, CD -RW audio 2 Hz — 22.05 kHz. 100 dB (Play back) 108 dB (Play back) 0.003%, 1 kHz (Play back) 2.0 V rms (fixed) AC 120V, 60 Hz 26 W 434 (W) x 100.5 (H) x 285 (D) mm 17.1 " (W) x 4.0" (H) x 11.2" (D) 4.5 kg. 9.9 lbs. 2U rack mount kit included 2.5 SOUND PLUS — WIR TX850 INFRARED SYSTEM A. Modulator: 1 . The infrared system shall consist of separate modulator and emitter units, with portable receivers. The modulator unit shall be a half -rack style, metal enclosure. A rack panel shall be available to mount one or two modulator units within a single EIA rack space. An adjustable floor stand and mounting bracket shall be available to mount the modulator and emitter together for portable operation. 2. The modulator shall provide FM carrier signals of either 95 kHz and 250 kHz. The carrier signals shall use 50 kHz deviation and 50 /iS pre -emphasis. The carrier signals (baseband) shall be transmitted to one or more emitters by 50 Q RG58 coaxial cable with BNC-type connectors. A BNC— type baseband input jack and baseband output jack shall be provided on the modulator. The modulator shall be powered by an external 24 VAC, 10 VA, 50-60 Hz power supply, connected via a three -pin Molex power connector. 3. The modulator shall be switchable to provide single -channel operations at either 95 kHz or 250 kHz. It shall have a rocker -type power switch, power LED indicator, carrier indicator LED, and a bar graph -type LED audio indicator. The Modulator shall have a modulated IR LED on the front panel for testing purposes, and a headphone jack that accommodates mono and stereo 1/4" headphones. The modulator shall have a rotary audio input level control, and a push-button switch to select soft limiting or variable slope input compression audio processing. The modulator shall have two timers that automatically shut off the carrier when there is no audio signal present for 30 minutes. The modulator shall have a combination input jack that accepts a 3 -pin XLR plug for balanced microphone input or a 1/4" TRS plug for balanced or unbalanced line -level input. The XLR input shall be low impedance, accept signal levels from 100W to 90 mV, and supply 15 V simplex power per DIN45596. The TRS jack shall accept balanced or unbalanced audio signal levels from 21 mV to 10 V. A 9 -pin, Sub -D type female jack shall provide additional signal connections within the modulator circuitry. The modulator shall carry a five year parts and labor warranty. The modulator shall be the Williams Sound Corp. Model MOD 111. B. Emitter: The emitter shall be contained in a metal enclosure with an unbreakable lens. The emitter shall include an omnidirectional mounting bracket for permanent installation and a bracket shall be available for mounting on a floor stand for portable installations. Each emitter shall be powered by a 24 VAC, 50 VA, 50-60 Hz power supply. The power connector shall be a 3 -pin Molex -type. The emitter shall have a BNC-type baseband input and a BNC-type baseband output jack. The emitter shall have a repeater circuit to allow any number of emitters to operate from the baseband 99074 SOUND RECORDING / HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM 16711 -5 01/01 signal. The emitter shall have a visible LED indicator for power and for baseband signal. The emitter shall shut off when the baseband signal is not present. The emitter shall provide an effective coverage area of 10,000 sq. ft. (930 sq. m.). The emitter shall be convection -cooled, without fans. The coverage pattern shall be a 501 cone. The emitter shall carry a five-year warranty on parts and labor. The emitter shall be a Williams Sound Corp. Model WIR TX8. C. Receivers: The receiver shall be a body -pack type with an IR detector lens on the face of the unit. The unit shall have a lanyard for hands-free operation. The receiver shall have a rotary -type volume control. The receiver shall operate for 30 hours with two AA alkaline batteries and for 15 hours per charge with Ni -Cad AA batteries. The receiver shall be charged without battery removal via charger contacts in the case. A drop-in charger accessory shall recharge the batteries in 14 hours. The receiver shall be housed in an impact resistant plastic case with a hinged battery door that does not separate from the receiver. The receiver shall receive 95 kHz or 250 kHz modulated IR signals with 50 NS de -emphasis. The receiver shall have a 3.5 mm stereo phone jack and accommodate low -impedance mono or stereo earphones, and headphones. The receiver shall accommodate Neckloop telecoil couplers. The receivers shall provide 130 dB maximum SPL output with an earbud-type earphone. The system electrical frequency response shall be 25 Hz to 20 kHz, + 1, -3 dB and the signal to noise ratio shall be 60 dB. The receiver shall be covered by a five year parts and labor warranty, -- excluding earphones, headphones, batteries, and chargers. The receiver model shall be the Williams Sound Corp. Model WIR RX7 (250 kHz). 2.6 MICROPHONE MUTE SWITCH PANEL A. Fabricate a custom panel at the Judge's bench consisting of 8 switches for muting the microphones. Each switch shall be clearly labeled and easily readable. Submit dimensions and details prior to fabrication. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All microphone cables and other wiring associated with this system shall be installed in conduit. B. Floor boxes for microphone cables shall be as specified under RACEWAYS Section. C. All equipment associated with this system shall be installed by the firm specializing in sound systems, and all sound wiring connections shall be made by this firm. 3.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND TRAINING A. After installation, the installing firm shall test and adjust the system as required to achieve optimum performance. B. The installing firm shall deliver to the owner, a booklet containing spec sheets for each equipment component, installation instructions, owner's manuals, and name and telephone number of the installing firm. C. The installing firm shall provide instruction and training for operating the system. Allot a minimum of 3 hours for this item. END OF SECTION 99074 SOUND RECORDING / HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM 16711 -6 01/01 SECTION 16810 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Uniform General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. The installing contractor and/or equipment manufacturer shall provide complete and detailed shop drawings and include: �- 1. Control panel wiring schematics and interconnections. 2. Point to point wiring diagram showing terminal connections to all system devices. This would include the size of conductors to each device and proposed routing. After review, this shall become the installation drawing. 3. Riser wiring diagram and conduit sizes. 4. Floor plan drawings locating all devices associated with the Fire Alarm System. 5. Factory data sheets on each piece of equipment to be used and so marked as to dimensions, size, voltage, style, catalog number, manufacturer's names, and configuration. 6. Detailed system description and operation describing system functions. 7. Complete Bill of Material for reference. 8. One set of installation, operation and maintenance manuals for submittal review of fire alarm system. Required number of manuals are still required at project closet. B. All submittal data shall be in bound form with contractor's name, supplier's name, project name, and state fire alarm license number adequately identified. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. The installing contractor shall be the authorized representative of the fire alarm manufacturer to sell, install and service the manufacturer's equipment. B. The installing contractor must be licensed by the state Fire Marshall to sell, install and service fire alarm systems, as required by Article 5.43-2 of the Texas Insurance Code. C. The installing contractor shall have on their staff an installation superintendent who is licensed by the State Fire Marshall's office for such purpose and under whose supervision installation shall take place, as required by the Texas Insurance Code. D. The fire alarm installation firm will have factory trained personnel performing the control panel wiring for the system that they were trained for. The firm shall also maintain a stock of parts and components used in the system. E. The qualifications of the installation firm, the availability of replacement parts and service records will be considered. 1.4 CLOSE-OUT MANUALS A. Provide three sets of operation and maintenance manuals which includes: *^^ 1. Complete typewritten operating instructions. 2. Wiring diagrams for the control panel with all terminals identified. 3. A parts list for the system identifying the components with ordering numbers. 99074 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16810-1 01/01 4. A plan showing conduit size, number and size of conductors and locations of all devices. 5. Printout of system program with disk and with all levels of passwords. 6. Floor plan locating all fire alarm devices with their identification points labeled. Provide DXF format Cadd disk. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The installation and testing shall be made under the provisions of the latest National Electrical Code (NFPA-70); NFPA 101 (Life Safety Code). NFPA 71, NFPA 72, Vernon Statue, UL Standards (1480, 864, 268, 268A, 217, 521, 228, 464, 1638, 38, 346, 1481), and all other applicable state and local codes and ordinances. The Contractor shall submit the new fire alarm equipment layout to the local fire alarm authority having jurisdiction for approval. 1.6 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish and install and place in operating condition new devices for the existing, fire detection and alarm system as specified herein and indicated on the drawings. It is the intent to obtain a complete system which shall operate as described herein, and all equipment necessary for such operation shall be provided whether or not each item is enumerated herein or described on the drawings. The system shall include, but not be limited to, all control panels, power supplies, alarm initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices, conduit, wire, fittings and all other accessories required to provide a complete and operable system. The system shall operate as a continuous sounding system which shall have multiple audible alarm circuits. The system signaling line circuits shall be wired as style six Class A circuits. The system notification appliance circuits shall be wired as Style Y (Class B) supervised circuits. 1.7 QUALITY A. To establish the minimum standards of performance, function, quality, and features of system desired, the equipment specified is that of the Notifier Company. B. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices, and other facilities covered by this specification or noted on contract drawings and installation specifications shall be of the best suited for the intended use and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or, if provided by different manufacturers, recognized as compatible by both manufacturers. C. All equipment and material shall be new and unused, unless directed otherwise. D. Wiring: All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code, local codes and the National Fire Protection Association -70, Article 760. The minimum wire sizes shall be 12 gauge for AC power supply connections and auxiliary circuits, 14 gauge for DC power supply connections, 16 gauge for audible alarm circuits. Cable for SLC loops shall be 18 to 12 AWG twisted pair with a shield jacket. Shield continuity must be maintained. Intelligent detector wiring must not be routed adjacent to, or in the same conduit with Audio/Visual power wiring, 120/240 VAC power wiring or other high current circuits. Size SLC conductors per manufacturers instructions and anticipate all future device additions. E. Wire shall be UL listed for limited energy (300V) and fire alarm applications and shall be installed in conduit where concealed and a surface metallic raceway when exposed. All wiring between floors, in mechanical rooms, or in risers shall be installed in conduit with a minimum size of 3/4". 99074 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16810-2 01/01 v 1.8 YEAR 2000 CONFORMITY A. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all requirements .,, surrounding installation of the Fire Alarm System with all trades including, but, not exclusive of: electrical contractor, sprinkler contractor, and elevator contractor. Adequate coordination shall be provided to insure proper installation and interface to all peripheral items required to interact with the Fire Alarm System to provide a complete and functional system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. The Fire Alarm and Detection System shall be a single integrated system by a single manufacturer. The Contractor shall assume sole responsibility for its operation. The fire detection portion of the system shall consist of a fire alarm panel and shall contain all power supplies, relays, modules and batteries as required for the operation described herein. The equipment described herein is generally of Notifier manufacture. All components of the system shall be fully supervised. 99074 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16810-3 01/01 A. The contractor warrants that any system (including its associated hardware, software, and firmware) and each hardware, software, and firmware product delivered under this contract shall provide Year 2000 conformity. Year 2000 conformity shall mean that neither performance nor functionality is affected by dates prior to, during and after the year 2000. In particular (1) no value for current date will cause any interruption in operation; (2) date -based functionality must behave consistently for dates prior to, during and after year 2000; (3) in all interfaces and data storage, the century in any date must be specified either explicitly or by unambiguous algorithms or inferencing rules; and (4) Year 2000 must be recognized as a leap year. The contractor further warrants that any system, component, hardware, software or firmware product that is found not to meet Year 2000 conformity or that fails as a result of not meeting Year 2000 conformity shall be upgraded, repaired, or replaced solely at the contractors expense. Nothing in this warranty shall be construed to limit any rights or remedies the Owner may otherwise have under this contract with respect to defects other than Year 2000 performance. 1.9 TESTING, GUARANTEE, SERVICE A. A factory trained technical representative of the manufacturer shall perform the final connections, complete system checkout and testing of the system, and it shall be subject to the final acceptance and approval of the engineer and local authorities. Upon completion and acceptance, the owner and/or his representatives) shall be instructed inthe proper use of the system. A written copy of the final system test and checkout shall be provided detailing the function of each device. Furnish the Owner, Architect, Engineer and all authorities having jurisdiction a Certificate of Compliance. B. All equipment and wiring shall be free from defects in workmanship and materials, under normal use and service, for a period of one year from owner acceptance or beneficial occupancy, whichever comes first. Any equipment shown to be defective shall be �^ replaced, repaired, or adjusted free of charge. C. The manufacturer shall be represented by a local service organization and the name of such supplied to the Owner and Engineer. 1.10 COORDINATION A. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all requirements .,, surrounding installation of the Fire Alarm System with all trades including, but, not exclusive of: electrical contractor, sprinkler contractor, and elevator contractor. Adequate coordination shall be provided to insure proper installation and interface to all peripheral items required to interact with the Fire Alarm System to provide a complete and functional system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. The Fire Alarm and Detection System shall be a single integrated system by a single manufacturer. The Contractor shall assume sole responsibility for its operation. The fire detection portion of the system shall consist of a fire alarm panel and shall contain all power supplies, relays, modules and batteries as required for the operation described herein. The equipment described herein is generally of Notifier manufacture. All components of the system shall be fully supervised. 99074 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16810-3 01/01 2.2 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION A. Operation of manual or automatic initiating device shall cause the following events to occur: 1. The System alarm LED shall flash. 2. A local sounding device in the panel shall be activated. 3. The 80 -character LCD display and remote LCD annunciators shall indicate all pertinent information associated with the alarm and its location. 4. All automatic programs assigned to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated indicating devices and relays activated, such as: - a. The appropriate indication shall appear on the fire control panel. b. An evacuation tone shall sound on all alarm horns and all visual strobes and exit signs shall flash. _. c. Remote Point Annunciation devices shall show an alarm condition if devices connected to it are in alarm condition. d. All smoke dampers shall close. B. When a trouble condition is detected by one of the system initiating devices, the following functions shall immediately occur: 1. The System Trouble LED shall flash. 2. A local sounding device in the panel shall be activated. 3. The 80 -character LCD display shall indicate all pertinent information associated with the trouble condition and its location. However, unacknowledged alarm messages shall have priority over trouble messages, and if such an alarm must also be displayed, the trouble message shall not be displayed on the LCD. C. Activation of the control panel Acknowledge switch in response to a single new trouble or alarm condition shall silence the panel sounding device and change the System alarm or Trouble LEDs from flashing to steady -ON. If additional new alarm or trouble conditions -- exist in the system, activation of this switch shall advance the display to the next alarm or trouble condition that exists, and shall not silence the local audible device or change the LEDs to steady until all new conditions have been so acknowledged. _ D. New alarm conditions shall always be displayed before new trouble conditions. Occurrence of a new alarm or trouble condition shall cause the panel to "resound" and repeat the sequences previously described. E. Activation of the Signal Silence Switch shall cause all appropriate indicating appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of indicating circuits and relays silenced by this switch shall be fully programmable. F. Activation of the System Reset Switch shall cause all electronically -latched initiating -- devices or zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to return to the normal condition. G. If alarm conditions exist in the system after the System Reset Switch activation, the system shall then resound the alarm conditions as previously indicated. H. Activation of the System Test Switch shall initiate an automatic test of all intelligent detectors in the system. Such test shall activate the electronics in each intelligent device, simulating an alarm condition. A report summarizing the results of this test shall be displayed automatically on the front panel. I. Activation of the Lamp Test Switch shall turn on all LED indicators, LCD display and local sounder, and then return to the previous condition. J. The system shall include a special Automatic Detector Test which permits a serviceman to test all intelligent detectors from the main control panel. K. The system shall include independent "Watch Dog" timers to detect and report failure of any microprocessor circuit, memory, or software. L. The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without the need for special tools or PROM programmers and shall not require replacement of 99074 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16810-4 01/01 memory ICs. All programming may be accomplished through the standard control panel keyboard. All programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory. M. The programming function shall be entered with a special password that may be selected when the system is installed. The password may be changed in the field to a new value at any time by entering the old password and requesting a password change. In the event that the programmer may enter a password and then lose or forget it, the system shall be designed such that the password may be determined by special procedures available through the system manufacturer. 2.3 CONTROL PANEL A. The control panel is existing and shall be reprogrammed for new devices. 2.4 SMOKE DETECTORS A. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. The Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detectors shall connect with two wires to one of the control panel loops. The detectors shall use the photoelectric principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density. The detectors shall be ceiling -mount and shall include a twist -lock base. 2. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself, by activating a magnetic switch, or may be activated remotely on command from the control panel. 3. The detectors shall provide address -setting means on the detector head using rotary decimal switches. The detectors shall also store an internal identifying code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector. 4. The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. Both LEDs may be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. The detector shall be supplied with a Notifier BX -501 or B524RB base. The smoke detector shall be a Notifier SDX-551, or equal and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 2.5 MODULES A. Monitor Module: 1. The Monitor module shall be used to connect a supervised zone of conventional initiating devices (any n.o. dry contact device, including 4 -wire smoke detectors) to one of the SLC loops. The Monitor Module shall mount in a 4 -inch square 2-1/8" deep electrical box. The zone may be wired for Style D or Style B operation. r-* 2. The Monitor module shall provide address -setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under .� normal conditions, indicating that the Monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. Monitor Module shall be a Notifier MMX -1, or equal and UL listed. B. Control Module: 1. The Control Module shall be used to connect a conventional indicating appliance circuit (IAC) of 24 VDC compatible polarized audio/visual indicating appliances to one of the SLC loops. The Control Module shall mount in a standard 4 -inch square 2-1/8" deep electrical box. The IAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y operation. The 99074 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16810-5 01/01 control module may also be wired as a dry contact (from C) relay. Power for the relay coil shall be provided by the SLC loop to reduce wiring connection requirements. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate loop from the main control panel or from supervised remote power supplies. 2. The Control Module shall provide address -setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Control Module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. Control Module shall be a Notifier CMX-1, or equal and UL listed. C. Isolator Module: 1. The Isolator Module shall be used to isolate wire -to -wire short circuits on an SLC loop in order to limit the number of other modules or detectors that are in capacitated by the short circuit fault. If a wire -to -wire short occur, the isolator shall automatically open -circuit the SLC loop. When the short is corrected, the isolators shall automatically re -connect the isolated section of the SLC loop. 2. The Isolator module shall not require any address -setting, although each isolator will electrically reduce the capacity of the loop by two detector or module address. The isolator module will mount in a standard 4 -inch deep electrical box. It shall provide a single LED which shall flash to indicate that the isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short has been detected and isolated. Isolator module shall be a Notifier ISO -X, or equal and UL listed. Provide minimum two per floor. 2.6 MANUAL PULL STATIONS A. Manual fire alarm stations shall be non -coded, non-breakglass type equipment with a key to reset, pull station. Each manual stations shall be Notifier #BGX-101 L or equal and shall be U.L. listed. 2.7 TAMPER SWITCHES A. Tamper switches for gate valves and PIV shall be furnished an installed by Division 15 and connected to the Fire Alarm System by Division 16. Provide monitor modules as required under Division 16. Notifier OSY2 or PIBV2 UL listed or equal. 2.8 INDICATING DEVICES A. The alarm indicating devices shall be UL listed strobe/horn with synchronized temporal pattern ANSI S3.41 and synchronized strobes housed in common frame and finished in red. The alarm signals shall be Wheelock #AS-2475-VFR flush mounted unit or equal with DSM -12/24 -R -SYNC module. B. The strobe unit shall be a Wheelock #SR-2475-VFR synchronized module. 2.9 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL A. Remote annunciator panel shall be a Notifier LCD -80 and all require cable and backbox 2.10 DUCT DETECTOR A. Duct detector shall be a Notifier DHX-501 /SDX-551 /ST or equal. 99074 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16810-6 01/01 74 2.11 CONVENTIONAL WATERFLOW DETECTORS A. Waterflow switches shall be furnished and installed by Division 15 and connected to the Fire Alarm system by Division 16. Provide monitor modules as required by Division 16. Provide Notifier WFD UL listed or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of the system shall be made by the Contractor under the supervision of a representative of the manufacturer who shall make the final connection to the system, perform the functional tests of the system and place it in operation. B. Installation shall be in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Consult manufacturer for all wiring diagrams, schematics, sizes, outlets, etc. before installing conduits and pulling wires. C. Fire alarm devices shall be mounted upon and all splices made in Listed Boxes. Wiring splices are to be avoided to the extent possible and Transposing or changing colors will not be permitted". D. Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes. Circuit shall be labeled as "FIRE ALARM". E. As indicated on the drawings, each zone shall be labeled on the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Names of the zones shall be coordinated with the Owner, and shall meet with the Owner's approval. F. Fire Sprinkler System shall each be indicated on a separate zone. Gate Valves and Post - Indicator Valves may be on the same zone per floor. G. Use only identified conduit entries at Fire Alarm Panel or request approval for other penetrations in cabinets (certain areas require clear space for interior components). Cabinet shall be grounded to either a cold water pipe or grounding rod. H. Heat and Smoke Detectors: The location of detectors shown on the plans is schematic only. The detector must be located according to code requirements. I. Smoke detectors should be installed to favor the air flow towards return openings and not located where air supply diffusers can dilute smoke before it reaches the detector. J. Mount pull stations at 4'AFF and indicating devices at 80"AFF. 3.2 FINAL INSPECTION A. After the system has been placed in service and all items are functioning properly, call for a final inspection. The manufacturer's representative shall be present and shall demonstrate the operation of the system to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3.3 INSTRUCTION A. The representative of the manufacturer shall allot eight (8) hours to instruct the Owner's personnel as to the complete operation of the system. END OF SECTION - 99074 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16810-7 01/01